JP6980296B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game and executes an effect based on the determination result.

In the conventional gaming machine, when it is determined whether or not the game ball wins a prize at the starting port and the special game is executed, the special symbol display shows the determination result after the special symbol is variablely displayed. The symbol is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in a predetermined image display device, the effect symbol is variablely displayed along with the variable display of the special symbol, and the determination result is shown as the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-96091

By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interest of the production.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the production.

The present invention has adopted the following configuration in order to solve the above problems.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, the special game determination of whether or not to execute the special game is executed based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the special game determination for a predetermined time. It is possible to stop and display the identification information after the lapse of time, and in the variable display of the identification information, the first command corresponding to the result of the special game determination is transmitted, and the above-mentioned is performed before the special game determination is performed. The pre-determination can be executed based on the determination information, the second command is transmitted based on the result of the pre-determination, and the effect control means receives the first command in the variation display of the identification information. In this case, it is possible to execute the first variable effect by the first effect symbol and the second variable effect by the second effect symbol different from the first effect symbol, and when the second command is received, the advance The pre-determination effect can be executed based on the result of the determination, and the first variation effect is the start operation effect for operating the first effect symbol in a predetermined mode, and the first operation effect after the start operation effect. The pre-determination effect includes a variable display effect of varyingly displaying an effect symbol, and the pre-determination effect includes a first pre-determination effect and a second pre-determination effect whose effect mode is different from that of the first pre-determination effect. In the stop display of the identification information, the first stop display by the first effect symbol and the second stop display by the second effect symbol can be executed, and after the variation display effect, the first effect symbol is predetermined. The first stop display can be executed after the pre-stop operation effect, and the second variation effect is executed during the pre-stop operation effect. If the first command is not received in the variable display of the identification information, the start operation effect and the first pre-determination effect cannot be executed, but the second pre-determination effect can be executed. Ah it is, when receiving the next of said first command during the execution of the first variation effect, executing the first variation effect in accordance with the following the first command.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the fun of the production.

Front view of pachinko gaming machine 1 Top view of a part of the front side of the gaming machine 1 Perspective view of the back side of the gaming machine 1 An exploded perspective view of the game board 5. Overall block diagram of gaming machine 1 Flow chart showing main processing in main control unit 100 Flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control unit 100 Flow chart showing the setting change process of the main control unit 100 Flow chart showing RWM clear processing of main control unit 100 Flow chart showing the setting confirmation process of the main control unit 100 Flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in the main control unit 100 Detailed flowchart of the start port detection switch process in step S200 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing of step S300 in FIG. A flowchart showing the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern setting process of step S408 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the stopped processing of step S416 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the jackpot game process of step S500 in FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process of step S519 of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the jackpot symbol determination table used for the determination of the jackpot symbol in the jackpot determination process of step S407 of FIG. A flowchart showing the performance display data setting process in the main control unit 100. The figure which shows the display information of the information display in each game section The figure which shows an example of the special symbol variation pattern table used when selecting the variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal game state. A diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a probabilistic game state. A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed by the effect control unit 130. A flowchart showing an example of command reception processing in step E10 of FIG. 23. A flowchart showing an example of the start winning command processing in step E111 of FIG. 24. Diagram showing an example of the icon change scenario table Figure showing an example of the effect production scenario table at the start A diagram showing an example of a zone production scenario table A diagram showing an example of a chance eye production scenario table A flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start command processing in step E113 of FIG. 24. A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in the image / sound control unit 140. A flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed by the lamp control unit 150. A diagram showing a timing chart and an example of production when various drive sources are initially operated while changing settings. A diagram showing a timing chart and an example of production when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM. A diagram showing a timing chart and an example of production when various drive sources are initially operated while checking the settings. The figure which shows the operation comparison at various operation timings of various drive sources. A diagram showing a timing chart and an example of production when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the settings. A diagram showing a timing chart and an example of production when various drive sources are initially operated after clearing the RWM. A diagram showing a timing chart and an example of production when various drive sources are initially operated after checking the settings. A diagram for explaining the cycle fluctuation of a special symbol The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the screen of the 1st image display apparatus 70 in the effect mode A set in a normal gaming state. The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the screen of the 1st image display apparatus 70 in the effect mode D set in the probability change game state. A diagram showing a timing chart showing an example of the effect from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the first special symbol when it is determined that the jackpot is lost in the jackpot determination in the normal game state. A diagram showing a timing chart showing an example of the effect from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the first special symbol when it is determined that the jackpot is lost in the jackpot determination in the normal game state. The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 A diagram showing a timing chart showing an example of the effect when the volume adjustment operation is performed during the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the 1st image display apparatus 70 at each timing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the 1st image display apparatus 70 at each timing of FIG. The figure which shows the timing chart which showed an example of the production when the SPSP reach production is performed. It is a continuation timing chart of FIG. 53, and is a diagram showing a timing chart when a loss is notified as a result of SPSP reach effect. The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 A diagram showing an example of a timing chart when a jackpot is notified as a result of SPSP reach production. The figure which shows an example of the production when the big hit is notified as a result of the SPSP reach production. A diagram showing an example of a timing chart when a look-ahead continuous effect is performed before two changes of the look-ahead target change. It is a figure which shows the continuation production of FIG. 61, and is the figure which shows an example of the timing chart from one change before the look-ahead target change to the middle of a look-ahead target change. The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. 61 and FIG. The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. 61 and FIG. The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. 61 and FIG. The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. 61 and FIG. The figure which shows an example of the timing chart when the effect control unit 130 cannot receive the command from the main control unit 100 during the variation display of a special symbol. The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. The figure which shows the effect example that the 1st hold icon HA3 on the leftmost side is erased when one extra 1st hold icon HA is displayed. The figure which shows the effect example that the 1st hold icon HA1 on the rightmost side is erased when one extra 1st hold icon HA is displayed. A diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the power is cut off during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. The figure which shows an example of the display at each timing of FIG. 72 The figure which shows an example of the display at each timing of FIG. 72 The figure which shows an example of the display at each timing of FIG. 72

Hereinafter, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, FIG. 2 is a plan view of a part of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back surface side of the gaming machine 1.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which a game ball (game medium) flows down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail, a stopper, etc.) to the island equipment of a game store. ) Is fixed.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

An audio output device 9 including a speaker and a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative LEDs are provided above the opening 8 of the glass frame 4. Further, in the lower part of the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as game balls paid out from the payout device 95, which will be described later, based on the establishment of the granting condition, and above. A lower plate 12 for receiving and storing a game ball that has flowed into an overflowing ball flow path that does not fit in the plate 11 and is provided, and a launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch the game ball are provided. ..

The voice output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), sound effects, and the like to produce sound (sounds such as music and voice). Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and the lighting is produced by changing the light irradiation direction and the emission color of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light / blink when an abnormality occurs in which the glass frame 4 is opened or the game ball cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The upper plate 11 is for storing the game balls supplied to the launching device 26. The game ball stored in the upper plate 11 is guided to the launching device 26, and is launched into the game area 5a with a hitting force according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (FIGS. 1 or 2) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. See) and.

The effect button device 16 has an effect button 17 capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the effect button 17, and an effect button 17 in a normal state and a normal state. A button drive device 17b provided with a button drive motor for changing to a protruding state located above and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 into a normal state and a vibration state vibrating in a predetermined mode. The effect button 17 is provided with an effect button light emitting LED 17c for changing the effect button 17 into a light-off state and a lighting state in which light is emitted in a predetermined mode. The player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1 by using the effect button device 16.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (up button 191A, left button 192A, down button 193A, right button 194A) capable of performing operations such as selection operation, and a cross for detecting the operation of the cross key 19. A key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 5) is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for accepting a game ball that does not fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 12 is formed between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12. Further, in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, a full plate detection switch 32a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the occurrence of a plate full error in which the game ball is full is provided in the lower plate 12, and the full plate 12a is provided with a fullness detection switch 32a. While the fullness is detected, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 95 described later is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and the launch handle 15 are touched by the player's hand. (Not shown) and a firing volume made of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. When the touch sensor detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, the launcher 26 (see FIG. 5) is configured to be able to launch the game ball.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion (not shown) for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 5) for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, and a game board. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in the closed state, and an opening detection switch for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 face the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. ..

The launching device 26 includes a launching member for launching a game ball and a launching solenoid for driving the launching member. The launching device 26 launches the game ball toward the game area 5a by operating the launching solenoid with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the launching handle 15 of the launching operation device 13.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

A curved inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36 are provided at positions near the outer edge of the game board 5, and a game area 5a in which a game ball can flow down to a portion surrounded by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36. Is formed. Further, between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, a launch ball guide path 38 for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a is formed. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing game ball to the outside of the game area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a.

At the substantially center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and the game area 5a is launched by the first firing force by the decorative frame 40. It is divided into a left game area where the game ball is flown down and a right game area where the game ball launched by the second launch force stronger than the first launch force flows down, and the left game area and the right game area. Is adapted to communicate below the decorative frame 40.

On the left side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the left game area into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the inside of the decorative frame 40 is provided by the warp device 41. A stage portion 42 is provided so that the game ball introduced in the above can be rolled and flowed down below the decorative frame 40.

Below the left side of the decorative frame 40, three general winning openings 43 that allow the game ball to always win (win) are provided at intervals, and below the right side of the decorative frame 40, the game One general winning opening 43 is provided so that the ball can always win (win). When the game balls that have won (winned) in the general winning opening 43 are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5) (the granting condition is satisfied), a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls are released. It is paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 11 as a prize ball (giving a prize value).

Below the stage portion 42, a first starting port 45 (starting winning area of the first special symbol) is provided so that a game ball can always win (win). When a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45, the right to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) is granted (special figure determination information described later is stored). .. Further, when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are used as prize balls (giving prize value) from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). Will be paid out to. Inside the first starting port 45, a first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 5) for detecting a game ball that has won a prize (winning ball) in the first starting port 45 is provided.

A variable starting portion 46 is provided in the game area 5a diagonally lower to the right of the first starting port 45. The variable starting unit 46 can or easily opens the game ball from a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball based on the hit determination (auxiliary game determination) described later. It is configured to be changeable to a state.

Specifically, the variable starting portion 46 has a second starting port opening / closing member that can move in the front-rear direction as well as a flow path for the game ball by inclining the upper surface downward in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 1). 48, a second starting opening 47 (starting winning area of the second special symbol) that opens upward just below the second starting opening opening / closing member 48, and a game ball that wins (wins) in the second starting opening 47. The second starting port 47a (see FIG. 5) and the second starting port opening / closing member 48 are moved toward the front (winning restriction position) to convert the second starting port 47 into a closed state. , A second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 5) for converting the second starting opening 47 into an open state by moving the second starting opening opening / closing member 48 toward the rear (winning allowable position). ..

When the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 47 opened during the auxiliary game described later and is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 5) (the granting condition is satisfied), the special game is played. The right to make a big hit judgment as to whether or not to execute (big hit game) is granted (special figure judgment information described later is stored). Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the second start port 47 and is detected by the second start port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two) are awarded from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out to the upper plate 11 as a prize value grant).

In the right game area in the game area 5a, a game ball is provided with a normal map gate 44 (normal map start area) through which the game ball can always pass, and the game ball that has passed through the normal map gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a. Then, the prize ball is not given, but the right to make an auxiliary game judgment (hit judgment) as to whether or not to execute the hit game is given (the general figure judgment information described later is stored).

Below the normal gate 44, based on the fact that the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, it is possible to change from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball to a closed state where it is possible or easy to win a prize. A first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) is provided.

The first variable winning unit 49 (first variable winning device) becomes a flow path for a game ball by tilting the upper surface downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) (a part of the bottom surface of the central flow path 91b). The first large winning opening opening / closing member 51 that can move in the front-rear direction, and the first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward just below the first large winning opening opening / closing member 51. By moving the 1st big prize opening detection switch 50a for detecting the game ball that has won (winning) in the 1st big winning opening 50 and the 1st big winning opening opening / closing member 51 toward the front (winning restriction position). To change the first prize opening 50 to the open state by converting the first prize opening 50 to the closed state and moving the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 toward the rear (winning allowable position). The first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b (see FIG. 5) is provided.

Then, when the first big winning opening opening / closing member 51 moves backward and the first big winning opening 50 is converted from the closed state to the open state during the big hit game described later, the upper surface of the first big winning opening opening / closing member 51 The game ball that has flowed down and the game ball that has reached the first prize opening 50 can win the first prize opening 50. When the game balls that have won the first prize opening 50 are detected by the first prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are awarded from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out to the upper plate 11 as a ball.

Below the first variable winning unit 49, based on the fact that the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, the game ball can be won from a closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win (winning) or easily opened. A variable second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) is provided.

The second variable winning unit 55 (second variable winning device) becomes a flow path for a game ball by tilting the upper surface downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) (one of the bottom surfaces of the first downstream flow path 91e). Along with forming a portion), a second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 that can move in the front-rear direction and a second large winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward just below the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57. And, the 2nd big winning opening detection switch 56a for detecting the game ball that has won (winning) in the 2nd big winning opening 56 and the 2nd big winning opening opening / closing member 57 are moved forward (winning restricted position). As a result, the 2nd prize opening 56 is converted to the closed state, and the 2nd prize opening opening / closing member 57 is moved rearward (the winning allowable position) to change the 2nd prize opening 56 to the open state. It is equipped with a second prize opening opening / closing solenoid 57b (see FIG. 5) for the purpose.

Then, when the second big winning opening opening / closing member 57 moves backward and the second big winning opening 56 is converted from the closed state to the open state during the big hit game, it flows down the upper surface of the second big winning opening opening / closing member 57. The game ball that has been played or the game ball that has reached the second big prize opening 56 can win a prize in the second big winning opening 56. When the game balls that have won the second prize opening 56 are detected by the second prize opening detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are awarded from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out to the upper plate 11 as a ball.

The game ball launched in the left game area either wins in any of the three general winning openings 43 and the first starting opening 45 provided below the decorative frame 40, or flows into the out opening 39. .. Therefore, the game ball launched in the left game area is provided in the right game area, the normal gate 44, the general winning opening 43, the first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), and the second variable winning section 55. You will not win (pass) the (2nd Grand Prize 56).

Further, the game ball launched into the right game area passes through the normal drawing gate 44 or the like via the upstream flow path 91a, and is provided in the right game area with one general winning opening 43 and a variable starting portion 46 (second). To win a prize in any of the starting port 47), the first variable winning section 49 (first large winning opening 50), and the second variable winning section 55 (second large winning opening 56), or to flow into the out opening 39. Become. Therefore, the game ball launched in the right game area does not win a prize in the general winning opening 43 and the first starting opening 45 provided in the left gaming area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, a game ball that has won a first large winning opening 50 and a second major winning opening 56, and an out opening 39. An out-ball flow path is provided that accepts and collects out-balls made of inflowing game balls and causes them to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see FIG. 5) is provided at the most downstream portion of the out-ball flow path. The game ball detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a is discharged to the outside (island equipment) of the game machine 1 from the discharge port on the back surface side of the game machine 1.

A main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a. The main information display 59 includes a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62. Further, the main information display 59 includes a first special symbol hold display 63, a second special symbol hold display 64, and a normal symbol hold display 65. Further, the main information display 59 includes a round number display 66, a right-handed display 67, and a status confirmation display 68.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the first starting port 45. Yes, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol performed based on the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol performed based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal symbol gate 44. ..

The jackpot judgment is special figure judgment information (random value for jackpot judgment, random value for jackpot symbol judgment, random for reach judgment) when a game ball wins (wins) in the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47. Numerical values, random numbers for determining special figure fluctuation patterns, etc.) are acquired, and it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game based on the acquired special figure determination information.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of (specifically, eight) LEDs. When the jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. The result of the jackpot determination is notified by the stop mode of the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol display 60, the LED lighting mode changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms), so that the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the first special symbol is displayed. The stop display of the first special symbol is performed by turning on each LED of the symbol display 60 in a mode of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (big hit mode or loss mode). Further, when the jackpot determination is made based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. The result of the jackpot determination is notified by the stop mode of the second special symbol. Specifically, in the second special symbol display 61, the LED lighting mode changes (moving lighting) at a predetermined cycle (32 ms), so that the second special symbol is variablely displayed and the second special symbol is displayed. The second special symbol stop display is performed by turning on each LED of the symbol display 61 in a mode of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (big hit mode or loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "big hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute a big hit game (special game) in the big hit determination. The "big hit game" is a round game in which the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 50, 2nd big winning opening 56) is converted from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined mode, with a predetermined number of times (with an interval). For example, it is performed over 4 times, 10 times, etc.), and refers to a state advantageous for a player who can easily obtain a prize ball. The period of the "big hit game" means from the time when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit and the opening is started to the time when the round game is finished and the ending is finished. You may.

The maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time of the large winning openings (1st large winning opening 50, 2nd large winning opening 56) in each round game are predetermined, but before the maximum opening number and the maximum opening time are reached. Even so, when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) win (win) in the large winning opening, one round game ends. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute any of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special games) having different degrees of advantage to the player.

The auxiliary game determination is based on the passage (entry) of the game ball to the normal map gate 44, and the normal map determination information (random value for hit determination, random value for normal symbol determination, random value for determination of normal symbol variation pattern, etc.) ) Is acquired, and it corresponds to determining whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the acquired normal map determination information. When the auxiliary game determination is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol stop display for notifying the determination result is performed.

The ordinary symbol display 62 is composed of three LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of the ordinary symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (hit mode or loss mode) of notifying the result of the auxiliary game determination. In the ordinary symbol display 62, the LED lighting mode changes (moving lighting) in the same cycle (32 ms) as the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61.

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which it is decided to execute an auxiliary game (hit game) in the auxiliary game determination. The "auxiliary game" means a state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the auxiliary game (hit game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 can be used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are won (winning), the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. That is, in the "auxiliary game", the start condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is easily satisfied. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of auxiliary games (winning games) having different degrees of advantage to the player may be provided.

The first special symbol hold indicator 63 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of special figure determination information (first hold) stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. It is for displaying a certain number of first hold (U1), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first hold. In addition, although the first hold is stored up to four, it may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol hold indicator 64 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of special figure determination information (second hold) stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It is for displaying a certain number of second hold (U2), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second hold. In addition, although the second hold is stored up to four, it may be less than four or more, or the second hold may not be stored.

The normal symbol hold indicator 65 is composed of two LEDs, and is the number of normal figure determination information (normal figure hold) stored when a game ball wins (passes) at the normal figure gate 44. It is for displaying the number, and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of reserved figures. It should be noted that the maximum number of hold of the normal figure is stored up to four, but the number may be less than or larger than four, or the hold of the normal figure may not be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can be composed of 7-segment LEDs. For example, if the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, numbers such as "3" and "7" are stopped and displayed, and if it is determined to be lost, "-" is stopped and displayed. If it is inside, it is advisable to repeat turning off and "-".

The round number display 66 is composed of 6 LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs, and in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game. The lighting of the LED is started, the lighting of the LED is continued during the jackpot game, and the LED is turned off at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is 4 jackpot games, only the leftmost LED is lit, and if the number of rounds is 10 jackpot games, all the LEDs are lit.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and is for displaying a right-handed display that urges the player to shoot a game ball toward the right-handed game area (so-called right-handed). , The LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game), during the probabilistic game state described later, and during the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set, and when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The lighting of the LED is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the LED is turned off. In this way, since the status confirmation display 68 is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. .. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be installed in front of (the surface) of the gaming machine 1 and may be installed in another place.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display is performed in the same display mode (lighting display) regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it is recognized which mode is set. It may be displayed as possible. For example, in the setting change mode, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed, and in the setting confirmation mode, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinked or vice versa.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the status confirmation display 68 may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the first special symbol hold display 63, the second special symbol hold display 64, and the round number display are displayed. Since 66, the right-handed display 67 and the like are turned off, one or a plurality of LEDs of these displays may be turned on.

Further, a sub information display 80 is provided inside the game area 5a. The sub information display 80 includes a sub first fluctuation display 81, a sub second fluctuation display 82, a sub first hold display 83, a sub second hold display 84, and a sub normal figure fluctuation display 85. And a sub-normal figure hold display 86 and a sub right-handed display 87. The sub information display 80 is not provided with a display indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set, such as the status confirmation display 68 described above, but the sub information display 80 corresponds to these. A display may be provided.

The sub first variable display 81 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the first special symbol is in variable display, and the sub second variable display 82 is for displaying (notifying) whether or not the second special symbol is variable. It is for displaying (notifying) whether or not it is inside, and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.25 seconds on → 0.25 seconds off), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, the stop display (turns off). Or turn on).

The sub-first variation display 81 and the sub-second variation indicator 82 may be used to notify the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol. In this case, it is advisable to turn on the LED in the case of a big hit and turn off the LED in the case of a loss.

The sub first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of holds (first hold number) for the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the sub second hold indicator 84 is for the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. It is for displaying the holding number (second holding number) of, and is composed of two LEDs each. Then, when the number of holds is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the number of holds is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, and when the number of holds is "2". The left and right LEDs light up, and when the number of holds is "3", the LED on the left blinks at a predetermined cycle (turns on for 0.25 seconds → turns off for 0.25 seconds), and the LED on the right turns on, and the number of holds is ". At the time of "4", the left and right LEDs blink at a predetermined cycle (lights up for 0.25 seconds → turns off for 0.25 seconds).

The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the LED blinks (variation display) at a predetermined interval. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a hit, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal symbol variation display 85, it blinks during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and turns on or off when the stop display is displayed so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being performed can be grasped. You may.

The sub-normal figure hold display 86 is for displaying the number of normal figure hold storages (the number of normal figure hold), and is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reserved figures is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reserved pages is "1", the LED on the left side is turned on and the LED on the right side is turned off. When the number is "2", the LED on the left side lights up and the LED on the right side lights up. When the number of holds is "4", the left and right LEDs blink at a predetermined cycle.

The sub-right-handed display 87 is for urging the game ball to be launched toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed), and is composed of one LED. Then, the LED is turned on during the jackpot state (special game), the probabilistic game state, or the time-saving game state, and the LED is turned off in other game states.

A first image display device 70 is provided in the inner part of the effect space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a second image display device 71 having a smaller display area than the first image display device 70 is provided in the lower part of the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70. The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 may be a liquid crystal display or an organic EL display. Further, a movable effect device 73 for executing an operation effect is provided on the upper part of the effect space 40a.

In the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, various effect displays are performed according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demo effect performed while the special symbol variation display is not executed, and a variation effect by the effect symbol 701 performed during the execution of the special symbol variation display (starting operation effect and variation display described later). (Effects, motion effects before stopping, etc.), variation display (update variation) of the small symbol 702 performed during execution of the variation display of the special symbol, jackpot effect performed during execution of the jackpot game, and the like.

Further, the second image display device 71 can perform a movement effect by moving with a movable device (not shown) configured by a solenoid, a motor, or the like while the fluctuation effect is being executed by the first image display device 70. It has become.

Specifically, the second image display device 71 has a standby position (lower position) located closer to the end of the first image display device 70 and an effect position (upper position) located closer to the center of the first image display device 70. The movement effect is performed by moving (up, down) in the vertical direction to and from the position). The movement direction of the second image display device 71 may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

In the display unit (display area) of the first image display device 70, three effect symbols 701 (may be referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol in order from the left) and a small symbol 702 are displayed. The effect symbol 701 and the small symbol 702 are symbols for effect that change according to the change of the special symbol and stop according to the stop of the special symbol. Whether or not it is a big hit is notified by the stop mode of the effect symbol 701 and the small symbol 702.

Further, the hold icon HA and the icon TI are displayed on the first image display device 70. The hold icon HA is an icon indicating the hold of the right to determine the jackpot pertaining to the first special symbol, and a maximum of four icons are displayed. Further, the icon TI is an icon indicating a change in the current special symbol. The image displayed on the first image display device 70 will be described in detail later.

The movable effect device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and the first movable member 73a and the like during execution of the variable display of the effect symbol 701 executed by the first image display device 70. By causing the second movable member 73b to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to execute the operation effect. Further, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined mode during the execution of the operation effect. ..

Specifically, the first movable member 73a is located at a standby position (first position) located closer to the end (upper side) of the first image display device 70 and closer to the center (lower side) of the first image display device 70. It is designed to move (ascend, descend) to and from the position of the production position (second position). The second movable member 73b is adapted to move between a standby position (first position) that covers a part of the front of the first movable member 73a and an effect position that recedes from the front of the first movable member 73a. ..

As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a payout device 95 for paying out the game ball based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize ball, ball lending), A game ball storage unit 96 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment and supplies them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A having a built-in main control unit 100, and a payout control device 120A having a payout control unit 120 built-in. , The effect control device 130A with a built-in effect control unit 130, the power supply device 160A with a built-in power supply board 160, and the game information output terminal board for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collecting device such as a hall computer). 90 etc. are provided.

Further, an opening / closing door type cover member 23 is provided which opens and closes in the left-right direction around the rotation axis set on one side on the left and right so as to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire effect control device from the rear. The effect control device 130A includes a volume and display device (first image display device, second image display device) and various lighting devices (first image display device, second image display device) of the effect sound output from the sound output device 9 so as to be covered with the cover member 23. A changeover switch 22 for switching the adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the light amount of the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74) is provided.

On the surface side of the main control device 110A, the stored contents of the main control unit 100 for controlling the game and the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100 are cleared or the game is at the stage of the degree of advantage of the game (probability of being determined as a big hit). ) RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal for shifting to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later by operation using the setting key, and the gaming machine. An information display 113 (see FIG. 5) for displaying performance information and set values that enable the actual performance to be grasped, other electronic components, and the like are mounted.

The information display 113 is composed of four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured by the two 7-segment displays 113a and 113b from the left, and set by the two 7-segment displays 113c and 113d from the right. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of values and performance information is configured.

(Composition of the game board)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the configuration of the game board 5 in the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 constituting the front side of the game board 5 and a back surface unit 501 constituting the rear side of the game board 5.

The board unit 500 has a game plate 500a made of transparent resin in which a game area 5a is formed on the surface of the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 described above, and a window portion is formed so that the rear can be visually recognized. ..

Then, inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-mentioned decorative frame 40, the general winning opening 43, the solenoid gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), the first starting port 45 (first starting port detection switch 45a), and the variable Starting unit 46 (second starting port 47, second starting port detection switch 47a, second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b), first variable winning unit 49 (first large winning opening 50, first large winning opening detection switch 50a, 1st big winning opening opening / closing member 51, 1st big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b), and 2nd variable winning section 55 (2nd big winning opening 56, 2nd big winning opening detection switch 56a, 2nd big winning opening opening / closing The member 57 and the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are provided, and the above-mentioned main information display 59 is provided outside the game area 5a.

Further, at the lower right of the game plate 500a, a certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp having identification information unique to the game machine 1 is attached is provided so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction with the left side as an axis. Fixtures 503a for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are provided at the four corners of the 500a.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game plate 500a is normally covered with the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed when the right side of the certificate stamp plate is pinched with a fingertip and rotated toward the left side.

The fixture 503a is provided at the operation portion located on the front surface side of the game plate 500a, the shaft portion extending from the operation portion to the back surface side of the game plate 500a, and the tip end of the shaft portion, and the back surface of the game plate 500a. It is equipped with an engaging piece located on the side, and by operating the operation unit, the engaging piece changes between the first state (non-engaged posture) and the second state (engaged posture). There is.

The back surface unit 501 has a unit base 501a in which the front surface is formed in a concave chamber shape and a window portion that makes the rear view visible is formed. In the concave chamber, a second image display device 71 is formed. , A movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) and the like are provided, and a first image display device 70 is provided behind the window portion. Further, an effect control device 130A is provided on the rear side of the first image display device 70, and a main control device 110A is provided below the effect control device 130A.

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixed receiving portions 503b for detachably attaching the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixing tool 503a described above are provided.

When the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are attached, the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened and the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a are set to the first state (non-engaging posture). Then, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN derived from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided on the board unit 500 is passed through the through hole HA provided on the right side portion of the back surface unit 501. After that, when the back surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the back surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engaging piece of the fixture 503a is in a state of entering the inside of the fixed receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the engaging piece is set to the second state (engaging posture) by turning the operating portions of the four fixtures 503a, the engaging piece engages with the fixed receiving portion 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 And are fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN derived from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A and the certificate stamp plate 502 is closed, the board unit 500 is opened. And the installation work of the back unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A is pulled out to open the certificate stamp plate 502. After that, when the engaging piece is set to the first state by turning the operating portions of the four fixtures 503a, the engagement between the engaging piece and the fixed receiving portion 503b is released.

In this state, when the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are separated from each other, the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a exit from the fixed receiving portion 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the removal work of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 is completed.

In this embodiment, in addition to replacing only the gaming board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of reusing the parts of the gaming machine 1. There is. Therefore, although the attachment / detachment of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 in a state where the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described here, the game board 5 in a state where the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3. It is also possible to replace only the board unit 500.

Specifically, in a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the game board mounting frame 3, only the back surface unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via a lock mechanism, and is locked. By preventing the board unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, it is possible to replace only the board unit 500. Therefore, when replacing only the board unit 500, it is advisable to perform the above-mentioned removal operation after opening the glass frame 4.

(Overall block diagram of the gaming machine)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of the game will be described with reference to the entire block diagram of the game machine 1 of FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of the present embodiment includes a main control unit 100 that comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game, and a payout control that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout control command from the main control unit 100. A power supply that supplies power to the unit 120, the effect control device 130A (effect control unit 130) that controls the effect related to the game based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control unit 100, and the payout control unit 120 and the effect control device 130A. The board 160 is provided.

The communication between the main control unit 100 and the payout control unit 120 is configured so that commands can be transmitted and received in both directions, and the communication between the main control unit 100 and the effect control device 130A (effect control unit 130) is mainly. The command can be transmitted from the control unit 100 to the effect control device 130A (effect control unit 130) in only one direction.

The main control unit 100 includes a main CPU 100a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 100b in which a game control program and the like are stored, a main RAM 100c serving as a work area for arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

The input / output ports of the main control unit 100 include a general winning port detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first start port detection switch 45a, a second start port detection switch 47a, a second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b, and a first large. Winning opening detection switch 50a, 1st big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, 2nd big winning opening detection switch 56a, 2nd big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b, magnetic detection sensor 57a, radio wave detection sensor 58a, out ball detection switch 39a, main The information display 59, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 are connected. Further, a game information output terminal plate 90, a payout control unit 120, and an effect control unit 130 are connected to the input / output ports of the main control unit 100.

The main CPU 100a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 100b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 100c as a work area. As a result, control processing according to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, indicators, etc.), and transmission / reception of various control commands are performed. Control processing, control processing for transmitting game information to the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal plate 90, and the like are performed.

In the "game information", the start opening winning signal, the first special symbol, or the second special symbol variation display, which is output every time the game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, is terminated. A symbol confirmation signal output for each, a jackpot signal output during a jackpot game, an opening signal output during a round game (opening of a big winning opening), a probabilistic gaming state or a time-saving gaming state described later. These include signals that are output over the above, security signals that are output when a situation (such as RWM clearing or error) that poses a problem (threatening) in the security of the gaming machine 1 occurs.

In the memory area of the main ROM 100b, a game ROM area in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored and an information ROM area in which programs and data related to the performance display of the game machine are stored are arranged in order. There is.

In the game ROM area, a game program area in which a program related to the progress of the game is stored and a game data area in which data related to the progress of the game are stored are arranged.

In the information ROM area, an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored and an information data area in which the data related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored are arranged.

In the memory area of the main RAM 100c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing a game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing an information program are arranged. ing.

In the game RWM area, a game work area used as a work by the game program and a game stack area for temporarily saving the data being processed by the game program are arranged.

The game work area changes depending on the progress of the game, the set value area for storing the set value, the judgment information area for storing the judgment information (checksum described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and the game progress. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

In the information RWM area, an information work area used by the information program as a work and an information stack area for temporarily saving the data being processed by the information program are arranged.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations are arranged.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for processing based on the game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for processing based on the information program Explain the relationship.

When the main CPU 100a performs processing based on the game program, it basically refers to the game data area and also refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as a work. ing. Further, when performing processing based on an information program, basically, the information data area is referred to, and the contents of the information RWM area are referred to and updated while using the information RWM area as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the content of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but it can be referred to. Further, in the process based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

Then, when performing processing based on the information program, in the processing based on the game program, after saving the flag register in the game RWM area, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program, and the information is used. Immediately after the processing based on the program is completed and the program returns to the game program, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area.

Immediately after the start of the information program, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all the registers used in the game program are used in the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area immediately before the end of the information program, and the stack pointer in the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, it is possible to protect the data used by the game program when performing processing based on the information program, and inconvenience occurs when the information program returns to the game program. There will be no such thing.

The payout control unit 120 drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of the game ball. Further, the payout control unit 120 drives the launching device 26 to control the launching of the game ball.

The payout control unit 120 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The input / output port of the payout control unit 120 has an open detection switch, a fullness detection switch, a payout ball detection switch for detecting a game ball to be paid out from the payout device 95, and a payout motor for paying out the game ball from the payout device 95. A ball presence detection switch for detecting that the game ball is stored is connected to the game ball storage unit 96.

The payout CPU 121a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area. As a result, control processing for paying out the game ball from the payout device 95 in response to the payout control command from the main control unit 100, control processing for transmitting a command based on the result of the arithmetic processing to the main control unit 100, and the like are performed. conduct.

A ball feed solenoid, a touch sensor, a firing volume, a firing solenoid, and the like are connected to the payout control unit 120.

When the payout control unit 120 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor, the payout control unit 120 allows the ball feed solenoid and the firing solenoid to be energized, and from the firing volume. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 has changed by the detection signal, the ball feed solenoid is driven and the launch solenoid is driven so that the launch strength corresponds to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. It is designed to fire balls (99.9 pieces / minute).

The effect control device 130A displays an image based on the effect control unit 130 that comprehensively controls the progress of the effect based on the reception of the effect control command from the main control unit 100, and the effect control command received from the effect control unit 130. An image / sound control unit 140 that controls audio output, and a lamp control unit that controls various light emitting members (LEDs, etc.) and various drive sources (motors, etc.) based on the reception of effect control commands from the effect control unit 130. Includes 150 and.

The effect control unit 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an RTC 130d that measures the date and time, and an input / output port.

An effect button detection switch 17a and a cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input / output port of the effect control unit 130.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the effect control program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area. As a result, control processing for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, control process for transmitting the effect control command based on the determination result to the image / sound control unit 140, and detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.) It performs control processing according to the situation, control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), and the like.

The image / sound control unit 140 receives a command from the effect control unit 130 to control the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a predetermined image, or the audio output device 9 is predetermined. It controls the output of voice and sound.

The image / sound control unit 140 includes a centralized CPU 141a that comprehensively controls image display and audio output based on the reception of an effect control command from the effect control unit 130, a centralized ROM 141b in which a centralized control program is stored, and an arithmetic process. The integrated RAM 141c, which is the work area, the VDP 145 that generates an image to be output to the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on the reception of the display control command (display list) from the integrated CPU 141a, the image data, and the like. It includes a stored CGROM 146, a voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) that controls the voice output device 9 based on reception of a voice control command from the control CPU 141a, and a voice ROM in which voice data and the like are stored.

The integrated CPU 141a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the integrated control program stored in the integrated ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the integrated RAM 141c as a work area. As a result, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing an effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the VDP 145, and output from the audio output device 9. Control processing for generating a voice control command for instructing the effect sound to be produced and transmitting it to the voice control unit 148 (voice LSI) is performed.

Further, the image / sound control unit 140 is connected to the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, and the audio output device 9. The image / sound control unit 140 (VDP145) generates an image at a predetermined frame time (for example, 1/30 second) interval, and outputs the generated image to the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. .. As a result, an image including, for example, an effect symbol 701 is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. Further, the sound is output by outputting the sound signal generated by the image / sound control unit 140 (voice control unit 148) to the sound output device 9 (speaker).

Further, a changeover switch 22 is connected to the effect control device 130A. The changeover switch 22 is a switch for setting the volume value of the sound (directed sound such as BGM and sound effect) output from the sound output device 9. For example, the volume value is set in five stages of "1" to "5" according to the operation of the changeover switch 22. The changeover switch 22 is also used as a switch for setting the light intensity value of the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the panel lighting device 74. The light intensity value is set in five stages of "1" to "5" according to the operation of the changeover switch 22.

Further, the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the effect control device 130A.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input / output port.

The input / output port of the lamp control unit 150 has a frame lighting device 10, a movable effect device 73, a panel lighting device 74, a sub information display 80, and an effect button drive device 17b (effect button drive motor, effect button vibration motor). , The effect button light emitting LED 17c is connected.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out a lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. As a result, control processing of the frame lighting device 10, the effect button drive device 17b, the effect button light emitting LED 17c, the movable effect device 73, and the panel lighting device 74 is performed.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for operating the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and uses the main power supply as the gaming machine 1 (main control unit 100, payout control unit 120, etc.). Supply to the effect control device 130A and various electronic components (corresponding to the power supply means). The power supply board 160 detects whether or not the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (occurrence of a power failure), and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control unit 100 based on the drop in the power supply voltage (occurrence of a power failure). It includes a disconnection detection circuit 162 and a backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control unit 100 when the power supply is disconnected (power failure).

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which the main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control unit 100, payout control unit 120, effect control device 130A and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the main power supply is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of the backup power supply to the main control unit 100 is maintained.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the game machine 1, and when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value, outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control unit 100 to detect the voltage drop. When the power supply voltage becomes larger than the predetermined value during output, the output of the voltage drop detection signal is stopped.

The backup power supply circuit 163 is provided with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 100c are retained even when the power is cut off (power outage), and the control state of the game is restored to the state before the power outage (power outage) after the recovery from the power outage (power outage). Can be done.

Although the backup power supply is not supplied to the payout control unit 120 and the effect control unit 130, the payout control unit 120 and the sub-RAM 130c are retained so that the stored contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub RAM 130c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure). Backup power may be supplied to the effect control unit 130. Further, the backup power may be supplied to only one of the payout control unit 120 and the effect control unit 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Here, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. In the present embodiment, as a gaming state, a low probability state in which the probability of being determined as a big hit is the first probability, and a high probability in which the probability of being determined as a big hit is a second probability higher than the first probability. There is a state. Specifically, in the jackpot determination table used in the jackpot determination described later, a jackpot random number value that is determined to be a jackpot according to the gaming state is predetermined. In the jackpot determination, if the jackpot determination random value matches the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot determination table, it is determined to be a jackpot, and if it does not match, it is determined to be a loss. The high-probability state is an advantageous state for the player because the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than that of the low-probability state.

The first probability and the second probability are different for each set value. For example, the set value can be set from "1" to "4", and when the set value is "1", the first probability is 1/300 and the second probability is 1/60. good. When the set value is "2", the first probability is 1/290, the second probability is 1/58, and when the set value is "3", the first probability is 1/280. The second probability is 1/56, and when the set value is "4", the first probability may be 1/270 and the second probability may be 1/54. The set value may be set in the range of, for example, "1" to "6".

Further, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a non-auxiliary gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state. The auxiliary gaming state is a state in which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 is easier than in the non-auxiliary gaming state. Specifically, in the "normal game state (non-auxiliary game state)", the probability of being determined to be a hit is 1/200 in the auxiliary game determination performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal game gate 44. It is set low, the fluctuation time (average) of the normal symbol is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a winning is won is set to 0.18 seconds.

On the other hand, in the "auxiliary game state", the probability of being determined to be a hit in the auxiliary game determination is set as high as 199/200, the fluctuation time (average) of the normal symbol is set to about 3 seconds, and it is determined to be a hit. In this case, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set to 6 seconds. For this reason, it is easier for the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 47 as compared with the normal gaming state, the consumption (decrease) of the game ball is suppressed, and the jackpot determination based on the winning in the second starting port 47 can be made in a short time. It will be executed repeatedly, and it will be in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

It should be noted that the "auxiliary gaming state" is set so that the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of being determined to be a hit are more advantageous than the "normal gaming state". , The average fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of being determined to be a hit may be set to be advantageous.

In the following, the low-probability state and non-auxiliary gaming state are referred to as "normal gaming state", the high-probability state and auxiliary gaming state are referred to as "probability variable gaming state", and the low-probability state and auxiliary gaming state are referred to as "time-saving gaming state". .. The gaming machine 1 is initially set to the normal gaming state, and when a big hit game is played, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the probabilistic gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

(Flow chart of main control unit)
Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of the main control unit)
The main process (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the main process in the main control unit 100. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 100a.

First, the main CPU 100a performs the initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, the preparation process for starting the control of the game, the setting change process for changing the set value based on the setting change operation, and the initialization of the predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 100c based on the RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value based on the setting confirmation operation, various drive sources provided in the board unit 500 (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, second large) Performs initial operation processing of the drive source for initial operation of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b, etc.). The details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S51, the main CPU 100a updates the jackpot determination initial random number value, the jackpot symbol determination initial random number value, the hit determination initial random number value, and the normal symbol determination initial random number value.

In step S52, the main CPU 100a detects a voltage drop indicating the occurrence of a voltage drop of the power supply from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine if a signal is being input. If the voltage drop detection signal is not input, the process is transferred to step S51, and if the voltage drop detection signal is input, the process is transferred to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input is continued for a predetermined period, the process is transferred to step S54 assuming that a complete power failure has occurred, and if the input is not continued for a predetermined period, the power supply can be momentarily dropped in voltage. The process is transferred to step S52 as having the property.

In step S54, the main CPU 100a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, and in step S55, issues a power cutoff designation command for notifying the payout control unit 120 that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, the payout control unit 120 that has received the power cutoff designation command sends a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining payout number of the game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process is transferred to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command is received, the process is transferred to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the waiting time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the waiting time has not elapsed, the process is transferred to step S56, and if the waiting time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control unit 120 cannot be performed.

In step S58, the main CPU 100a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c. Specifically, if the remaining payout number specification command is received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number specification command is saved, and if the remaining payout number specification command is not received, the remaining payout number is specified. Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in the payout control process of timer interrupt described later, and after the power is restored, a payout number designation command according to the number of remaining payouts is transmitted to the payout control unit 120. become.

The main CPU 100a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 100a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it is possible to determine the data abnormality in the game RWM area by the checksum at the next power-on.

The main CPU 100a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 100c is backed up (power recovery) in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 100c in step S61, and prohibits RWM access in step S62. After that, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power supply (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but with the occurrence of a momentary power failure (voltage drop to less than 18 volts). When the supply of operating power is restarted, the initial setting process is not performed. That is, even if the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RWM clear operation are performed for some reason when the momentary power failure occurs, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process are not executed. The machine will not perform unintended operations, and it will be possible to ensure the reliability of the game machine.

(Initial setting process of main control unit)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control unit 100.

First, the main CPU 100a prohibits all interruptions in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as setting of built-in registers in step S12, and performs start waiting processing of other control units in step S13. Specifically, the payout control unit 120 and the effect control unit 130 are waited for one second so that the command from the main control unit 100 is not missed.

The main CPU 100a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 100c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control unit 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 120 performs a process for permitting the launching of the game ball by the launching device 26.

In step S16, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S17 as if it is a power recovery, and if the backup flag is not saved, it is assumed that the power is turned on for the first time or the power is restored irregularly. The process is transferred to S18.

In step S17, the main CPU 100a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

The main CPU 100a determines in step S18 whether or not there has been a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S19 as a transition to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S20.

The main CPU 100a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for changing (updating) the set value (probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination) at the stage of the advantage degree of the game is performed. The details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S25.

In step S20, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process is transferred to step S21, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process is performed in step S22. To move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, assuming that the power is turned on for the first time or the power is restored irregularly, and the process is moved to step S22. It will be.

In step S21, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the set value in the set value (during game) area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). When it is determined that the set value in the set value (during game) area is within the appropriate range, the process is transferred to step S23, and when it is determined that the set value in the set value (during game) area is not in the appropriate range. The process is transferred to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 100a performs non-recoverable error processing (game program). Specifically, after displaying the error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the effect control unit 130. , Prohibits timer interruption After setting interrupt prohibition and clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, the process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the effect control unit 130 performs a process for executing a non-recoverable error notification indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the control of the game is not performed (the game cannot be controlled), and the error cannot be cleared unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without the setting change operation, the power switch is not canceled and the setting is made. The power switch must be turned on with the change operation. It should be noted that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" displays an unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to let the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. Or, the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74 is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the sound output device 9 indicates that a recovery error has occurred. It is to output an error sound ("It is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 100a determines in step S23 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S24 as if the RWM clear operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S26.

The main CPU 100a performs an RWM clearing process (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing a region other than the set value region of the RWM region for the game) is performed. The main CPU 100a performs the process of step S25 after the RWM clear process. The details of the RWM clearing process will be described later.

In step S25, the main CPU 100a transmits a power-on command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the normal game state) to the payout control unit 120 and the effect control unit 130, and the step. The process is transferred to S31. As a result, the effect control unit 130 performs a process for executing a power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

The "power-on notification" displays an initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "123") at the time of power-on to make the first image display device 70 recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized. Alternatively, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the RWM area is initialized from the audio output device 9. It is to output a power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating that the power is turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). In the power-on notification, the RWM area was cleared on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. A display for notifying that may be displayed.

The main CPU 100a determines in step S26 whether or not the setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process is transferred to step S27 to shift to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process is transferred to step S28.

The main CPU 100a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S27. Specifically, a process is performed to display the set value saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 100a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (clearing 0) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step S29, the main CPU 100a transmits a power supply restoration command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of a power failure to the effect control unit 130. As a result, the effect control unit 130 performs a process for executing the power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off by ending the setting confirmation notification and the like.

"Power recovery notification" means that the first image display device 70 displays a power recovery image for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) in order to recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off. , The frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the power supply is restored from the audio output device 9 (from a power failure). It is to output a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) indicating that the fact is over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S30, the main CPU 100a transmits other commands (a command indicating the first hold number U1 to be described later, a command indicating the second hold number U2, etc.) to the effect control unit 130. As a result, the effect control unit 130 can grasp the number of special figure reservations, and a process for displaying the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the first image display device 70 and the like is performed. Become.

In step S31, the main CPU 100a transmits a set value designation command to the effect control unit 130. As a result, the effect control unit 130 can grasp the current set value. The setting value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control unit 130 before the power-on command or the power recovery command is transmitted. Further, the setting value designation command may be transmitted at each start of the variable display of the special symbol, or may be transmitted at each start of the jackpot game.

The main CPU 100a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S32, and permits all interrupts in step S33 to control the progress of the game (main control). The timer interrupt of unit 100) is started, and the initial setting process of this time is completed.

That is, from the time the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the state is before the start before the game progress control is started, and after the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is performed. It will be ready for the game to be played.

As described above, since a plurality of conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, clear the RWM, or confirm the setting. , It is possible to suppress fraudulent activities and improve the security of gaming machines.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, which is the most illegal setting change. It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to occur, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal (including the case where the backup flag is not saved), the non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the gaming machine operates unexpectedly. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine without causing trouble to the gaming store and the player.

Also, if the value in the set value (during game) area is not in the proper range, that is, if the previous power failure may have occurred during the setting change, an unrecoverable error occurs even if the checksum is normal. By executing the process and stopping the progress of the game, the game does not proceed in a state where the setting value not intended by the game store is set, and the reliability of the game machine is improved. It becomes possible.

Further, while the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode) or the setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, and the second image display are displayed on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the panel lighting device 74, and on the back surface (back surface), the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113. It is possible to recognize that there is. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

Regarding the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation, it may be included that the open detection switch for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the conditions are increased, fraudulent activities can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

If the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S20, the unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area of the main RAM 100c is set. The initial value "1" may be saved in the value area, and the process may be transferred to step S24.

In addition, the power-on command and power recovery command are sent including information indicating the current game state, but after the power-on command and power recovery command are transmitted, the game state indicating the current game state is transmitted. The specified command may be sent.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the RWM area for games and the checksum of the RWM area for information may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, the checksum may be shifted to the unrecoverable error processing. ..

(Main control unit setting change processing)
The setting change process (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control unit 100.

First, the main CPU 100a performs output processing of the setting changing signal (security signal) in step S19-1. Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal plate 90 starts to output a setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed. The setting changing signal (security signal) continues to be output while the setting is being changed, and even after the setting change is completed, the output is continued for 200 msec and then the output is terminated.

In step S19-2, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. This makes it possible for the game clerk to know that the setting is being changed by checking the status confirmation display 68.

In step S19-3, the main CPU 100a transmits a setting change command to the effect control unit 130. As a result, the effect control unit 130 performs a process for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

The "setting change notification" is to display a setting changing screen indicating that the set value is being changed on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or to display a frame lighting device 10 or board lighting. The device 74 is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) while the setting is changed. The voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed. As a result, the game clerk confirms the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the audio output device 9 to understand that the settings are being changed. It becomes possible.

The main CPU 100a acquires the set value from the set value area in step S19-4, and in the following step S19-5, whether or not the set value of the acquired set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). Is determined. If it is determined that the acquisition setting value is within the appropriate range, the process is transferred to step S19-7, and if it is determined that the acquisition setting value is not within the appropriate range, the acquisition setting value is determined in step S19-6. Is changed to "1".

In step S19-7, the main CPU 100a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, the acquisition set values (here, 1 to 4) are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the set value before the change by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 100a determines in step S19-8 whether or not the set value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a set value update operation, the process is transferred to step S19-9, and if there is no set value update operation, the process is transferred to step S19-12.

The main CPU 100a updates the acquisition set value by +1 in step S19-9, and performs the set value correction process in step S19-10. Specifically, when the updated set value is "5" that exceeds the appropriate range (1 to 4), the process of correcting the set value to "1" is performed.

In step S19-11, the main CPU 100a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, the updated acquisition setting values (here, 1 to 4) are displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the set value before the confirmation by checking the information display 113.

In step S19-12, the main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, first) that are provided on the board unit 500 and are operated by the main control unit 100 according to the progress of the game. 2 Performs processing for initial operation of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) until the setting change mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the setting change mode will be described later.

The main CPU 100a determines in step S19-13 whether or not the set value determination operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a setting value confirmation operation, the process is transferred to step S19-14 assuming that the setting value has been confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated), and if there is no setting value confirmation operation, the setting value is updated. The process is transferred to step S19-8 as it may be performed.

The main CPU 100a saves the updated acquisition set value in the set value area in step S19-14, ends the display of the set value on the information display 113 in step S19-15, and in step S19-16. The display of the status confirmation display 68 is terminated.

In step S19-17, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) other than the set value area in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data in the game RWM area before the RWM is cleared is not inherited.

In step S19-18, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal plate 90. If another security signal is output from the security signal terminal, the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the output security signal ends.

In step S19-19, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources as the setting change mode ends due to the setting value confirmation operation, and ends the current setting change process.

In this way, even if the set value is not within the appropriate range, the initial value is set as the set value, so that an indefinite value is set as the set value and the gaming machine is unexpected. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine by eliminating the inconvenience to the gaming store and the player by performing the operation.

Further, while the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode), the game clerk is on the front surface (front surface) of the game machine 1 with a status confirmation display 68, a first image display device 70, a second image display device 71, and frame lighting. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back surface (back surface). It has become. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The setting value confirmation operation was set so that the setting key switch 112a was changed from the ON state to the OFF state, but the RWM clear switch 111a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the dedicated switch may be OFF. It may be changed from the state to the ON state, or the touch sensor 15a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state by inputting the signal from the touch sensor 15a to the main control unit 100. , The detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, etc.) provided in the specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the open detection switch may be turned ON from the OFF state. It may be in a state.

In addition, the setting change command is sent at the start of the setting change process, and the power-on command is sent after the setting change process is completed. The setting change end specification command may be sent instead of the input command. In this case, the setting change end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or may be sent after the setting change process is completed.

(RWM clear processing of main control unit)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the RWM clearing process of the main control unit 100.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control unit 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control unit performs a process for performing the RWM clear preparation notification.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means to display a clear preparation screen for the first image display device 70 to recognize that RWM clear preparation is in progress, or "press the RWM clear switch again" from the voice output device 9. This is a notification that outputs the notification voice of the above over a predetermined period.

The main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S24-2. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, first) that are provided on the board unit 500 and are operated by the main control unit 100 according to the progress of the game. The processing for initial operation of the two major winning opening opening / closing solenoids 57b) is performed until the RWM clear preparation mode is completed. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S24-3 whether or not the RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S24-4, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, returns the process to step S24-2.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 100a initializes (clears 0) a region other than the set value region of the game RWM region of the main RAM 100c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data (other than the set value) of the game RWM area before clearing the RWM is not inherited. Become.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 100a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, a process for outputting an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM clear has been performed is performed from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal plate 90. If another security signal is output from the security signal terminal, the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the output security signal ends.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 100a ends the initial operation of various drive sources, ends the current RWM clear process, and ends the RWM clear preparation mode.

The RWM clear preparation specification command is sent at the start of the RWM clear process, and the power-on command is sent after the RWM clear process is completed. However, instead of (or in addition to) the power-on command, the RWM clear specification is specified. You may want to send a command. In this case, the RWM clear designation command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clear process, or may be transmitted after the end of the RWM clear process.

(Setting confirmation processing of the main control unit)
The setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process of the main control unit 100.

First, the main CPU 100a performs output processing of the setting confirmation signal (security signal) in step S27-1. Specifically, the output of the setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed is started from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal plate 90. The setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting confirmation, and even after the setting confirmation is completed, the output is continued for 200 msec and then the output is terminated.

In step S27-2, the main CPU 100a displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed on the status confirmation display 68. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation display 68 is turned on. This makes it possible for the game clerk to know that the setting is being confirmed by checking the status confirmation display 68.

In step S27-3, the main CPU 100a transmits a setting confirmation command to the effect control unit 130. As a result, the process for executing the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation has been performed is performed by the effect control unit 130.

The "setting confirmation notification" is to display a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or to display the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74. Is to turn on all lights with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) while confirming the setting. The voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“setting value is being confirmed”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed. As a result, the game clerk grasps that the setting is being confirmed by checking the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the audio output device 9. It becomes possible.

In step S27-4, the main CPU 100a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, with reference to the set value in the set value (during game) area, a number (here, 1 to 4) indicating the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the current set value by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program) in step S27-5. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, first) that are provided on the board unit 500 and are operated by the main control unit 100 according to the progress of the game. The processing for initial operation of the two major winning opening opening / closing solenoids 57b) is performed until the setting confirmation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the setting confirmation mode will be described later.

The main CPU 100a determines in step S27-5 whether or not the confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process is transferred to step S28-7, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

The main CPU 100a ends the display of the set value on the information display 113 in step S27-7, and ends the display of the status confirmation display 68 in step S27-8. Then, in step S27-9, the main CPU 100a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources, ends the current setting confirmation process, and ends the setting confirmation mode.

The setting confirmation command is sent at the start of the setting confirmation process, and the power recovery command is sent after the setting confirmation process is completed. However, instead of the setting confirmation command, the setting confirmation start specification command is sent and the power supply is sent. Instead of (or in addition to) the recovery command, the setting confirmation end specification command may be sent. In this case, the setting confirmation end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be sent after the setting confirmation process is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, it is possible to output many types of signals even with a limited number of signal terminals, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the gaming machine.

Further, from the start of power supply until the game progress control (timer interruption of the main control unit 100) is performed (in the state before the start), inputs other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a are input. Devices (out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, first major winning opening detection switch 50a, second major winning opening The presence / absence of signal input from the detection switch 56a, the magnetic detection sensor 57a, and the radio wave detection sensor 58a) is not monitored.

That is, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, even if the game ball wins in various winning openings (including the starting opening), the winning is invalid and the gaming ball is not paid out. It has become like. Further, even if a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the winning becomes invalid and the special symbol changes in the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61. The display is not performed and the jackpot game is not executed. Further, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, the passage is invalid and the normal symbol display is not displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 62, so that the auxiliary game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the game will be performed by the player before the progress control of the game is started.

Further, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, even if various errors occur, the error notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a fraudulent act is performed before the progress control of the game is started.

The setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the unrecoverable error signal may be output from different output terminals instead of being output from the common security signal terminal.

(Timer interrupt processing of the main control unit)
The timer interrupt processing (game program and information program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the main control unit 100.

In this timer interrupt process, a clock pulse is input every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the main control unit 100 after the initial setting process of the main process is completed. It is executed by that, and it is designed to control the progress of the game.

First, the main CPU 100a saves the information stored in the register in the stack area at the start of the timer interrupt processing, and performs the time control processing (game program). Specifically, it performs a process of updating various timer counters such as a stop time of a special symbol and an opening time of a special electric accessory.

The main CPU 100a performs a random number update process (game program) in step S100. Specifically, the update of the big hit judgment random value, the big hit symbol judgment random value, the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment random value, the hit judgment random value, the normal symbol judgment random value, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment random value. I do. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, it corresponds. The initial random number value to be set is set as a new lap initial value, and the random number value is newly updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 100a performs a start port detection switch process (game program). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the first start port detection switch 45a or the second start port detection switch 47a, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed. The details of the start port detection switch processing will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs special symbol processing (game program) in step S300. Specifically, the determination of the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the control of the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, etc. Perform processing. The details of the special symbol processing will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs a gate detection switch process (game program) in step S400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate detection switch 44a, and if there is an input, the normal figure judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal symbol judgment, random for normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment). Numerical value) is acquired and stored. The gaming machine 1 can hold up to four normal map determination information, and when the number of normal map determination information currently held is less than four, the game machine 1 newly acquires the normal map determination information.

In step S410, the main CPU 100a performs normal symbol processing (game program). The main CPU 100a performs processing such as determination of acquired normal map determination information based on the passage of a game ball to the normal symbol gate 44, control of variation display of a normal symbol, and the like. Specifically, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not in progress, the main CPU 100a makes an auxiliary game determination to determine whether or not the hit is based on the normal symbol determination information acquired in step S400, and is normal based on the determination result. The fluctuation time of the symbol is set, and the variation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display 62. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is in progress, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol according to the result of the auxiliary game determination is stopped and displayed. In the auxiliary game state, the main CPU 100a determines that the auxiliary game is a hit with a higher probability than in the normal game state.

It should be noted that the type of the hit normal symbol and the type of the lost normal symbol determined as the judgment result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol processing are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game playability is not too complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of the normal symbols for each type and the selection ratio of the various lost ordinary symbols, which are determined as the judgment result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol processing, are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

The main CPU 100a performs a jackpot game process (game program) in step S500. Specifically, when the jackpot determination in the special symbol processing in step S300 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game for opening and closing the first jackpot 50 or the second jackpot 56 is executed. do. The details of the jackpot game processing will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs an auxiliary game process (game program) in step S600. Specifically, when it is determined to be a hit in the auxiliary game determination in the normal symbol processing in step S410 and the normal symbol display 62 is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game for opening and closing the second starting port 47 is executed. As a result, the second starting port 47 is opened. In the auxiliary gaming state, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is longer than in the normal gaming state.

The main CPU 100a performs a payout control process (game program) in step S700. Specifically, various switches (general winning opening detection switch 43a, first winning opening detection switch 50a, second winning opening detection switch 56a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a) are With reference to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 100c based on the detection of the input, various winning openings (general winning opening 43, first starting opening 45, second starting opening 47, first large winning opening 50) , The process for transmitting the payout number designation command corresponding to the second major winning opening 56) to the payout control unit 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control unit 120 executes a process for paying out the prize ball from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 100a performs an abnormality determination process (game program) in step S800. Specifically, various errors (illegal winning errors such as a game ball winning in the second starting port 47 when not in an auxiliary game, or a game ball winning in a large winning opening when not in a special game, various winnings An abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls won in the mouth and the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path that causes the winning ball to flow down do not match, a magnetic error that detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period by the magnetic detection sensor 57a, A radio wave error that detects an abnormal radio wave by the radio wave detection sensor 58a for a predetermined period, a door opening error that the open detection switch 31a changes from the OFF state to the ON state, and the RWM clear switch 111a while the progress control of the game is being performed. And an operation error in which the setting key switch 112a is operated) is determined, and a process for transmitting an error designation command corresponding to the generated error to the effect control unit 130 is performed. As a result, the effect control unit 130 executes a process for notifying an error.

The main CPU 100a performs a data creation process (game program) in step S810. Specifically, external output data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting port opening / closing data output to the second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, second major winning. Large prize opening / closing data output to the mouth opening / closing solenoid 57b, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60, second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, and the first 1 Performs a process of creating data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to the special symbol hold display 63 and the second special symbol hold display 64, and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display 65.

The main CPU 100a performs an output control process (game program) in step S820. Specifically, port output processing for outputting signals such as external information data, start opening opening / closing data, and large winning opening opening / closing data created in step S810, special symbol display data, ordinary symbol display data, and special symbol. Display output processing that outputs signals such as hold display data and normal symbol hold display data, and a payout status confirmation specification command for checking the payout status of the payout control unit 120 can be sent to the payout control unit 120, and awards to be described later. With reference to the ball counter (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter), a process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control unit 120 is performed. .. As a result, the payout control unit 120 executes control for paying out the prize balls from the game ball payout device 100. Further, the main CPU 100a transmits various commands for executing the set effect to the effect control unit 130.

Next, the main CPU 100a saves the flag register in the game RWM area after prohibiting interruption, calls the target information program by the CALL instruction, and performs the processing after step S900.

Specifically, the main CPU 100a performs a game ball counting process (information program) in step S900. Specifically, the number of normal medium payouts, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, large winning opening, starting opening) during the normal gaming state, and during the normal gaming state. To count game performance information such as the number of normal medium outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state. Process.

It should be noted that the total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are not affected even if the set value is changed (regardless of the set value), so these are the game record information. By counting the numbers, it is possible to calculate the performance information (normal base value described later) excluding the influence of the set value, which is useful for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

In step S910, the main CPU 100a normally performs a base value calculation process (information program). Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number ÷ normal medium out number) × 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. The process of saving the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place is performed in the first area of.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000. Further, in the base storage area, a first area in which the normal base value in the current game section is stored, a second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game section, and a game two times before are stored. A third area for storing the normal base value in the section and a fourth area for storing the normal base value in the game section three times before are provided, and normal for four game sections including the present. The base value will be saved in each area.

The main CPU 100a performs the performance display data setting process (information program) in step S920. Specifically, for displaying on the information display 113 while switching the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated by the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area every 5 seconds. Performs the process of setting the performance display data. The details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

The main CPU 100a performs a test data creation process (information program) in step S930. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 100a performs an output control process (information program) in step S940. Specifically, a display output process for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S920 to various indicators and a process for outputting signals such as test data created in step S930 are performed. ..

Then, the main CPU 100a performs a process for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interruption, and returning to the game program, and saves the information saved at the start of the timer interrupt process this time to the main CPU 100a. It returns to the register of, and ends the timer interrupt processing this time.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the pre-start state (during the setting change mode, the RWM clear mode, and the setting confirmation mode) before the game progress control is started, so that the payout is performed. Since the number and the number of outs are not counted, the normal base value is calculated, and the normal base value is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control load in the main control unit.

(Starting port detection switch processing of the main control unit)
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the details of the start port detection switch process executed by the game control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 12 is a detailed flowchart of the start port detection switch process in step S200 of FIG.

In step S201, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a signal has been input due to the detection of the game ball by the first start port detection switch 45a (whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 45). If it is determined that there is an input to the first start port detection switch 45a, the process is transferred to step S202, and if it is determined that there is no input to the first start port detection switch 45a, the process is transferred to step S208.

In step S202, in step S202, the first hold number U1 indicating the hold number of the right of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c is the predetermined maximum hold number Umax1 (for example, 4). Determine if it is less than. If the first hold number U1 is less than Umax1, the process is transferred to step S203, and if not, the process is transferred to step S208.

In step S203, the main CPU 100a is updated by adding "1" to the value of the first hold number U1.

In step S204, the main CPU 100a acquires special figure determination information (big hit determination random value, big hit symbol determination random value, reach determination random value, special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value), and the acquired special figure determination. The information is stored in the first special figure determination information storage area in the main RAM 100c. Specifically, the first special figure determination information storage area has the first to fourth storage areas, and the main CPU 100a is vacant in order from the first storage area of the first special figure determination information storage area. The area is searched, and the acquired special figure judgment information is stored in the vacant area.

In step S205, the main CPU 100a performs the first pre-determination process (first look-ahead process) based on the special figure determination information acquired in step S204. It should be noted that this first pre-determination process is executed only in the normal gaming state. If the first pre-determination process is executed, the process moves to step S206, and if not, the process moves to step S207.

The first pre-determination process is a process of pre-determining the special figure determination information before the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the special figure determination information acquired this time. Specifically, based on the special figure determination information acquired this time and the preliminary determination table, whether or not it is a big hit, and in the case of a big hit, the big hit symbol and the special figure fluctuation pattern are determined in advance.

Here, the pre-determination table is a table including the same random number values as the jackpot determination table used in the jackpot determination process in the special symbol processing. Further, the pre-determination table includes a table including the same random number value as the variation pattern table used in the special symbol variation pattern setting process in the special symbol processing.

In step S206, the main CPU 100a generates first look-ahead information for notifying the effect control unit 130 of the result of the first pre-determination process, and sets it in the main RAM 100c. The first look-ahead information is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, the look-ahead effect (zone effect, start effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, icon change effect) may be executed before the variable display of the first special symbol related to the current prize is started.

In step S207, the main CPU 100a sets the first start winning command in the main RAM 100c. The first start winning command is a command indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting opening 45 (the jackpot determination relating to the first special symbol has been suspended), and includes the first reserved number U1. Further, when the first look-ahead information is set, the first start-up winning command includes the first look-ahead information. The first start winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number U1 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

When it is determined as "NO" in step S201, when it is determined as "NO" in step S202, or when the process of step S207 is executed, the main CPU 100a executes the process of step S208.

In step S208, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a signal has been input due to the detection of the game ball by the second start port detection switch 47a (whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 47). If it is determined that there is an input to the second start port detection switch 47a, the process is transferred to step S208, and if not, the start port detection switch process is terminated.

In step S209, in the main CPU 100a, the second hold number U2 indicating the hold number of the right of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c is the predetermined maximum hold number Umax2 (for example, 4). Determine if it is less than. If the second hold number U2 is less than Umax2, the process is transferred to step S209, and if not, the start port detection switch process is terminated.

In step S210, the main CPU 100a is updated by adding "1" to the value of the second hold number U2.

In step S211 the main CPU 100a acquires special figure determination information (big hit determination random value, big hit symbol determination random value, reach determination random value, special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value), and the acquired special figure determination. The information is stored in the second special figure determination information storage area in the main RAM 100c. Specifically, the second special figure determination information storage area has the first to fourth storage areas, and the main CPU 100a is vacant in order from the first storage area of the second special figure determination information storage area. The area is searched, and the acquired special figure judgment information is stored in the vacant area.

In step S212, the main CPU 100a performs a second pre-determination process (second look-ahead process) based on the special figure determination information acquired in step S211. It should be noted that this second pre-determination process is executed only in the auxiliary gaming state (probability variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state). If the second pre-determination process is executed, the process moves to step S213, and if not, the process moves to step S214.

The second pre-determination process is a process of pre-determining the special figure determination information before the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the special figure determination information acquired this time. Specifically, based on the special figure determination information acquired this time and the preliminary determination table, whether or not it is a big hit, the big hit symbol, and the special figure fluctuation pattern are determined in advance.

In step S213, the main CPU 100a generates second look-ahead information for notifying the effect control unit 130 of the result of the second pre-determination process, and sets it in the main RAM 100c. The second look-ahead information is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, the look-ahead effect (zone effect, start effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, icon change effect) may be executed before the variable display of the second special symbol related to this prize is started.

In step S214, the main CPU 100a sets the second start winning command in the main RAM 100c. The second start winning command is a command indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting opening 47 (the jackpot determination relating to the second special symbol has been suspended), and includes the second reserved number U2. Further, when the second look-ahead information is set, the second start-up winning command includes the second look-ahead information. The second start winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 in the output control process of step S820. As a result, the number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number U2 is displayed on the first image display device 70.

(Special symbol processing of the main control unit)
Next, the details of the special symbol processing executed by the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is a detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing of step S300 in FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern setting process in step S408 of FIG. FIG. 15 is a detailed flowchart showing the stopped processing of step S416 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main CPU 100a of the main control unit 100 determines whether or not the special game is in progress (big hit game) based on, for example, the information stored in the main RAM 100c (step S401). .. When it is determined that the special game is in progress (step S401: YES), the main CPU 100a ends the special symbol processing.

When the main CPU 100a determines that the special game is not in progress (step S401: NO), the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is in variable display (step S402). When it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the second reserved number U2 of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 100c is "1" or more (step S402: NO). In step S403), when it is determined that the number is "1" or more (step S403: YES), the second hold number U2 is subtracted by "1" to digest the hold of the second special symbol by 1 (step S404).

Specifically, in step S404, the main CPU 100a shifts the data stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure determination information storage area, thereby storing the first to fourth storage areas. The special figure determination information stored in the area is moved to the previous storage area.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage area of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted to the third storage area of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the third storage area of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted to the second storage area of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the second storage area of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted to the first storage area of the second special figure determination information reserved storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage area of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the determination area of the main RAM 100c.

When the main CPU 100a determines that the second reserved number U2 is not "1" or more (the jackpot determination relating to the second special symbol is not reserved) (step S403: NO), the first stored in the main RAM 100c. 1 When it is determined whether or not the first reserved number U1 of the special symbol is "1" or more (step S405) and it is determined that it is "1" or more (step S405: YES), the first reserved number U1 is set. Subtract "1" to digest the hold of the first special symbol by 1 (step S406).

Specifically, in step S406, the main CPU 100a shifts the data stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure determination information storage area, thereby storing the first to fourth storage areas. The special figure determination information stored in the area is moved to the previous storage area.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage area of the first special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted to the third storage area of the first special figure determination information reserved storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the third storage area of the first special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted to the second storage area of the first special figure determination information reserved storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the second storage area of the first special figure determination information reserved storage area is shifted to the first storage area of the first special figure determination information reserved storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage area of the first special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the determination area of the main RAM 100c.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 100a determines in step S405 that the first hold number U1 is not "1" or more (step S405: NO), the customer waiting command is set in the main RAM 100c, and the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 13 is performed. finish. As a result, the customer waiting command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130, and for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting command, the customer waiting effect is started on the first image display device 70. ..

The main CPU 100a executes a jackpot determination process following the process of step S404 or step S406 (step S407). In this jackpot determination process, a jackpot determination for determining whether or not it is a jackpot and a symbol determination for determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed (big hit symbol or lost symbol) are performed. Specifically, the main CPU 100a first determines whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the special figure determination information (specifically, the random value for jackpot determination) stored in the determination area and the jackpot determination table. Make a judgment. In the jackpot determination table, a jackpot random number value corresponding to the game state is stored for each set value, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot according to the current set value and the game state.

When the main CPU 100a determines that the jackpot is a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number value, the main CPU 100a performs a symbol determination in order to determine a jackpot symbol (type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed after the lapse of the fluctuation time. In this symbol determination, the jackpot symbol is determined based on the jackpot symbol determination random value stored in the determination area and the jackpot symbol determination table. Then, the main CPU 100a sets the determined jackpot symbol in the main RAM 100c. On the other hand, when it is determined to be lost in the jackpot determination, the main CPU 100a sets the lost symbol to the main RAM 100c. Then, the main CPU 100a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the set jackpot symbol or the lost symbol in the main RAM 100c.

(Example of jackpot symbol judgment table)
Here, an example of the jackpot symbol determination table will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot symbol determination table used for determining a jackpot symbol in the jackpot determination process of step S407 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 18, when the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol (that is, the jackpot determination based on the winning of the first starting port 45) is determined to be a jackpot, any of the jackpot symbols A1 to A3 is determined. Will be done. Specifically, when it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, the jackpot symbol A1 is selected at a rate of 15%, the jackpot symbol A2 is selected at a rate of 50%, and 35. The jackpot symbol A3 is selected at a rate of%.

The jackpot symbol A1 is a jackpot symbol indicating a 10R probability variation jackpot. When the jackpot symbol A1 is stopped and displayed, the round game in which the second big winning opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is repeated 10 times (10 rounds (denoted as "R")) 10R. A jackpot game is executed. When the 10R jackpot game is completed, it is set to the probabilistic game state. In one round game, if 10 game balls are won in the second large winning opening 56 by 29.5 seconds from the start of the round game, the round game ends.

The jackpot symbol A2 is a jackpot symbol indicating a 4R probability variation jackpot. When the jackpot symbol A2 is stopped and displayed, a 4R jackpot game is executed in which the first big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds, and the round game is repeated four times. When the 4R jackpot game is completed, the probabilistic game state is set.

The jackpot symbol A3 is a jackpot symbol indicating a 4R normal jackpot. When the jackpot symbol A3 is stopped and displayed, a 4R jackpot game is executed in which the first big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds, and the round game is repeated four times. When the 4R jackpot game is completed, the game is set to the time-saving game state.

On the other hand, when the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol (that is, the jackpot determination based on the winning of the second starting port 47) is determined to be a jackpot, any of the jackpot symbols B1 to B3 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol, the jackpot symbol B1 is selected as the jackpot symbol at a rate of 40%, the jackpot symbol B2 is selected at a rate of 25%, and 35. The jackpot symbol B3 is selected at a rate of%.

The jackpot symbol B1 is a jackpot symbol indicating a 10R probability variation jackpot, and when the jackpot symbol B1 is stopped and displayed, the second jackpot 56 is opened. After the 10R jackpot game in which the round game is repeated 10 times is executed. , It is set to the probabilistic game state. Further, the jackpot symbol B2 is a jackpot symbol indicating a 4R probability variation jackpot, and when the jackpot symbol B2 is stopped and displayed, a 4R jackpot game in which the round game in which the first big winning opening 50 is opened is repeated four times is executed. After that, it is set to the probabilistic game state. Further, the jackpot symbol B3 is a jackpot symbol indicating a 4R normal jackpot, and when the jackpot symbol B3 is stopped and displayed, a 4R jackpot game in which the round game in which the first big winning opening 50 is opened is repeated four times is executed. After that, it is set to the time-saving game state.

The type of jackpot shown here is just an example, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, in the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol A1, the first winning opening 50 may be opened instead of the second winning opening 56, or the first winning opening 50 and the second winning opening 56 may be opened. good. Further, in the big hit game related to the big hit symbols A2 and A3, the second big winning opening 56 may be opened instead of the first winning opening 50, and the first big winning opening 50 and the second big winning opening 56 may be opened. May be. Further, in each big hit game, a short opening round game in which the opening time of the first big winning opening 50 or the second big winning opening 56 is short (for example, 2 seconds or less) may be performed once or a plurality of times.

Returning to FIG. 13, following the jackpot determination process in step S407, the main CPU 100a executes the special figure variation pattern setting process (step S408). Hereinafter, the special figure fluctuation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern setting process)
As shown in FIG. 14, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the probability change flag described later is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high probability state (step S461). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S461: NO), the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the time saving flag described later is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the auxiliary gaming state (step S462). When the time saving flag is OFF (step S462: NO), that is, in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 100a sets the normal table in the main RAM 100c as the special figure variation pattern table (step S463). When the time saving flag is ON (step S462: YES), that is, in the time saving gaming state, the main CPU 100a sets the time saving table in the main RAM 100c as the special figure variation pattern table (step S464).

On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON (step S461: YES), that is, in the probability change gaming state, the main CPU 100a sets the probability change table in the main RAM 100c as the special figure variation pattern table (step S465).

The special figure variation pattern table is a table in which conditions for determining a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are defined. The special figure fluctuation pattern table contains multiple fluctuation patterns, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern selected when the result of the jackpot judgment is a jackpot, and when there is a loss and no reach (using the random value for reach judgment). Loss fluctuation pattern selected when it is not determined to select a fluctuation pattern longer than the predetermined fluctuation time (without reach), when there is a loss and there is reach (predetermined fluctuation time using the random value for reach determination) The reach variation pattern selected at (when it is determined to select the above variation pattern) is included. As an example of the special figure variation pattern table, an example of a normal table selected in the case of a normal gaming state and an example of a probability variation table selected in the case of a probabilistic gaming state will be described later.

Following the processing of step S463, step S464, or step S465, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S407 is a loss (step S466). If the result of the jackpot determination is not a loss, that is, if it is a jackpot (step S466: NO), the main CPU 100a proceeds to the next step 468.

When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination in step S407 is a loss (step S466: YES), the main CPU 100a performs a reach determination process (step S467). In the reach determination process, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not to select a reach variation pattern of a predetermined variation time or longer based on the acquired reach determination random number value. Then, the main CPU 100a executes the process of step S468 following the process of step S467.

In step S468, the main CPU 100a determines a variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, the main CPU 100a selects a variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern determination random number value stored in the determination area of the main RAM 100c using the set special figure variation pattern table. More specifically, the main CPU 100a determines a variation pattern in which the random value for determining the special figure variation pattern and the value set in each variation pattern included in the set special map variation pattern table match.

The determined fluctuation pattern is set in the main RAM 100c as setting information (step S469). After the process of step S469, the main CPU 100a ends the special figure variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14, and proceeds with the processes after step S409 of FIG.

Returning to FIG. 13, following the process of step S408, the main CPU 100a sets the fluctuation start command in the main RAM 100c (step S409). The variation start commands include a special symbol specification command indicating the symbol set in the process of step S407, a special figure variation pattern specification command indicating the variation pattern set in the process of step S408, and a game state specification command indicating the current game state. The first reserved number U1 (U1 after subtraction in S406) and the second reserved number U2 (U2 after subtraction in S404) are included. This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output control process in step S820. As a result, the variable effect using the effect symbol 701 is started.

Following the process of step S409, the main CPU 100a sets the variation time (setting counter value) of the special symbol set in the special figure variation pattern setting process in the main RAM 100c (step S410), and the main CPU 100a sets the special symbol. The fluctuation display of (step S411) is started. Specifically, the main CPU 100a sets "1" as a counter value indicating the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. This counter value is incremented by "1" each time YES is determined in step S402. The counter value is held in the main RAM 100c even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off, and is updated from the value stored before the power is cut off when the power is restored again. Then, based on this counter value, LED lighting data for executing the variation display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of step S810, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S820. As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61. When the processing of steps S407 to S409 is performed following the processing of step S404, the variation display of the special symbol is performed using the second special symbol display 61, and the processing of step S406 is followed. If it is done, it is done using the first special symbol display 60.

When the main CPU 100a determines "YES" in the process of step S402, or when the process of step S411 is executed, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern set in the process of step S408 from the start of the variation display in step S411. It is determined whether or not the time has passed (step S412). Specifically, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the current counter value has reached the set counter value set in step S410.

When the main CPU 100a determines that the fluctuation time has elapsed (step S412: YES), the main CPU 100a sets a fluctuation stop command in the main RAM 100c to notify that the special symbol is stopped and displayed (step S413). The fluctuation stop command includes a symbol confirmation command indicating the result of the jackpot determination (big hit symbol or lost symbol) set at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. The variable stop command may include a game state designation command indicating the current gaming state, a first holding number U1, and information indicating a second holding number U2. This fluctuation stop command is a command for instructing the end of the effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output control process in step S820. As a result, the stop display of the effect symbol 701, the small symbol 702, etc. is performed, and the variable effect using the effect symbol 701 is completed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 100a ends the variation display of the special symbol (step S414), and resets the elapsed time (counter value) (step S415). As a result, on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, the symbol (big hit symbol or lost symbol) corresponding to the result of the jackpot determination process in step S407 is stopped and displayed, and whether or not it is a jackpot is displayed. Be notified.

The main CPU 100a executes the stopped processing after the processing in step S415 (step S416). The details of the stopped processing will be described later.

If "YES" is determined in step S401, "NO" is determined in step S405, "NO" is determined in step S412, or the process of step S416 is performed, the main CPU 100a , End the special symbol processing.

(Processing during stop by the main control unit 100)
Next, the stopped processing in step S416 of FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not it is a jackpot based on the result of the jackpot determination process in step S407 (step S480). Then, when the main CPU 100a determines that it is a big hit (step S480: YES), the main CPU 100a sets the big hit game flag stored in the main RAM 100c to "ON" (step S481).

Following the process of step S481, the main CPU 100a sets the time saving flag and the probability change flag stored in the main RAM 100c to "OFF" (step S482). The main CPU 100a starts the opening (step S483) following the process of step S482, and sets the opening command in the main RAM 100c (step S484). This opening command is a command for causing the effect control unit 130 to perform an opening effect indicating that the jackpot game is started, and the command is a command for the effect control unit 130 to execute the output control process in step S820. Will be sent to.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 100a determines that it is not a big hit (step S480: NO), it determines whether or not the time saving flag is set to "ON" (step S485). When it is determined that the time reduction flag is set to "ON" (step S485: YES), the auxiliary game residual number J stored in the main RAM 100c is subtracted by "1", and the J is updated (step S486). .. The auxiliary game residual number J indicates the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols (number of executions of the jackpot determination) in which the auxiliary game state is maintained, and is set in the game state setting process executed after the jackpot game is performed. The details of the game state setting process will be described later.

Following the process of step S486, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the auxiliary game residual number J is “0” (step S487). When it is determined that the auxiliary game residual number J is "0" (step S487: YES), the main CPU 100a sets the time saving flag to "OFF" (step S488).

When the process of step S488 is executed, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not "ON" (step S485: NO), or when it is determined that the auxiliary game residual number J is not "0" (step S487: NO). , The main CPU 100a determines whether or not the probability change flag is set to "ON" (step S489).

When it is determined that the probability change flag is set to "ON" (step S489: YES), the main CPU 100a subtracts "1" from the high-probability game residual number X stored in the main RAM 100c, and updates the X. (Step S490). The high-probability game residual number X indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol determination is performed in the high-probability state, and is set in the game state setting process (described later) executed after the jackpot game is performed.

Following the process of step S490, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the high-probability game residual number X is “0” (step S491). When it is determined that the high probability game residual number X is "0" (step S491: YES), the probability change flag stored in the main RAM 100c is set to "OFF" (step S492).

When the process of step S492 is executed, when the process of step S484 is executed, when it is determined that the probability change flag is not "ON" (step S489: NO), or the high probability game residual number X is "0". (Step S491: NO), the main CPU 100a ends the stopped processing of FIG.

(Big hit game processing of the main control unit)
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the details of the jackpot game process executed by the main control unit 100 will be described. FIG. 16 is a detailed flowchart showing the jackpot game process of step S500 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the jackpot game flag (special game flag) is ON (step S501). When the jackpot game flag is ON (step S501: YES), the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the opening is in progress (step S502). Here, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game started in step S483 is being opened.

If it is during the opening (step S502: YES), the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S503). The opening time varies depending on the jackpot symbol. If the opening time has elapsed (step S503: YES), the main CPU 100a sets R (indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game) to "0" and sets the value of Rmax according to the result of the jackpot determination process. , The opening pattern (opening time, number of times of opening, interval time, etc.) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 50 or second big winning opening 56) is set (step S504).

Here, as described above, the value of Rmax differs depending on the jackpot symbol, and the main CPU 100a sets Rmax indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol.

Following step S504, the main CPU 100a adds "1" to R and stores it in the main RAM 100c (step S505). Next, the main CPU 100a starts the opening control of the large winning opening based on the opening pattern set in step S504 (step S506), and sets the round start command indicating the start of the round in the main RAM 100c (step S507). This round start command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output control process in step S820. After the process of step S507, the main CPU 100a then executes the process of step S511.

On the other hand, if it is not during the opening (step S502: NO), the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the ending is in progress (step S508). If the ending is in progress (step S508: YES), the main CPU 100a then executes the process of step S518. If it is not during the ending (step S508: NO), the main CPU 100a determines whether or not it is during the interval between the round games (step S509). If the interval is in progress (step S509: YES), the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the interval time has elapsed (step S510), and if it has elapsed (step S510: YES), then the process of step S505. To execute. If the interval time has not elapsed (step S510: NO), the main CPU 100a ends the jackpot game process.

On the other hand, when it is not in the interval (step S509: NO), that is, when the round game is in progress, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the round end condition is satisfied (step S511). If the round end condition is not satisfied (step S511: NO), the main CPU 100a ends the jackpot game process.

The round end condition is that a predetermined time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed since the opening control of the large winning opening of this round was started in step S506, or the opening control of the large winning opening of this round is controlled in step S506. The number of winnings to the large winning opening of the game ball after the start of the game has reached a predetermined value (for example, 10). When any of these two conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 100a determines that the round end condition is satisfied.

When the round end condition is satisfied (step S511: YES), the main CPU 100a ends the opening control of the large winning opening in this round (step S512). Subsequently, the main CPU 100a sets a round end command (step S513). This round end command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output control process in step S820.

Subsequently, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not R is equal to Rmax (step S514). That is, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the current round is equal to the maximum number of rounds set in step S504.

When it is determined that R is not equal to Rmax (step S514: NO), the main CPU 100a starts measuring the interval time (step S515), and then ends the jackpot game process.

When it is determined that R is equal to Rmax (step S514: YES), the main CPU 100a starts the ending (step S516) and sets the ending command in the main RAM 100c (step S517). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 130 by executing the output control process in step S820.

When the main CPU 100a performs the process of step S517 or determines YES in the process of step S508, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not a preset ending time has elapsed since the ending was started in step S516 (. Step S518). If the ending time has elapsed (step S518: YES), the main CPU 100a executes the game state setting process (step S519). The details of the game state setting process will be described later. When the game state setting process of step S519 is executed, the main CPU 100a sets the jackpot game flag (special game flag) to OFF (step S520).

When NO is determined in the process of step S501, NO is determined in the process of step S511, NO is determined in the process of step S518, NO is determined in the process of step S503, the process of step S515 is executed. If this is the case, or if the process of step S520 is executed, the main CPU 100a ends the jackpot game process shown in FIG.

(Game state setting process by the main control unit)
Next, the game state setting process in step S519 of FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart showing the game state setting process of step S519 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 17, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the type of the jackpot this time is a probabilistic jackpot accompanied by a transition to a high probability state (step S530). Specifically, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot based on the jackpot symbol set in the jackpot determination process. In the case of a probability variation jackpot (step S530: YES), the main CPU 100a sets the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON (step S531), sets Xmax for the high probability game residual number X, and sets the auxiliary game residual number J. Jmax is set in (step S532). Xmax and Jmax are predetermined values, and very large values such as 10000 are set as Xmax and Jmax. Since a very large value Xmax is set for X, the game is effectively controlled in the probabilistic game state until the next big hit.

When the process of step S532 is performed, or when it is determined as NO in step S530, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the current jackpot is a normal jackpot accompanied by a shift to the reduced working hours gaming state (step S533). If YES is determined in step S533, the main CPU 100a sets the time saving flag to ON (step S534). Subsequently, the main CPU 100a sets, for example, "100" in the auxiliary game residual number J (step S535).

When the process of step S535 is performed, or when NO is determined in step S533, the main CPU 100a ends the game state setting process shown in FIG.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control unit)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control unit 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the performance display data setting process in the main control unit 100.

First, in step S920-1, the main CPU 100a displays a display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c in order to determine whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113. It is determined whether or not the switching value is "0". If the display switching value is "0", the process is transferred to step 920-2 assuming that the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and if the display switching value is not "0", the process is performed. , The process is transferred to step S920-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not switched. When this process is first executed after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S920-2, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the lighting confirmed flag for determining whether or not the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S920-4 assuming that the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and if the lighting confirmed flag is not saved, the information is displayed. The process is transferred to step S920-3 to confirm the lighting of the device 113. When this process is executed for the first time after the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step S920-3, the main CPU 100a displays for lighting confirmation for lighting all segments (including decimal points) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. Determine the data.

In step S920-4, the main CPU 100a acquires a normal base value (for display on the information display 113) according to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage is performed. The normal base value saved in the second area of the area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "2", the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area is acquired and the data is selected. If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired.

In step S920-5, the main CPU 100a displays information based on the interval counter value, the number of normal medium outs indicated by the normal medium out number counter, and the acquired normal base value with reference to a display data determination table (not shown). The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

The main CPU 100a sets the determined display data in step S920-6 in the output data area of the information RWM area as the display information of the information display 113. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area is referred to in the output control process of step S940 described above, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. Will be done. The display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

In step S920-7, the main CPU 100a adds 1 to the above-mentioned display switching time counter, and in step S920-8, determines whether or not the display switching time counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process is transferred to step S920-15. If it is larger than the upper limit value, the information display 113 is displayed. Assuming that the time for switching the displayed performance information has elapsed, the display switching time counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S920-9.

In step S920-10, the main CPU 100a determines whether or not the above-mentioned lighting confirmed flag is present in the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process is transferred to step S920-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c in step S920-11. ..

In step S920-12, the main CPU 100a adds 1 to the above-mentioned data selection counter, and in step S920-13, determines whether or not the data selection counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 3). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S920-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit value, the data selection counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S920-14.

In step S920-15, the main CPU 100a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 100c in the above-mentioned game ball counting process, and in step S920-16, the main RAM 100c is used for information in the above-mentioned game ball counting process. The game stack pointer saved in the RWM area is returned, and the performance display data setting process this time is terminated.

In this way, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 are lit (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether the information display 113 is out of order, which segment is out of order, and the like.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order, so that the latest 4 is displayed. Performance information (usually base value) in one game section can be compared, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraudulent activity.

(Display information of information display in each game section)
Next, the display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing display information of the information display in each game section. In the table of display information of FIG. 20, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed on the identification segment of the information display 113 is "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the current game section, and "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the previous game section. There are "b1.", "B2.", Which indicates that the game section is the normal base value two times before, and "b3.", Which indicates that the game section is the normal base value three times before.

The numerical information displayed in the numerical value segment of the information display 113 is "---" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal outs is "0". "00" indicating that, "01" to "99" indicating that the number of normal outs is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and the normal base value are There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. Normally, when the base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical seg does not change (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal times, but the identification information displayed in the identification seg is the game section or The display mode changes (blinks or lights up) depending on the number of outs during normal times (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value or whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when the identification information of the game section without the calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is displayed blinking. Further, in the game section after the second game section, when the identification information (“bL.”) Of the current game section is displayed, the calculated normal base value has a low credibility period (the number of outs during normal times is high). If it is 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed blinking. In other cases, the identification information is lit and displayed.

Here, to show an example of the display of the information display 113, the section counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is in the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." Is blinking and displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113, and "35" is displayed in the numerical segment. Will be lit and displayed.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information "00" to "99" that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value is displayed. When the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." is displayed in the numerical segment, so it is easy to grasp that it is an abnormal normal base value. ..

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01"), so 2 as a numerical segment. It is possible to make an easy-to-understand display by effectively using the three 7-segment displays.

Further, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of normal outs in the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient for calculating the normal base value. Since the identification information "bL." Displayed on the identification segment is blinking and displayed, it is easy to understand that the normally displayed base value is low credibility information.

In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "---" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that it is not.

The game ball counting process, the performance information calculation process, and the performance display data setting process are not executed as an information program, but one or two of them are executed as a game program (for example, a game ball counting process). The process may be executed within the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting the display data for displaying the performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by the performance program instead of being executed by the output control process which is the game program.

Further, the game balls that have won the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, the first large winning opening 50, and the second large winning opening 56 by the out ball detection switch 39a, and the out opening 39. Instead of detecting the out ball composed of the game balls that have flowed into the out ball, only the game ball that has flowed into the out port may be detected by the out ball detection switch 39a. In that case, the out ball detection switch 39a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the first major winning opening detection switch 50a, the second major winning opening detection switch. Every time the game ball is detected by 56a, the number of outs (total number of outs, normal number of outs) may be added by one.

(Reach production, special figure fluctuation pattern table)
Here, after explaining the reach effect, an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern table will be described.

The first image display device 70 displays three effect symbols 701 on the left, middle, and right, and three effect symbols 701 start to change according to the start of change of the special symbol, and three effect symbols 701 of the same type are started to change. When all of them are stopped (for example, "777" or "444"), the jackpot is notified. The state in which three similar production symbols 701 are aligned is called "doublet" or "matching symbols". If the three production symbols 701 of the same type are not aligned and stopped, it means that the loss is basically notified. The state in which three different production symbols 701 are stopped without the reach effect being performed is called "blank eye" or "normal loss". Further, as a result of the reach effect, the fact that the three similar effect symbols 701 are not aligned and the loss is notified may be referred to as "reach loss".

The reach effect is an effect using the effect symbol 701 displayed on the first image display device 70, and is an effect that makes the player expect a big hit. Specifically, the reach effect is an effect in which the effect symbol 701 of the same type is temporarily stopped on the left and right, and the effect symbol 701 fluctuates in the middle region, and the effect symbol 701 of the same type as the effect symbol 701 temporarily stopped on the left and right is in the middle. It is a production that makes the player expect to stop in the area.

Here, the "temporary stop" is a state in which the effect symbol 701 does not stop completely but slightly fluctuates (for example, swings up and down).

In the present embodiment, the reach effects include a normal reach effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “N reach”), an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, and a special reach effect. The N-reach production is the production with the lowest possibility of becoming a big hit (also called jackpot expectation or reliability) among a plurality of reach productions. For example, the jackpot expectation of N reach production is 1% or less. As the N reach effect, there may be a plurality of N reach effects having different (or the same) production time and / or jackpot expectation.

The SP reach production is a production with a higher expectation of a big hit than the N reach production, and is a reach production with a longer production time than the N reach production. For example, the jackpot expectation of SP reach production is 5 to 10%. As the SP reach effect, there may be a plurality of SP reach effects. The jackpot expectation may differ depending on each SP reach effect, and the effect time may also differ. The longer the SP reach effect is, the higher the expectation of a big hit may be.

The SPSP reach production is a production with a higher expectation of a big hit than the SP reach production, and is a reach production with a longer production time than the SP reach production. For example, the jackpot expectation of the SPSP reach effect is 30 to 50%. As the SPSP reach effect, there may be a plurality of SPSP reach effects. The jackpot expectation may differ depending on each SPSP reach effect, and the effect time may also differ. The longer the SPSP reach effect is, the higher the expectation of a big hit may be.

Further, the special reach effect is an effect having the highest expectation of a big hit, for example, an effect suggesting a big hit (a definite effect indicating the confirmation of the big hit). That is, the special reach effect is an effect that is executed only when it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination, and the big hit expectation is 100%. In addition, the special reach effect is also an effect that suggests the most advantageous jackpot game (10R probability variation jackpot game) for the player.

(Example of special figure fluctuation pattern table)
Next, an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern table will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 21, when it is determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol A1 is determined, the variation pattern OP1 (variation time 30 seconds) and the variation pattern OP1 (variation time 30 seconds) are used as the jackpot variation patterns. One of the pattern OP2 (variation time 60 seconds), the variation pattern OP3 (variation time 90 seconds), and the variation pattern OP4 (variation time 120 seconds) is selected. Specifically, the variation pattern OP1 is selected at a rate of 2%, the variation pattern OP2 is selected at a rate of 8%, the variation pattern OP3 is selected at a rate of 88%, and the variation pattern OP4 is selected at a rate of 2%. Be selected. A random value for determining a special figure fluctuation pattern (changes in the range of 0 to 99) is assigned to each fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation pattern table, and a starting port (first starting port 45 or second starting port 47) is assigned. The variation pattern is based on which of the special map variation pattern determination random values set in the special map variation pattern table matches the special map variation pattern determination random value acquired at the time of winning the game ball. Be selected.

The variation pattern OP1 is a variation pattern in which a normal reach (N reach) effect is performed as a reach effect by the effect control unit 130. When the variation pattern OP1 is selected, three effect symbols start to change according to the start of variation of the special symbol, and then the same type of effect symbols are temporarily stopped on the left and right to perform an N reach effect, and a big hit is notified. .. It should be noted that the variation of the special symbol due to the variation pattern in which the N reach effect is performed may be referred to as "N reach variation".

It should be noted that the pseudo-variable effect (pseudo-ream) may be performed before (or after) the N reach effect is started. In this case, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance as variation patterns in which the variation effect including the N reach effect and the pseudo variation effect is performed. Here, the pseudo-ream is an effect in which at least one of the three effect symbols 701 (for example, a pseudo-ream symbol suggesting a pseudo-ream) is temporarily stopped and revariates. The greater the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the expectation of a big hit. For example, the pseudo-ream may be performed by temporarily stopping the three effect symbols 701 and then re-changing, or the pseudo-ream symbol suggesting the pseudo-ream temporarily stops and the three effect symbols 701 re-variate. By doing so, a pseudo-ream may be performed. Further, a pseudo-ream may be performed by operating a predetermined image or an accessory for the effect during the variable display of the three effect symbols 701.

For example, one or a plurality of pseudo-reams (revariations) may be performed before the reach is established (the same kind of effect symbols are temporarily stopped on the left and right), and then the N reach effect may be started. Further, the reach may be established without performing the pseudo-ream, and then one or a plurality of pseudo-reams may be performed, the reach may be established again, and the N reach effect may be started. In addition, one or more pseudo-reams are performed before the reach is established, then the reach is established, and then one or multiple pseudo-reams are performed, the reach is established again, and the reach effect is performed. You may. It should be noted that the pseudo-ream may be performed without any of the three effect symbols 701 being temporarily stopped.

The variation pattern OP2 is a variation pattern in which a variation effect including an SP reach effect is performed as a reach effect. When the variation pattern OP2 is selected, the three effect symbols start to change according to the start of variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed to notify the jackpot. It should be noted that the variation of the special symbol due to the variation pattern in which the SP reach effect is performed may be referred to as "SP reach variation".

The variation pattern OP3 is a variation pattern in which a variation effect including an SPSP reach effect is performed as a reach effect. Specifically, when the variation pattern OP3 is selected, the three effect symbols start to change according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, the N reach effect is performed, then the SP reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. SPSP reach production is performed and a big hit is notified. It should be noted that the variation of the special symbol due to the variation pattern in which the SPSP reach effect is performed may be referred to as "SPSP reach variation".

When the variation pattern OP4 is selected, the variation effect including the special reach effect is performed. Specifically, when the variation pattern OP4 is selected, the three effect symbols start to change according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, and either through (or not) the N reach effect or the SP reach effect. ), A special reach effect is performed, and a big hit is notified. The special reach effect is an effect that fluctuates in a state where three effect symbols 701 indicating a big hit are aligned, and is an effect that suggests a big hit.

When it is determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the jackpot symbol A2 or A3 is determined, the jackpot variation pattern is any of the variation pattern OP1, the variation pattern OP2, and the variation pattern OP3. Is selected. Specifically, the variation pattern OP1 is selected at a rate of 1%, the variation pattern OP2 is selected at a rate of 9%, and the variation pattern OP3 is selected at a rate of 90%. When the jackpot symbol A2 or A3 is determined, the variation pattern OP4 (the variation pattern in which the special reach effect is performed) is not selected.

Even when the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, the same variation pattern as in the case where the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot is selected. Therefore, the description of the case where it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination relating to the second special symbol will be omitted. When the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, a variation pattern different from the case where the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot may be selected. For example, there may be an effect (second special symbol dedicated effect (big hit)) that is executed only when it is determined to be a big hit in the big hit determination related to the second special symbol.

When it is determined that the jackpot is lost in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the reach determination random number value acquired at the time of winning the game ball to the starting port is, for example, 0 to 9, the variation pattern RP1 is used as the reach variation pattern. (Variation time: 28 seconds), fluctuation pattern RP2 (variation time: 58 seconds), and fluctuation pattern RP3 (variation time: 88 seconds) are selected. Specifically, the variation pattern RP1 is selected at a rate of 60%, the variation pattern RP2 is selected at a rate of 30%, and the variation pattern RP3 is selected at a rate of 10%.

The variation pattern RP1 is a variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is performed. When the variation pattern RP1 is selected, three effect symbols 701 start to change according to the start of variation of the special symbol, and then the same type of effect symbols 701 are left and right. Is temporarily stopped, an N reach effect is performed, and a loss is notified.

The variation pattern RP2 is a variation pattern in which the SP reach effect is performed. When the variation pattern RP2 is selected, the three effect symbols 701 start to change according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, and then the same type of effect symbols are left and right. 701 is temporarily stopped to perform an N reach effect, and then an SP reach effect is performed to notify the loss.

The variation pattern RP3 is a variation pattern in which a variation effect including the SPSP reach effect is performed. When the variation pattern RP3 is selected, the three effect symbols 701 start to change according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the N reach effect is performed. Is performed, then the SP reach effect is performed, and then the SPSP reach effect is performed, and the loss is notified.

When it is determined to be lost in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol and the reach determination random number value is, for example, 10 to 99, the loss fluctuation pattern is selected. Specifically, when the first hold number U1 is "0" to "2", the fluctuation pattern HP1 (variation time: 8 seconds) is selected, and when the first hold number U1 is "3", the fluctuation pattern HP2 is selected. (Variation time: 3 seconds) is selected.

The fluctuation patterns HP1 and HP2 are fluctuation patterns in which an effect indicating a loss is normally performed, and after the three effect symbols start to change, the variation pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting a loss without performing a reach effect. Is. In the following, the fluctuation patterns HP1 and HP2 may be referred to as "normal loss fluctuation".

Even when it is determined to be lost in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol, the same fluctuation pattern as in the case where it is determined to be lost in the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is selected. Therefore, the description of the case where the jackpot determination relating to the second special symbol is determined to be a loss will be omitted. When the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be lost, a variation pattern different from the case where the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be lost may be selected. For example, there may be an effect (second special symbol-dedicated effect (loss)) that is executed only when it is determined that the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is lost.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in a probabilistic game state.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the probabilistic gaming state, when the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot and the jackpot symbol A1 is determined, the variation pattern OP5 (variation time 40) is used as the jackpot variation pattern. Seconds) or variation pattern OP6 (variation time 50 seconds) is selected. When the jackpot symbol A2 is determined, the variation pattern OP5 or the variation pattern OP7 (variation time 40 seconds) is selected as the jackpot variation pattern. When the jackpot symbol A3 is determined, the variation pattern OP7 is selected as the jackpot variation pattern.

Further, in the probabilistic gaming state, when the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot and the jackpot symbol B1 is determined, the variation pattern OP5 or the variation pattern OP6 is selected as the jackpot variation pattern. When the jackpot symbol B2 is determined, the variation pattern OP5 or the variation pattern OP7 is selected as the jackpot variation pattern. When the jackpot symbol B3 is determined, the variation pattern OP7 is selected as the jackpot variation pattern.

The variation pattern OP5 is a variation pattern in which a battle reach effect is performed in which the player's own character and the enemy character fight each other, and as a result of the battle reach effect, a draw effect is performed in which the own character and the enemy character are drawn. .. The draw effect is an effect that suggests a probable change jackpot, and is an effect that suggests the possibility of a 4R probable change jackpot.

The variation pattern OP6 is a variation pattern in which a battle reach effect is performed, and as a result of the battle reach effect, a victory effect in which the own character wins is performed. The victory production is a production that suggests a 10R probability change jackpot.

The variation pattern OP7 is a variation pattern in which a battle reach effect is performed, and as a result of the battle reach effect, a defeat effect in which the own character is defeated is performed. The defeat production is a production that suggests the possibility of a 4R normal jackpot.

Further, in the probabilistic gaming state, when the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is determined to be a loss, the variation pattern HP3 (variation time 15 seconds) is selected as the loss variation pattern. Further, when the jackpot determination relating to the second special symbol is determined to be a loss, and the second hold number U2 is "1" to "3", the variation pattern HP4 (variation time 2 seconds) or the variation pattern HP4 (variation time 2 seconds) is used as the loss variation pattern. When the variation pattern HP5 (variation time 8 seconds) is selected and the second hold number U2 is “0”, the variation pattern HP3 is selected as the loss variation pattern.

When the variation patterns HP3 to 5 are selected, the three effect symbols 701 are changed and then stopped in a lost manner without performing the battle reach effect.

(Timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit)
Next, the details of the effect control based on various commands from the main control unit 100 will be described.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed by the effect control unit 130. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 130a of the effect control unit 130 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 23 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) by interruption.

First, the sub CPU 130a executes a command reception process (step E10). The command reception process in step E10 is a process for controlling the effect based on various commands from the main control unit 100. The effect control unit 130 receives a command from the main control unit 100, determines the content of the effect according to the received command, and causes the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the determined effect. Generate a command and set it in the sub RAM 130c. The details of the command reception process in step E10 will be described later.

Following step E10, the sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting control process (step E20). Specifically, the sub CPU 130a starts the customer waiting demo effect when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed after receiving the customer waiting command from the main control unit 100. In this case, the effect control unit 130 stops the BGM being output and outputs the BGM for the customer waiting demo effect.

Next, the sub CPU 130a performs a command transmission process of transmitting each command set in the sub RAM 130c to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 (step E30). As a result, the image / sound control unit 140 performs effects such as image display and sound output, and the lamp control unit 150 controls the movable effect device 73, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the like.

(Command reception processing by the effect control unit 130)
Hereinafter, the command reception process executed by the effect control unit 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the command reception process in step E10 of FIG. 23.

First, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 100 (step E101). When the command is received (step E101: YES), the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step E102, and when the command is not received (step E101: NO), the sub CPU 130a ends the command reception process this time.

The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting change command (step E102). When it is a setting change command (step E102: YES), the sub CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process (step E103). Specifically, the sub CPU 130a sets the notification instruction command for starting the above-mentioned setting change notification in the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the setting change notification is performed.

When step E103 is executed, or when NO is determined in step E102, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a setting confirmation command (step E104).

When it is a setting confirmation command (step E104: YES), the sub CPU 130a performs a setting confirmation notification process (step E105). Specifically, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification in the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the setting confirmation notification is performed.

When step E105 is executed, or when NO is determined in step E104, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a power-on command or a power recovery command (step E106).

When it is a power-on command or a power-restoring command (step E106: YES), the sub CPU 130a performs a power-on notification process (step E107). Specifically, when the received command is a power-on command, the notification instruction command for executing the above-mentioned power-on notification is set in the sub RAM 130c, and when the received command is a power recovery command. , The notification instruction command for executing the power recovery notification described above is set in the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the power-on notification or the power restoration notification, and the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second). Processing is performed to execute an initial operation for operating the movable member 73b) in a predetermined mode, an initial light emission for causing the panel lighting device 74 to emit light in a predetermined mode, and the like.

When step E107 is executed, or when NO is determined in step E106, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an error command (step E108).

Here, the error commands include an unrecoverable error command, an illegal winning error command, an abnormal winning error command, a magnetic error command, a radio wave error command, a door opening error start command, a door opening error ending command, an operation error command, and the like. be.

When the command is an error system designation command (step E108: YES), the sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing (step E109). Specifically, error notification according to the type of received error-related command (unrecoverable error notification, illegal winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door opening error notification, operation error notification) Etc.), the notification instruction command is set in the sub RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and various error notifications are performed.

When step E109 is executed, or when NO is determined in step E108, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a start winning command (first start winning command or second starting winning command). (Step E110). Here, the start winning command includes the first hold number U1 and the second hold number U2. Further, the start winning command may include the first look-ahead information or the second look-ahead information.

When the received command is a start winning command (step E110: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes the start winning command process (step E111). The start winning command process is a process executed when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. The details of the start winning command processing will be described later.

When step E111 is executed, or when NO is determined in step E110, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a fluctuation start command (step E112). When it is a variation start command (step E112: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes the variation start command process (step E113). The variation start command process is a process executed when the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. By performing the variation start command processing, the operation effect at the start of the effect symbol 701, which will be described later, is performed, and the variation effect using the effect symbol 701 is started. The details of the fluctuation start command processing and the specific example of the effect according to the fluctuation start command processing will be described later.

When step E113 is executed or when NO is determined in step E112, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is a variable stop command (step E114). When it is a variable stop command (step E114: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes the variable stop command process (step E115). The variable stop command process is a process executed when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the fluctuation stop command processing, the effect symbol 701 and the small symbol 702 are stopped and displayed according to the result of the jackpot determination, and the variation effect is ended. Further, in the fluctuation stop command processing, the disappearance effect of the icon, which will be described later, is performed. A specific example of the effect corresponding to this fluctuation stop command processing will be described later.

When step E115 is executed, or when NO is determined in step E114, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an opening command (step E116). When it is an opening command (step E116: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes the opening process (step E117). Specifically, the sub CPU 130a determines an opening effect indicating that the jackpot game is started, and sets a command in the sub RAM 130c for causing the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the opening effect. .. As a result, the command is transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the opening effect is performed.

When step E117 is executed, or when NO is determined in step E116, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the received command is an ending command (step E118). When it is an ending command (step E118: YES), the sub CPU 130a executes the ending process (step E119). Specifically, the sub CPU 130a determines an ending effect indicating that the jackpot game is ended, and sets a command in the sub RAM 130c for causing the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the ending effect. .. As a result, the command is transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing for executing the ending effect is performed.

(Starting prize command processing by the production control unit 130)
Hereinafter, the start winning command processing executed by the effect control unit 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning command processing in step E111 of FIG. 24.

The sub CPU 130a updates the first hold number N1 or the second hold number N2 stored in the sub RAM 130c based on the received start winning command (step E111-1). Here, the first hold number N1 is a value indicating the hold number of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol, and the second hold number N2 is a value indicating the hold number of the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol. .. The first hold number N1 is updated (increased) based on the first hold number U1 in the start winning command, and the second hold number N2 is updated (increased) based on the second hold number U2. As a result, the first hold number U1 stored in the main control unit 100 is set as the first hold number N1, and the second hold number U2 stored in the main control unit 100 is set as the second hold number N2. To.

Next, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the result of the preliminary determination based on the first look-ahead information or the second look-ahead information in the received start winning command (step E111-2). For example, when the received start winning command is based on the winning to the first starting port 45, the sub CPU 130a has the result of the first pre-determination process (whether or not it is a big hit, the big hit symbol, based on the first look-ahead information. Judgment of special figure fluctuation pattern, etc.). If the start winning command does not include the look-ahead information, steps E111-3 to E111-6 are not executed, and then the process of step E111-7 is executed.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 130a performs the icon change effect determination process based on the analysis result of step E111-2 (step E111-3). The "icon change effect" is a hold icon (first hold icon or second hold icon) or an effect in which the icon changes. Here, based on the result of the preliminary judgment (whether or not it is a big hit, the big hit symbol, the special figure fluctuation pattern), the hold icon corresponding to the received start winning command is set to a special mode (blue, red, gold, which is different from the normal mode). Whether or not to change to iridescent) and the scenario of the change are determined. The determined scenario is stored in the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to change the hold icon to a special mode based on the result of the preliminary determination and the effect random number. For example, when it is determined to be a big hit in the preliminary determination, the probability that it is determined to change the hold icon to a special mode is higher than when it is determined to be a loss. When it is determined that the hold icon is changed to a special mode, the sub CPU 130a further performs a lottery based on the icon change scenario table and the effect random number, and the hold icon change scenario (final display mode and final). The process leading up to the appropriate display mode) is determined. An example of the icon change scenario table will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 130a performs a start effect effect determination process based on the analysis result of step E111-2 (step E111-4). Although the details will be described later, the start effect effect is an example of a look-ahead continuous effect that can be executed over the fluctuations of a plurality of special symbols, and an effect image is added to the effect symbol 701 at the start of the change of the effect symbol 701. Is. The effect image is an image that emphasizes the effect symbol 701, and is, for example, an effect in which the effect symbol 701 emits light in a predetermined color. In step E111-4, the sub CPU 130a first determines whether or not the condition for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is satisfied. The condition for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is that the reach effect is not performed in the pending change of the special symbol until the change of the special symbol related to the current prize (change of the look-ahead target) is performed. .. That is, the condition for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is that the change before the change of the look-ahead target is a normal loss change (any of the change patterns HP1 to 5). When the condition for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is satisfied, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute the start effect effect by a lottery based on a random number, and decides to execute the start effect effect. In that case, the scenario of the start effect effect is determined by performing a lottery using the start effect effect scenario table. The determined scenario is stored in the sub RAM 130c. An example of the start effect effect scenario table will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 130a performs a zone effect determination process based on the analysis result of step E111-2 (step E111-5). Although the details will be described later, the zone effect is an example of a look-ahead continuous effect that can be executed over the fluctuation of a plurality of special symbols, and is an effect accompanied by a change in the background image. Here, the sub CPU 130a determines by lottery whether or not to execute the zone effect when the condition for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is satisfied, and when it is determined to execute the zone effect, the zone effect is executed. By performing a lottery using the scenario table, the scenario of the zone production is determined. The determined scenario is stored in the sub RAM 130c. An example of the zone production scenario table will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 130a performs the chance eye effect determination process based on the analysis result of step E111-2 (step E111-6). The details will be described later, but the chance eye effect is an example of a look-ahead continuous effect that can be executed over the fluctuation of a plurality of special symbols. By stopping the three effect symbols 701 at a specific combination, the next and subsequent special symbols It is a production that suggests that there is a possibility of a big hit in the fluctuation of. Here, the sub CPU 130a determines by lottery whether or not to execute the chance eye effect when the condition for executing the look-ahead continuous effect is satisfied, and when it is determined to execute the chance eye effect, the sub CPU 130a determines. The scenario of the chance eye production is determined by performing a lottery using the chance eye production scenario table. The determined scenario is stored in the sub RAM 130c. An example of the chance eye production scenario table will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 130a additionally displays the hold icon (step E111-7). When the sub CPU 130a is determined to display the hold icon in a special mode when the hold icon is additionally displayed in the icon change effect determination process of step E111-3, the sub CPU 130a additionally displays the hold icon in the determined mode. Set the command. When the command is transmitted to the image / sound control unit 140, an icon additional display effect for additionally displaying the first hold icon or the second hold icon corresponding to the start winning command is executed. The details of the icon addition display effect will be described later. The sub CPU 130a confirms the consistency between the number of currently displayed hold icons and the first hold number N1 or the second hold number N2 updated in step S111-1. When inconsistency occurs, control is performed so that the number of hold icons matches the first hold number N1 or the second hold number N2. This control will be described later.

When the process of step E111-7 is executed, the sub CPU 130a ends the process shown in FIG. 25.

(Example of icon change scenario table)
Here, an example of the icon change scenario table will be described. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of an icon change scenario table. Here, a case where the first reserved number N1 is “4” and the special figure fluctuation pattern OP3 or RP3 in which the SPSP reach effect is performed is determined in advance as the special figure fluctuation pattern will be described.

In FIG. 26, “4 before change” indicates the change 4 before the change of the special symbol related to the received start winning command, and “3 before change” indicates the change of the special symbol related to the received start winning command. "2 before change" indicates the change 2 before the change of the special symbol related to the received start winning command, and "1 before change" indicates the change related to the received start winning command. The change immediately before the change of the symbol is shown. Further, "the change" indicates the change of the special symbol related to the received start winning command. Colors such as "blue" and "red" described in each pattern indicate the color of the hold icon or the icon during each fluctuation period.

For example, in scenario 1, everything from "4 before change" to "the change" is "blue". This indicates that when the first hold icon corresponding to the current prize is additionally displayed, it changes to "blue" and then maintains "blue". Further, for example, in scenario 9, when the first hold icon corresponding to the current prize is additionally displayed, it is displayed in the normal mode, and even in "3 before change", it is displayed in the normal mode, and "2 before change". In, it changes from the normal aspect to "blue", and changes from "blue" to "red" in "1 change before". Further, the scenario 15 is displayed in the normal mode when the first hold icon corresponding to the current prize is additionally displayed, and is also displayed in the normal mode in "3 before change" and "2 before change". 1 It is shown that the mode changes from the normal mode to "red" in "before the change" and changes from "red" to "gold" in the "change".

As is clear from the figure, when the result of the preliminary judgment is determined to be a big hit, the selection rate of the final display mode is gold> red> blue, and when it is determined to be lost, the final display mode is selected. The selection rate of the display mode is blue> red> gold. Therefore, as for the hold icon or the display mode of the icon, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of "gold", "red", and "blue". Since "rainbow" is selected only in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot expectation of "rainbow" is 100%. Also, the "rainbow" can only change in the "change". That is, it does not change to "rainbow" while it is displayed as the first hold icon, and may change to "rainbow" only when it is displayed as the icon.

Note that FIG. 26 is merely an example, and the effect control unit 100 stores an icon change scenario corresponding to the number of holds and the special figure fluctuation pattern. For example, the SP reach icon change scenario table corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern OP2 or RP2 in which the number of holds is "4" and the SP reach effect is performed, the number of holds is "4", and the number of holds is N reach. An icon change scenario table for N reach corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern OP1 or RP1 to be produced is prepared in advance. In each table, the selection ratio of each aspect of the icon is different. For example, in the SP reach icon change scenario table and the N reach icon change scenario table, the ratio of "gold" selected as the final display mode may be "0". In this case, when the hold icon or the icon changes to "gold", it always develops into the SPSP reach effect. It should be noted that, instead of preparing a plurality of icon change scenario tables corresponding to the number of holds and the special figure fluctuation pattern, one icon change scenario table including the conditions related to the number of holds and the special figure change pattern may be prepared. ..

(Example of effect production scenario table at the start)
Here, an example of the effect effect effect scenario table at the start will be described. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of an effect effect effect scenario table at the start. Here, a case where the first reserved number N1 is “4” and the special figure fluctuation pattern OP3 or RP3 in which the SPSP reach effect is performed is determined in advance as the special figure fluctuation pattern will be described.

Although the details will be described later, there are, for example, two modes of the effect effect at the start, "blue" and "red", and it is shown that red has a higher expectation of big hit than blue.

As shown in FIG. 27, for example, in scenario 1, everything from "3 before the change" to "the change" is "blue". This is because the change of the current special symbol (before 4 changes) is completed, and in the next change of special symbols (that is, before 3 changes), the effect effect at the start of the "blue" mode is performed, and "2 before change". "And" 1 before the change "also show that the start effect effect of the" blue "mode is performed, and also in the" change ", the start effect effect of the" blue "mode is performed. Further, in the scenario 14, the start effect effect of the "blue" mode is performed in "1 change", and the start effect effect of the "red" mode is performed in the "red" mode.

As is clear from the figure, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the preliminary determination, red is more likely to be selected as the mode of the effect effect at the start than blue, and when it is determined to be lost, at the start. Blue is easier to select than red as the mode of effect production. Therefore, as for the mode of effect production at the start, "red" has a higher expectation of big hit than "blue". In addition to these, there may be a plurality of modes as the mode of the effect effect at the start.

Further, as in FIG. 26, the table of FIG. 27 is merely an example, and an SP reach start effect effect scenario table and an N reach start effect effect scenario table are prepared. In each table, the ratio of selecting the "blue" mode and the "red" mode is different. For example, in the N reach start effect effect scenario table, even in the case of a big hit, the probability that the "red" mode is selected is low, for example, "0". The start effect effect scenario table in which the SPSP reach table, the SP reach table, and the N reach table are combined may be stored in advance in the effect control unit 130. Further, the tables do not have to be divided according to the number of holds, and one table may be prepared regardless of the number of holds.

(Example of zone production scenario table)
Here, an example of the zone production scenario table will be described. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a zone effect scenario table. Here, a case where the first reserved number N1 is “4” and the special figure fluctuation pattern OP3 or RP3 in which the SPSP reach effect is performed is determined in advance as the special figure fluctuation pattern will be described.

For example, there are two modes of zone production, "strong zone" and "weak zone", and it is shown that the "strong zone" has a higher expectation of big hit than the "weak zone".

As shown in FIG. 28, for example, in scenario 1, everything from "3 before the change" to "the change" is a "weak zone". This is because the change of the current special symbol (before 4 changes) is completed, the "weak zone effect" is performed in the next change of special symbols (that is, before 3 changes), and "2 changes before" and "1 change" are performed. It is shown that the "weak zone effect" is performed in "before" and the "weak zone effect" is performed in "the fluctuation". Further, for example, in scenario 7, it is shown that the "weak zone" effect is performed in "1 before the change" and the "strong zone effect" is performed in the "correspondence".

As is clear from the figure, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the preliminary judgment, it is easier to select "strong zone production" than "weak zone production" as the mode of zone production, and it is determined to be a loss. In this case, it is easier to select "weak zone effect" than "strong zone effect". For this reason, the “strong zone production” has a higher expectation of a big hit than the “weak zone production”. In addition to these, there may be a plurality of modes of the zone effect.

Further, as in FIG. 26, the table of FIG. 28 is just an example, and a zone effect scenario table for SP reach and a zone effect scenario table for N reach are prepared, and in each table, "strong zone effect" is prepared. , "Weak zone production" is selected differently. For example, in the N reach zone effect scenario table, even in the case of a big hit, the probability that "strong zone effect" is selected is low, for example, "0". The zone effect scenario table in which the SPSP reach table, the SP reach table, and the N reach table are integrated may be stored in advance in the effect control unit 130. Further, the tables do not have to be divided according to the number of holds, and one table may be prepared regardless of the number of holds.

(An example of a chance eye production scenario table)
Here, an example of the chance eye production scenario table will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of a chance eye effect scenario table. Here, a case where the first reserved number N1 is “4” and the special figure fluctuation pattern OP3 or RP3 in which the SPSP reach effect is performed is determined in advance as the special figure fluctuation pattern will be described.

There are two modes of chance eye production, for example, "blue" and "red", and it is shown that red has a higher expectation of big hit than blue.

As shown in FIG. 29, for example, in scenario 1, everything from "3 before the change" to "the change" is "blue". This is because the change of the current special symbol (before 4 changes) is completed, and in the next change of special symbols (that is, before 3 changes), the chance eye effect of the "blue" mode is performed, and "2 before change". It is shown that the chance eye effect of the "blue" mode is performed even in "1 before the change", and the chance eye effect of the "blue" mode is also performed in the "correspondence". Further, in the scenario 14, the chance eye effect of the "blue" mode is performed in "1 before the change", and the chance eye effect of the "red" mode is performed in the "relevant change".

As is clear from the figure, when it is judged as a big hit as a result of the preliminary judgment, red is more likely to be selected than blue as the mode of chance eye production, and when it is judged as a loss, it is easier than red. Blue is easier to select. For this reason, as an aspect of the chance eye production, "red" has a higher expectation of big hit than "blue". In addition to these, there may be a plurality of modes as the mode of the chance eye effect.

Further, as in FIG. 26, the table of FIG. 29 is merely an example, and an SP reach chance eye effect scenario table and an N reach chance eye effect scenario table are prepared, and in each table, "blue" is prepared. The ratio of selecting the "red" mode and the "red" mode is different. For example, in the chance eye effect scenario table for N reach, the probability that "blue" is selected is low even in the case of a big hit, for example, "0". The chance eye effect scenario table in which the SPSP reach table, the SP reach table, and the N reach table are combined may be stored in advance in the effect control unit 130. Further, the tables do not have to be divided according to the number of holds, and one table may be prepared regardless of the number of holds.

(Variation start command processing by the effect control unit 130)
Hereinafter, the fluctuation start command processing executed by the effect control unit 130 will be described with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start command processing in step E113 of FIG. 24.

The sub CPU 130a analyzes the received fluctuation start command, and determines the result of the jackpot determination (big hit symbol or lost symbol), the special symbol variation pattern, the current game state, the first hold number U1, and the second hold number U2 ( Step E113-1).

Next, the sub CPU 130a performs the effect mode setting process (step E113-2). Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the normal gaming state, an effect mode corresponding to the probabilistic gaming state, and an effect mode corresponding to the time-saving gaming state. Here, when the effect mode indicating the normal game state is currently set, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect mode change condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, the effect mode is satisfied. Make changes to. The effect mode change condition may be, for example, that the jackpot determination is performed a predetermined number of times after the current effect mode is set, or that a specific effect is performed in the change of the immediately preceding special symbol. It should be noted that each of the plurality of production modes in the same gaming state may be referred to as a "stage". That is, in step E113-2, when the effect mode change condition (stage change condition) is satisfied, any stage is selected and selected from a plurality of stages in the effect mode indicating the normal gaming state. The stage is set. Further, when the current effect mode does not correspond to the current gaming state determined in step E113-1, the sub CPU 130a sets the effect mode corresponding to the gaming state.

Next, the sub CPU 130a determines a variation effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern (step E113-3). The effect control unit 130 stores a variation effect pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern, and determines the variation effect pattern corresponding to the special figure variation pattern. For example, when the special figure variation pattern is the variation pattern OP3, the variation effect pattern including the SPSP reach effect is determined as the variation effect pattern.

Next, the sub CPU 130a determines the advance notice effect based on the variable effect pattern (step E113-4). For example, the notice production includes a dialogue notice suggesting the possibility of a big hit, a step-up notice, a cut-in notice, and the like. In addition, there is a definite production that suggests a big hit in the advance notice production. The sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to perform the advance notice effect based on the special figure variation pattern, and determines which advance notice effect is to be performed at which timing of the variation effect.

Next, the sub CPU 130a determines the start operation effect (step E113-5). The start operation effect is an effect using the effect symbol 701 at the start of the change of the special symbol. The details of the operation effect at the start will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 130a determines the operation effect before stopping (step E113-6). The pre-stop motion effect is an effect using the effect symbol 701 that is performed before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The details of the operation effect before stopping will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon change effect (step E113-7). Here, the hold icon or the icon change effect for changing the icon is set according to the scenario determined in the icon change effect determination process. For example, when it is decided to change the hold icon in the change of the special symbol this time, the sub CPU 130a determines the timing of changing the hold icon, the mode of the icon change suggestion effect performed before changing the hold icon, and the like. Set. As a result, the icon change effect is performed during the change of the special symbol this time. Further, the sub CPU 130a sets an mode of the icon movement display effect for moving and displaying the hold icon. The details of the icon movement display effect will be described later.

In the above, the display mode of the icon is determined in the icon change effect determination process of the start winning command process, but only the display mode of the hold icon is determined in the icon change effect determination process, and the display mode of the icon is determined. May be determined in the process of this step E113-7. That is, the display mode of the icon may be determined at the start of the change of the special symbol related to the icon.

Next, the sub CPU 130a sets the zone effect (step E113-8). Here, the zone effect is controlled according to the scenario determined in the zone effect determination process. For example, when it is decided to start the zone effect or change the mode of the zone effect due to the change of the special symbol this time, the sub CPU 130a has a timing to start the zone effect and a timing to change the mode of the zone effect. , Set the mode of the zone suggestion effect to be performed before starting (or changing) the zone effect. As a result, the zone effect is controlled (started or changed) during the change of the special symbol this time.

In the above, in the zone effect determination process of the start winning command process, the zone effect (presence / absence of zone effect and its mode) in the change of the look-ahead target is determined, but in the zone effect determination process, it is more than the change of the look-ahead target. The zone effect in the previous variation is determined, and the zone effect in the variation of the look-ahead target may be determined in the process of this step E113-8. That is, at the start of the change of the special symbol, whether or not the zone effect is performed in the change and the mode thereof may be determined.

Next, the sub CPU 130a sets the effect effect at the start (step E113-9). Here, when it is determined in the start effect effect determination process to execute the start effect effect in the change of the special symbol this time, the sub CPU 130a sets the start effect effect. As a result, when the change of the special symbol starts, the effect effect at the start is performed.

In the above, in the start effect effect determination process of the start winning command process, the start effect effect (whether or not the start effect effect is executed and its mode) in the fluctuation of the look-ahead target is determined, but at the start. In the effect effect determination process, the start effect effect in the variation before the change of the look-ahead target is determined, and the start effect effect in the change of the look-ahead target may be determined in the process of this step E113-9. That is, at the start of the change of the special symbol, whether or not the start effect effect is performed in the change, and the mode thereof may be determined.

Next, the sub CPU 130a sets the chance eye effect (step E113-10). Here, when it is determined in the chance eye effect determination process to execute the chance eye effect in the change of the special symbol this time, the sub CPU 130a sets the chance eye effect. As a result, a chance eye effect is performed before the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped.

Next, the sub CPU 130a updates the first hold number N1 or the second hold number N2 (step E113-11). As a result, when the variation start command is a command indicating the variation start of the first special symbol, the first hold number N1 is subtracted by "1", and when the command is a command indicating the variation start of the second special symbol, the command is the first. 2 The reserved number N2 is subtracted by "1". The sub CPU 130a confirms the consistency between the number of currently displayed hold icons and the first hold number N1 or the second hold number N2 updated in step S113-11. When inconsistency occurs, control is performed so that the number of hold icons matches the first hold number N1 or the second hold number N2. This will be described in detail later.

Next, the sub CPU 130a sets various commands for executing each set effect (step E113-12). By transmitting various commands to the image / sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, each set effect is executed.

(Timer interrupt processing of image / sound control unit)
Next, the timer interrupt processing performed by the image / sound control unit 140 will be described.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed by the image / sound control unit 140. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the integrated CPU 141a of the image / sound control unit 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 31 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) by interruption.

The control CPU 141a performs a changeover switch process (step E401). Here, when the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk is operated, the volume value and / or the light amount value is adjusted. Specifically, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the changeover switch 22 has been operated based on the signal from the changeover switch 22, and if the changeover switch 22 is operated, the audio output device. The volume value of the effect sound (BGM or sound effect) output from 9, the light amount value of the backlight of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74. Adjust the light intensity value. The volume value and the light intensity value can be set within a predetermined adjustment range (for example, 1 to 5).

Next, the control CPU 141a performs a volume adjustment process (step E402). Here, the volume value of the effect sound output from the voice output device 9 is adjusted according to the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Specifically, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the left button 192A or the right button 194A of the cross key 19 is pressed based on the signal from the cross key detection switch 19a, and the left button 192A or the right button 194A determines whether or not the left button 192A or the right button 194A is pressed. When pressed, the volume value is adjusted within the above-mentioned predetermined adjustment range.

Next, the control CPU 141a performs a light amount adjusting process (step E403). Here, the light intensity value of the backlight of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel are performed according to the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. The light amount value of the lighting device 74 is adjusted. Specifically, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the upper button 191A or the lower button 193A of the cross key 19 is pressed based on the signal from the cross key detection switch 19a, and the upper button 191A or the lower button 193A determines whether or not the upper button 191A or the lower button 193A is pressed. When pressed, the light intensity value is adjusted within the above-mentioned predetermined adjustment range.

At the start and end of the variable effect, the adjustment of the volume value and the light amount value by the cross key 19 is regulated (suppressed). Further, from the time when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the control of the game is started by the main control unit 100 (for example, in the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, the setting confirmation mode, the board unit 500 Even during the initial operation of each drive source), the adjustment of the volume value and the light intensity value by the cross key 19 is restricted.

Next, the control CPU 141a sets the animation (step E404). Specifically, when a command for instructing the execution of various effects is received from the effect control unit 130, the control CPU 141a determines the animation corresponding to the received command.

Next, the control CPU 141a sets the sound (step E405). Specifically, when a command for instructing the execution of various effects is received from the effect control unit 130, the control CPU 141a determines the sound corresponding to the received command.

Next, the control CPU 141a determines whether or not the frame time has elapsed (step E406). Here, the frame time is the time for displaying an image of one frame, for example, 1/30 second. That is, here, it is determined whether or not it is the frame update timing for updating the image displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71.

When the frame time has elapsed (step E406: YES), the control CPU 141a performs drawing control processing (E407). Here, the control CPU 141a causes the VDP 145 to generate an image corresponding to the set animation. This will generate and display the next image of the currently displayed image. By generating and displaying an image of one frame at frame time (for example, 1/30 second) intervals, for example, in the first image display device 70, a state in which the effect symbol 701 fluctuates and a state in which the hold icon moves is displayed. Will be. A specific example of the effect displayed on the first image display device 70 will be described later.

For example, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started in the main control unit 100, the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control unit 100. The effect control unit 130 receives this variation start command, and the variation effect pattern is determined by the variation start command process. Then, a command to start execution of the variation effect is transmitted from the effect control unit 130 to the image / sound control unit 140, and an image is generated by the VDP 145 at the next frame update timing after the command is received. Therefore, the start timing of the variation effect using the effect symbol 701 is later than the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol. Further, the start timing of the effect directly controlled by the effect control unit 130 or the lamp control unit 150 (for example, the display using the sub information display 80) may be different from the start timing of the variable effect using the effect symbol 701. If there is, it may match.

Next, the control CPU 141a performs voice control processing (step E408). As a result, the production sound is output. This is the end of the description of the process shown in FIG.

(Timer interrupt processing of lamp control unit)
Next, the timer interrupt processing performed by the lamp control unit 150 will be described.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed by the lamp control unit 150. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the lamp CPU 150a of the lamp control unit 150 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 32 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) by interruption.

The lamp CPU 150a controls the display of the sub information display 80 (step E501). For example, when the effect control unit 130 receives the variation start command of the first special symbol, the lamp CPU 150a receives a command indicating the variation start from the effect control unit 130. The lamp CPU 150a blinks the LED of the sub-first fluctuation display 81 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 0.5 seconds) in response to the command, thereby displaying the fluctuation using the sub-first fluctuation display 81. I do. After the effect control unit 130 receives the fluctuation start command, the lamp CPU 150a continuously performs the fluctuation display using the sub-first fluctuation display 81. Further, when the effect control unit 130 receives the variation stop command of the first special symbol, the lamp CPU 150a receives a command indicating the variation stop from the effect control unit 130, and the sub-first variation display 81 responds to the command. End the variable display using.

Further, the lamp CPU 150a controls the movable effect device 73 in step E502. The lamp CPU 150a operates the movable effect device 73 at a timing determined by the effect control unit 130.

Further, the lamp CPU 150a controls other devices in step E503. For example, the lamp CPU 150a causes the frame lighting device 10 to emit light in a predetermined manner, causes the panel lighting device 74 to emit light, or operates the button drive device 17b at a timing determined by the effect control unit 130 to produce an effect. The button 17 is operated, and the effect button light emitting LED is made to emit light.

Next, specific examples of initial operation of various drive sources during setting change, RWM clear preparation, setting confirmation, setting change, RWM clear, and setting confirmation will be described.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated while changing settings)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting change will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated while the setting is changed.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON, RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting change mode is started in the main control unit 100. It becomes the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the setting change notification (display of the setting changing screen, setting changing voice "setting is being changed" and initial operation confirmation voice "solenoid operation" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources and that the setting is being changed "Please check" (alternate output) is started. Further, the current set value (here, "4") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time of various drive sources (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, various drives are performed from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The source is repeatedly activated and stopped.

At the timing of T10, if the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are sent. Upon termination, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources is terminated, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. finish. Then, the main control unit 100 shifts from the pre-start state to the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the initial operation of various effect objects (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control unit 130 is started, and the information display is displayed. At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of the various production accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the preparation for clearing RWM will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started in the main control unit 100 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before it is done.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the RWM clear is being prepared is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the RWM clear preparation is being prepared and the RWM clear preparation notification (display of the clear preparation screen, "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and "solenoid operation are confirmed" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources. "Please do" (alternate output of initial operation confirmation voice) is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode are performed. As soon as the notification ends, the operation of the various drive sources stops (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources ends, and the main control unit 100 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. Move to the possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the initial operation of various effect objects (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control unit 130 is started, and the information display is displayed. At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of the various production accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting confirmation will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is started in the main control unit 100 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before the start.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the setting confirmation notification (display of the setting confirmation screen, setting confirmation voice "setting is being confirmed" and initial operation confirmation voice "solenoid operation" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources and that the setting is being confirmed "Please check" (alternate output) is started. Further, the current set value (here, "4") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses from the start of operation of various drive sources, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are completed. At the same time, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources is completed, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is also completed. do. Then, the main control unit 100 shifts from the pre-start state to the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of special symbol hold, display of normal figure hold, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power recovery notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the initial operation of various effect objects (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control unit 130 is started, and the information display is displayed. At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of the various production accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Initial operation of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57). Therefore, the game machine 1 (including the case where only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 are used) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at the game store (including the replacement of the game board 5 only and the board unit 500 only). ), It becomes possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main except for the state confirmation indicator 68. Information display 59 (1st special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display Since 65, the round number display 66, and the right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control unit 100, and various drive sources. It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the setting is being changed and the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is urged. Setting change notification for (RWM clear preparation notification for prompting RWM clear preparation and operation confirmation of various drive sources, setting confirmation notification for setting confirmation and setting confirmation notification for prompting operation confirmation of various drive sources) Therefore, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game clerk) who check the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and check the operation appropriately. It will be possible to do it.

Further, according to the present embodiment, various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated in the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode). It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the set value confirmation operation (RWM clear approval operation, confirmation end operation) is performed and the pre-start state ends, the operation time of various drive sources is immediately before elapse. Since the operation of various drive sources is terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is no longer performed in a game-enabled state, and it may be confused with the operation of various drive sources according to the progress of the game. It is possible to avoid inconvenience.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation is appropriately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is turned off. Since it is left as it is, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the large winning opening LED, and the operation check is appropriate. It will be possible to do it.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the first large winning opening 50 and the like are used. Since the opening signal is not output even though the second big winning opening is open, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being given to the main control unit 100, and the gaming machine 1 It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game collects information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 from the turning on of the power of the gaming machine to the start of the progress control of the game (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control unit 100.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and the convenience of the game store can be ensured.

In this embodiment, in the setting change notification, RWM clear preparation notification, and setting confirmation notification, "during the initial operation of the drive source" or "check the operation of the solenoid" that prompts the visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources. The characters of are not displayed, but such characters may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the progress control of the game is started, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to confirm the lighting. After the RWM clear preparation mode or the setting confirmation mode, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

(Operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 36, various operation timings (initial operation, initial operation, of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500). The movements in the jackpot game operation, the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state, and the auxiliary game operation in the short-time game state) are compared. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an operation comparison at various operation timings of various drive sources.

The one-time drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is longer in the initial operation than in the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state can be performed, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

In addition, the one drive time of the first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation is the first big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening during the jackpot game operation. The value is smaller than the one drive time of the open / close solenoid 57b. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the first special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b.

It should be noted that the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be the same value as or substantially the same (similar) value as the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state. .. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b.

Further, the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b in the initial operation may be the same value as or almost the same (similar) value as the one drive time in the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. .. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the reduced working hours gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b in the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the one drive time in the auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the reduced working hours gaming state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the driving time of the first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation is the same as or almost the same as the one driving time during the jackpot game operation (similar). It may be a value. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b can perform the jackpot game operation, and the accuracy of the operation confirmation is improved. It is possible to make it.

Further, the driving time of the first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b at the time of the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the one driving time at the time of the big hit game operation. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the initial operation whether or not the first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b can perform the jackpot game operation, and the accuracy of the operation confirmation is improved. It is possible to make it.

(Modification example of initial operation of various drive sources)
Hereinafter, variations of the initial operation of various drive sources will be described. This modification differs from the above in that various drive sources are initially operated after the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, and the setting confirmation mode are completed.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is changed will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is changed.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON, RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting change mode is started in the main control unit 100. It becomes the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the above-mentioned setting change notification is started. Further, the current set value (here, "4") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

When the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the right end of the information display 113 is displayed. The set value displayed on the 7-segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources is completed. Please output) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control unit 100 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the initial operation of various effect objects (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, first image display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control unit 130 is started, and the information display is displayed. At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of the various production accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after clearing RWM)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, right-handed display 67), first image display device 70, and information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started in the main control unit 100 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before it is done. At this time, the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification is started.

When the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed at the timing of T2, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. At this time, the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid") for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control unit 100 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the initial operation of various effect objects (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control unit 130 is started, and the information display is displayed. At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of the various production accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after checking the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is confirmed.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. At this time, the result of the game such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48, 1st winning opening opening / closing member 51, 2nd winning opening opening / closing member 57) The first prize opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are in a stopped state.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (first large winning opening 50, second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined manner is turned off, and the main information display 59 (No. 1) is turned off. 1 special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display 65, round number display 66, the right-handed display 67, the status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is ON) is performed when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is started in the main control unit 100 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before the start. At this time, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the setting confirmation notification described above is started. Further, the current set value (here, "4") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

When the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the 7 at the right end of the information display 113 is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification (display of the screen during initial operation, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources is completed. Please output) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (here, 0.512 seconds) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are terminated, and the main control unit 100 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 59 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. It will be started. In addition, the initial operation of various effect objects (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b, second image display device 71, effect button 17) controlled by the effect control unit 130 is started, and the information display is displayed. At 113, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are all lit and the lighting confirmation is started. It should be noted that the initial operation of the various production accessories ends after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 is completed.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (here, 5 seconds) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to this modification, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, first large winning opening opening / closing) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Initial operation of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, first winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57). Therefore, the game machine 1 (including the case where only the game board 5 and the board unit 500 are used) is replaced at the time of shipment from the factory or at the game store (including the replacement of the game board 5 only and the board unit 500 only). ), It becomes possible to easily confirm the operation of the drive source controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main except for the state confirmation indicator 68. Information display 59 (1st special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold display 63, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, normal symbol hold display Since 65, the round number display 66, and the right-handed display 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control unit 100, and various drive sources. It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating various drive sources that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the operator (worker, game shop clerk) who confirms the operation of the game machine 1 that it is the timing to confirm the operation of various drive sources, and to appropriately confirm the operation. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, even if the state is before the start of the game progress control, the result of the game is affected after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed. Since various drive sources for operating the given movable body are initially operated, it is not necessary to check the operation of various drive sources while changing the settings (RWM clear, setting confirmation). , It is possible to properly check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game after the operation standby time has passed after the setting change mode (RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode) is completed. Since the operation is started, it is possible to allow time from the completion of the setting change (setting confirmation) to the operation confirmation of various drive sources, and the operation confirmation should be performed appropriately. Is possible.

Further, according to this modification, whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is after the end of the setting change mode or after the end of the RWM clear preparation mode. Since the same initial operation notification is performed regardless of whether the setting confirmation mode is completed, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified and the development cost of the gaming machine 1 can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the number (shortening the development period, etc.).

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is turned off. Since it is left as it is, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the operation of the first prize opening opening / closing member 51 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the large winning opening LED, and the operation check is appropriate. It will be possible to do it.

Further, according to this modification, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation is appropriately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the first special winning opening opening / closing member 51 and the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the first large winning opening 50 and the like are used. Since the opening signal is not output even though the second big winning opening is open, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being given to the main control unit 100, and the gaming machine 1 It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game collects information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is not displayed on the information display 113 from the turning on of the power of the gaming machine to the start of the progress control of the game (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control unit 100.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the gaming machine is displayed (the display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and it is possible to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, in the setting change mode, the RWM clear preparation mode, and the setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed are displayed. However, by not displaying the performance information, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and the convenience of the game store can be ensured.

Further, according to this modification, since the set value and the performance information of the gaming machine are not displayed on the information display 113 during the initial operation of the various drive sources, the initial operation of the various drive sources can be confirmed. On the other hand, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the employees of the amusement shop, and it is possible to accurately judge the failure of various drive sources.

In this modification, after the progress control of the game is started, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to confirm the lighting. After the RWM clear preparation mode or the setting confirmation mode, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

(Cycle fluctuation of special symbol)
Next, the cycle variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 will be described. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol.

As described above, the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of eight LEDs. By changing the lighting pattern of these eight LEDs at predetermined time intervals, a variable display of a special symbol is performed. In the following, the variable display of the first special symbol will be described, but the same applies to the second special symbol.

Specifically, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, all eight LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40 (a)), the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, and the initial state (that is, that is). In the state where the first special symbol is not variablely displayed and the special game is not performed), the rightmost LED among the eight LEDs is turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (the state where the other LEDs are turned off). FIG. 40 (b). The lighting mode of FIG. 40 (b) shows that the result of the jackpot determination is a loss.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the first and second LEDs from the left of the eight LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40 (c)). This state is maintained for 32 msec from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol.

When 32 ms have passed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the second and third LEDs from the left of the eight LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40 (d)). )). When 32 ms further elapses from the state of FIG. 40 (d), the third and fourth LEDs from the left of the eight LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40 (e)). ). When 32 ms further elapses from the state of FIG. 40 (e), the 4th and 5th LEDs from the left of the 8 LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40 (f)). ). When 32 ms further elapses from the state of FIG. 40 (f), the 5th and 6th LEDs from the left of the 8 LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40 (g)). ). When 32 msec further elapses from the state of FIG. 40 (g), the 6th and 7th LEDs from the left of the 8 LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40 (h)). ). When 32 ms further elapses from the state of FIG. 40 (h), the 7th and 8th LEDs from the left of the 8 LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40 (i)). ). When 32 ms further elapses from the state of FIG. 40 (i), the first and eighth LEDs from the left of the eight LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off (FIG. 40 (j)). ). Then, when 32 msec further elapses from the state of FIG. 40 (j), the state returns to the state of FIG. 40 (c). After that, the lighting modes of FIGS. 40 (c) to 40 (j) are repeated until the fluctuation time of the first special symbol elapses.

Such LED lighting control is performed in the timer interrupt process by the main control unit 100, which is executed every 4 ms. For example, the main control unit 100 increments the counter by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed, and controls to shift the LED to be turned on by one to the right when the value of the counter becomes a multiple of 8. ..

In this way, by changing the lighting mode of the LED every 32 ms, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. The changes in the LEDs from FIGS. 40 (c) to 40 (j) are referred to as cycle fluctuations. The cycle of the cycle fluctuation is 32 ms × 8 = 256 ms. Further, the change in the LED lighting mode in one cycle fluctuation (for example, the change from the state in which the first and second LEDs are lit to the mode in which the second and third LEDs are lit) is referred to as "unit change". There are times when it is said. The cycle of one unit change is 32 ms. The cycle of unit change is not limited to 32 seconds, and may be, for example, 28 msec.

The first special symbol repeats a plurality of cycle fluctuations until the fluctuation time determined based on the result of the jackpot determination elapses. Then, after the fluctuation time elapses after the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, each LED is turned on in a manner indicating a loss or a jackpot based on the result of the jackpot determination.

Here, it is assumed that two LEDs are turned on at the same time in the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol, but the number of LEDs to be turned on during the cycle fluctuation is not limited to this, and for example, one LED is turned on during the cycle fluctuation. , The LED to be turned on may be changed every 32 msec or 28 msec. Further, although the case where a plurality of LEDs are turned on in order from the left in the cycle fluctuation has been described here, the cycle fluctuation may be executed by lighting the plurality of LEDs at random.

(Image displayed on the first image display device 70)
Next, the image displayed on the first image display device 70 will be described. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an effect mode corresponding to the gaming state is set. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, any of the effect modes A to C (stages A to C) is set. Further, the effect mode D is set in the probabilistic game state, and the effect mode E is set in the time-saving game state.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in the effect mode A set in the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 41, a background image is displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70. The background image is displayed during each image displayed on the screen (effect symbol 701, small symbol 702, first hold icon HA, icon TI, first number hold SHA, second number hold SHB, and other variable effects. It is an image that becomes the background of the preview image, etc.), and is an image having a lower display priority than each image. The image displayed on the screen is managed by a plurality of layers, and the background image is drawn on the innermost layer (the layer with the lowest display priority). The background image differs depending on the effect mode. In the effect mode A (stage A), the normal background image A is displayed, in the effect mode B (stage B), the normal background image B is displayed, and in the effect mode C (stage C), the normal background image C is displayed.

The background image operates in a predetermined mode in each effect mode (this is referred to as "background effect"). For example, a character or an object included in the background image may move on the screen, or a part or the whole of the background image may move or rotate in a predetermined direction. This background effect may be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or may be performed based on the result of the preliminary determination, and is performed during the variable display of the special symbol. Further, the background effect may be executed not only during the variable display of the special symbol but also during the stop display. In this case, it operates without being based on the result of the jackpot determination. For example, a background effect in which a predetermined character operates at a predetermined time may be performed.

The effect symbol 701 corresponding to the special symbol is displayed in the substantially central area of the screen of the first image display device 70. The effect symbol 701 is displayed superimposed on the background image (priority over the background image). The effect symbol 701 is composed of three effect symbols 701 (each effect symbol 701 is referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol in order from the left). The effect symbol 701 of 1 is composed of, for example, a numerical image showing numbers from "1" to "9" and a character image corresponding to the numerical image. As the effect symbol 701, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be used. In response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, a plurality of effect symbols 701 start the variable display and stop the variable display of the special symbol. Corresponding to, a plurality of effect symbols 701 are stopped and displayed.

The effect symbol 701 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a mode of notifying the result of the jackpot determination (loss mode, jackpot mode). The jackpot mode is a combination of the same effect symbols 701 such as "777" and "555", and the loss mode is another mode.

The display mode of the effect symbol 701 differs depending on the effect mode. For example, in the effect mode A, the display mode of the character image included in the effect symbol 701 is the first display mode, in the effect mode B is the second display mode, and in the effect mode C, the third display mode is used. .. The characters included in the effect symbol 701 may be different depending on the effect mode.

Although the details will be described later, the effect symbol 701 performs an operation effect at the start for a predetermined time from the start of the change of the special symbol, and after the operation effect at the start, for example, scrolls in the vertical direction (variation display effect). Then, the effect symbol 701 performs a pre-stop operation effect after scrolling, and then stops and displays.

Further, during the variation effect (starting motion effect, scroll variation, etc.) by the effect symbol 701, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, and the like are displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the result of the jackpot determination. And by displaying the image on the second image display device 71, the player's expectation that the jackpot game (special game) is executed is increased.

Further, a small symbol 702 is displayed in the lower left area of the screen. The small symbol 702 is a kind of effect symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (or the second special symbol), and is composed of three small symbols 701 (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol). The small symbol 702 is a symbol smaller than the effect symbol 701, and is composed of a numerical image showing the numbers from "1" to "9" similar to the effect symbol 701, but the character image is formed like the effect symbol 701. Not included. The small symbol 702 is variablely displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol, and is stopped and displayed according to the stop display of the special symbol. The display mode of the small symbol 702 is the same in any of the effect modes A to C. The display mode of the small symbol 702 may be the same regardless of the gaming state, or may be different depending on the gaming state.

Further, a first hold icon display area 703A is provided in the lower area on the left side of the screen. In the first hold icon display area 703A, the number of first hold icons HA corresponding to the first hold number (U1) of the first special symbol is displayed. The first hold icon display area 703A is divided into four areas. The first hold icon display area 703A has a first area for displaying the rightmost first hold icon HA1, a second area for displaying the first hold icon HA2 second from the right, and 3 from the right. It is composed of a third area for displaying the second first hold icon HA3 and a fourth area for displaying the fourth hold icon HA4 from the right.

The icon display area 704 is provided on the right side of the first hold icon display area 703A. While the special symbol is changing, the icon TI is displayed in the icon display area 704. The icon TI has the same display mode (similar shape) as the first hold icon HA, but the icon TI is a larger image than the first hold icon HA.

Each first hold icon HA is an image showing the hold of the right of the variable display of the first special symbol (big hit determination based on the winning of the first starting port 45). The icon TI is an image showing a change in the current special symbol (also referred to as “the change”). The first hold icon HA is digested in order from the side closest to the icon display area 704. Specifically, when the change of the current special symbol ends, the first hold icon HA1 displayed in the first area of the first hold icon display area 703A moves to the icon display area 704 and is displayed as the icon TI. Will be done. At the same time as the movement of the first holding icon HA1 to the icon display area 704, the first holding icons HA2 to 4 are shifted to the right area by one, and are displayed as the first holding icons HA1 to 3.

The first hold icon HA and the icon TI are displayed in different display modes depending on the effect mode. For example, in the effect mode A, a diamond-shaped image is displayed as the first hold icon HA and the icon TI. Further, in the effect mode B, a fan-shaped image is displayed as the first hold icon HA and the icon TI. Further, in the effect mode C, a rectangular image is displayed as the first hold icon HA and the icon TI.

Further, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI operate in a predetermined display mode during the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. Specifically, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI operate at a fixed cycle. In the following, the operation of the first hold icon HA or the icon TI may be referred to as “periodic operation”. The first hold icon HA and the icon TI perform periodic operation in the same or almost the same manner. The mode of the periodic operation differs depending on the effect mode.

For example, in the effect mode A, the diamond-shaped first hold icon HA and the icon TI are tilted 25 degrees to the right from the first state tilted 25 degrees to the left during the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. The first periodic operation of shifting to the second state over 1 second and returning to the first state over 1 second is repeated. That is, in the effect mode A, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI perform the first periodic operation in a cycle of 2 seconds. Further, in the effect mode B, the fan-shaped first hold icon HA and the icon TI perform a second periodic operation different from the first periodic operation during the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. For example, the fan-shaped first hold icon HA and the icon TI repeat the enlarged state and the reduced state at a fixed cycle (the same or different cycle as when the effect mode A is set) as the second periodic operation. Further, in the effect mode C, the square first hold icon HA and the icon TI perform a third cycle operation (for example, a rotation operation) in a fixed cycle (the same or different cycle as when the effect mode A is set). conduct.

Further, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI can be changed from the normal mode (white) to a special mode (blue, red, gold, rainbow color) different from the normal mode in any of the effect modes A to C. be. The special aspect indicates that the jackpot expectation is higher than that of the normal aspect, and indicates that the expectation is higher in the order of blue, red, gold, and rainbow. The first hold icon HA and the icon TI perform periodic operations in the same manner regardless of whether they are displayed in the normal mode or the special mode. In addition, the mode of the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA and the icon TI may be different depending on whether the icon is displayed in the special mode or the normal mode. Further, the mode of the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA and the icon TI may be different depending on whether it is blue, red, gold, or rainbow color among the plurality of special modes. For example, when the icon is blue, the icon performs periodic operation in the first aspect, and when the icon is red, the movement is larger (or the operation speed is faster) than in the first aspect, and the icon is displayed in the second aspect. May perform periodic operation. In addition, there may be a change suggestion mode (for example, a blinking mode) that suggests that the first hold icon HA or the icon TI may change to a special mode. When the first hold icon HA or the icon TI is displayed in the change suggestion mode, the same periodic operation as in the normal mode may be performed, or a different periodic operation may be performed. Further, when the first hold icon HA or the icon TI is displayed in the change suggestion mode, the same periodic operation as in the special mode may be performed, or a different periodic operation may be performed.

Further, in the lower right area of the screen, the first number holding SHA indicating the number of holdings of the first holding number (U1) indicating the number of holdings of the variation display of the first special symbol and the holding of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol are held. The second number hold SHB, which represents the number of the second hold number (U2) indicating the number, is displayed. The display mode of the first number holding SHA and the second number holding SHB is the same in any effect mode, and is the same in any gaming state.

The icon display area 704 is formed on a predetermined pedestal image. The first hold icon display area 703 may also be formed on a predetermined pedestal image.

Further, in the normal gaming state, basically, the game ball does not win in the second start opening 47, but when the game ball wins in the second start opening 47, the area different from the first hold icon display area 703A. (For example, the area on the right side of the icon display area 704) displays the second hold icon HB indicating the hold of the variation display of the second special symbol (big hit determination based on the winning of the second start port 47). Up to four second hold icons HB are displayed according to the second hold number (U2).

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 701 is variablely displayed on the first image display device 70, but the effect symbol 701 is displayed on either one or both of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. Fluctuation display may be performed. Further, the first image display device 70 may display the variation of the effect symbol 701, and the second image display device 71 may display the variation of the small symbol 702. Further, the effect symbol 701 and the small symbol 702 are variablely displayed on the first image display device 70, and the first hold icon HA, the second hold icon HB, and the hold icon TI are displayed on the second image display device 71. You may.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 in the effect mode D set in the probabilistic gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the probabilistic gaming state, the effect mode D is set, and the background image (probability change background image) for the effect mode D is displayed. Further, as the effect symbol 701, an effect symbol 701 having an aspect different from that of the effect symbol in the normal gaming state is displayed. Specifically, the effect symbol 701 in the probabilistic gaming state includes a numerical image showing the numbers from "1" to "9" and does not include a character image.

Further, a small symbol 702 is displayed in the lower left area of the screen. The display mode and display position of the small symbol 702 in the effect mode D (probability variation game state) are the same as those in the effect modes A to C (normal game state). The display mode and display position of the small symbol 702 may be different between the normal game state and the probabilistic game state, the display mode may be the same and the display position may be different, and the display position may be the same and the display mode may be different. It may be different.

Further, in the effect mode D, the second hold icon display area 703B for displaying the number of the second hold icon HB corresponding to the second hold number (U2) of the second special symbol is in the lower area on the right side of the screen. It will be provided. On the left side of the second hold icon display area 703B, the icon display area 704 for displaying the icon TI is provided.

The second hold icon HB is an image showing the hold of the right of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit determination based on the winning of the second starting port 47), and a maximum of four (HB1 to HB4) are displayed. .. Like the first hold icon HA, the second hold icon HB is digested in order from the side closest to the icon display area 704. Specifically, when the change of the current special symbol is completed, the leftmost second hold icon HB1 moves to the icon display area 704 and is displayed as the icon TI. At the same time as the second hold icon HB1 is moved to the icon display area 704, the second hold icons HB2 to 4 are shifted to the left and displayed as the second hold icons HB1 to 3.

Further, in the lower right area of the screen, the first number holding SHA and the second number holding SSHB are displayed. The display mode and display position of the first number holding SHA and the second number holding SHB are the same as in the normal gaming state. The display mode and / or display position of the first number holding SHA and the second number holding SHB may be different between the normal gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state.

Although not shown, the effect mode E is set in the short-time game state. In the effect mode E, although the background image is different from that in the probabilistic gaming state, the effect symbol 701, the small symbol 702, the second hold icon HB, the icon TI, the first number hold SHA, and the second number hold SHB are probable changes. It is the same as in the game state. In addition, the display mode and / or the display position of any one of these may be different between the time-saving gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state. For example, the display mode and / or the display position of the effect symbol 701 may be different between the time-saving game state and the probabilistic game state, and the display mode and the display position of the small symbol 702 may be the same.

(Direction accompanying the variable display of special symbols)
Next, the effect associated with the variable display of the special symbol will be described. 43 and 44 are diagrams showing a timing chart showing an example of the effect from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the first special symbol when it is determined that the jackpot is lost in the jackpot determination in the normal gaming state. 43 and 44 will explain the effect when the normal loss variation is performed in the normal gaming state. 45 to 49 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at each timing of FIGS. 43 and 44.

As shown in FIG. 43, before the time t0, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (and the second special symbol display 61), and the first special symbol hold display 63 indicates. The first hold number U1 (and the second hold number U2 indicated by the second special symbol hold indicator 64) is zero (FIG. 45 (a)). Specifically, in the first special symbol display 60, only the rightmost LED among the eight LEDs is lit, and the loss is notified. Further, the two LEDs of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 are turned off. Further, the LED of the sub first variable indicator 81 is turned off, and the two LEDs of the sub first hold indicator 83 are also turned off. Further, in the first image display device 70, the customer waiting effect is not performed, and the effect symbol 701 and the small symbol 702 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, "144") superimposing on the background image. Has been done. Further, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are not displayed, and the first number hold SHA and the second number hold SHB are "0". Further, BGM is not output from the speaker. In addition, a background effect is usually performed in which the background image operates in a predetermined mode.

When the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 at time t0, the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is performed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), one of the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display 60 is one from the left until 32 msec has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. The second and second LEDs are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. After the time t0, the first special symbol repeats the cycle variation described above until the variation time of the special symbol set by the variation pattern setting process elapses. Further, at time t0, the LED of the sub-first variation display 81 remains off, and the effect symbol 701 and the small symbol 702 also remain stopped and displayed. Also, the BGM remains non-output. On the other hand, the background production will continue.

Next, at time t1, the effect control unit 130 receives a variation start command from the main control unit 100, and the effect is started in response to the reception of this variation start command (FIG. 45 (c)). Specifically, by the time the first cycle variation of the first special symbol is completed, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 is started. Further, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702 and the variation display (blinking display) of the sub first variation display 81 are started. In addition, an icon additional display effect in which the first hold icon HA1 is additionally displayed is performed. Further, the output of BGM is usually started from the speaker. Normally, the type of BGM differs depending on the production mode. At the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol 701, an effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation of the jackpot may be output based on the result of the jackpot determination. Further, the background effect is performed at time t1, and the background effect is continued thereafter.

More specifically, in the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701, the effect symbol 701 operates in a predetermined mode. For example, each effect symbol 701 starts moving to the upper part of the screen, and the character image in the effect symbol 701 operates. This start operation effect is performed over a predetermined time (for example, 30 to 45 frame time; 1 to 1.5 seconds), and is performed over a plurality of cycle fluctuations of the special symbol. Specifically, the image / sound control unit 140 stores an animation moving image (data showing an operation pattern at the start of fluctuation) composed of a plurality of frames for operating the effect symbol 701 in a predetermined operation pattern. By playing the animation movie, the operation effect at the start is performed. In FIG. 45 (c), an image at the moment when each effect symbol 701 starts operation is displayed.

There are a plurality of modes in the start motion effect, and animation moving images (data showing the motion pattern at the start of fluctuation) corresponding to each mode are stored in advance in the gaming machine 1 (specifically, the image / sound control unit 140). There is. For example, as a plurality of modes of the operation effect at the start, there is an aspect in which the effect symbol 701 of 1 is moved upward by a predetermined distance, then temporarily stopped, and then moved while accelerating downward. The execution time (effect time) may be different or the same depending on each aspect of the start operation effect. An example of a plurality of aspects of the start operation effect will be described later.

In some cases, the three effect symbols 701 on the left, middle, and right perform the start operation effect in the same manner, and in the case where the three effect symbols 701 on the left, middle, and right perform the start operation effect in different modes. There may be. Further, the three effect symbols 701 may each perform the start operation effect at the same timing, or may perform the start operation effect at different timings. Here, an example of an effect in which the three effect symbols 701 perform an operation effect at the start at the same timing is shown.

The mode of the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 may differ depending on the type of the effect symbol 701 (any of "1" to "9"), may differ depending on the effect mode, and may be a big hit. It may be different depending on the degree of expectation (variation pattern of the special symbol). In addition, the content of the subsequent effect may be suggested depending on the mode of the operation effect at the start. For example, a particular aspect of the start motion effect may suggest that the reach effect is likely to follow.

In the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701, unlike the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701 described later, the character images and numbers in the effect symbol 701 are displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to see. Specifically, in the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701, the effect symbol 701 is translucent and is moved and displayed at high speed, so that the player can produce any number from "1" to "9". It is difficult to recognize whether the symbol 701 is currently displayed. On the other hand, in the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701, the effect symbol 701 is displayed in a normal mode that is not translucent, and is not moved and displayed at high speed. Therefore, the player can use "1" to "9". It is possible to easily recognize which number of the effect symbol 701 is operating.

The variable display effect using the small symbol 702 is an effect in which the three small symbols on the left, middle, and right are scrolled from top to bottom. In each of the left, middle, and right columns, the small symbols "1" to "9" repeat variable display at high speed in a predetermined cycle. The predetermined cycle of this small symbol is different from the cycle of the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA and the icon TI. The predetermined cycle of the small symbol may be shorter or longer than the cycle of the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA and the icon TI. During the variable display effect of the small symbols 704, each small symbol is displayed semi-transparently and moves at high speed, so that it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of each small symbol. At the timing when the variation display effect using the small symbol 702 is started, the small symbol 702 shifts from the stopped display state to the scroll display state (high-speed fluctuation state) as shown in FIG. 45 (c). ..

Further, at time t1, the icon additional display effect for additionally displaying the first hold icon HA1 is started. The icon additional display effect is an animation movie performed over a plurality of frame times (for example, 10 frame time; 1/3 second) shorter than the start operation effect. There are a plurality of modes in the icon additional display effect. For example, in the first aspect of the icon additional display effect, the first hold icon HA1 having a transparency of 50% is displayed at the start of display, the transparency decreases with the passage of time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 frame time). After), the first hold icon HA1 with 0% transparency (that is, the normal first hold icon HA1) is displayed. Further, in the second aspect of the icon additional display effect, a relatively small first hold icon HA1 is displayed at the start of display, is enlarged with the passage of time, and is usually after a predetermined time (for example, after 10 frames). The first hold icon HA1 of the size of is displayed. Which of the plurality of modes to execute the icon additional display effect may be determined according to the effect mode, or may be determined by lottery. During the icon additional display effect, the icon may operate in a predetermined operation mode different from the above-mentioned periodic operation. For example, when the first hold icon HA1 appears while rotating, the additional display effect of the first hold icon HA1 is performed, and after the additional display effect of the first hold icon HA1 is completed, the first hold icon HA1 becomes a predetermined state. A periodic operation that swings in a cycle may be performed.

In addition to the icon addition display effect, a winning sound corresponding to the winning at the starting port of the game ball may be output. The winning sound may be output according to the result of the jackpot determination or the preliminary determination, and the winning sound may indicate the degree of expectation of the jackpot.

Further, at time t1, the fluctuation display (LED blinking display) using the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. The circles filled with diagonal lines in FIG. 45 (c) represent the blinking display of the LED. The cycle of the blinking display of the sub-first variation indicator 81 is shorter than the cycle of the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA. Further, at time t1, the LED on the left side of the sub-first hold indicator 83 lights up. Further, the value indicated by the first digit holding SHA remains "0", and the value indicated by the second digit holding SHB also remains "0".

Next, at time t2 (for example, during the second cycle fluctuation of the first special symbol), the additional display animation of the first hold icon HA1 ends, the additional display of the first hold icon HA1 is completed, and the addition thereof is completed. The icon movement display effect in which the displayed first hold icon HA1 moves from the first area of the first hold icon display area 703A to the icon display area 704 is started (FIG. 45 (d)). The icon movement display effect is an animation moving image performed over a plurality of frame times (for example, 15 frame times; 0.5 seconds).

It should be noted that there are a plurality of modes in the icon movement display effect. Specifically, the mode of the icon movement display effect is determined according to the effect mode. The degree of expectation of a big hit may be suggested depending on the mode of the icon movement display effect. For example, when a specific first hold icon HA performs an icon movement display effect in a specific mode, even if there is a high possibility that the change of the special symbol corresponding to the specific first hold icon HA will be a big hit. good. In addition, when a plurality of first hold icon HAs perform an icon movement display effect in a specific mode, a big hit is made in the change of the special symbol corresponding to any one of the plurality of first hold icon HAs. It may be shown that there is a high possibility that.

Further, at the time t2, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 is continued, each effect symbol 701 is moved above the time t1, and the character image in the effect symbol 701 is further operated. In addition, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702 and the variation display (LED blinking display) using the sub-first variation display 81 will be continued. On the other hand, at time t2, the LED on the left side of the sub first hold indicator 83 is turned off. That is, the LED on the left side of the sub first hold indicator 83 turns on when the display of the first hold icon HA1 starts, and turns off when the movement of the first hold icon HA1 to the icon TI starts. The LED on the left side of the sub-first hold indicator 83 may be lit until the first hold icon HA1 is displayed as the icon TI (time t1 to t3).

At times t2 to t3, as shown in FIG. 45 (e), the effect symbol 701 moves further upward. Further, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702 and the variation display using the sub-first variation display 81 are continued. In addition, the icon movement display effect is continuously performed, and the state in which the first hold icon HA1 becomes semi-transparent and moves is displayed.

Next, at time t3, the icon movement display effect ends, and the movement of the first hold icon HA1 to the icon display area 704 ends (FIG. 45 (f)). As a result, the first hold icon HA1 is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the icon TI is enlarged and displayed more than the first hold icon HA1. Specifically, the first hold icon HA1 is gradually enlarged as it moves toward the icon display area 704, and is displayed in the size of the icon TI when it is displayed in the icon display area 704. .. At time t3, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 continues, and the effect symbol 701 moves further upward. Further, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702 and the variation display using the sub-first variation display 81 are also continued.

Here, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 704 performs a predetermined periodic operation in a fixed cycle (for example, a 2-second cycle). Specifically, animation (for example, an animation composed of 60 frames) data for the periodic operation of the icon TI is stored in the gaming machine 1, and this animation is repeatedly played while the icon TI is displayed. To. That is, when the last frame of the animation for the periodic operation of the icon TI is displayed, the display is started again from the first frame (the beginning). Similarly, for the hold icon HA, animation data for the periodic operation of the hold icon HA is stored in advance in the gaming machine 1. In the present embodiment, the periodic operation of the icon TI and the periodic operation of the hold icon HA are the same operations. When one or a plurality of first hold icon HAs and the icon TI are displayed at the same time, these icons (a plurality of first hold icon HAs and the icon TI) perform periodic operations in synchronization with each other.

The animation data for the periodic operation of the icon TI and the animation data for the periodic operation of the hold icon HA may be the same data or different data. Further, the mode of the periodic operation differs depending on the set effect mode.

While the first hold icon HA1 is moved and displayed (time t2 to t3), the first hold icon HA1 performs the same periodic operation. Further, the first hold icon HA1 performs the same periodic operation even at the time when it is additionally displayed (time t1 to t2). It should be noted that the first hold icon HA does not have to perform a predetermined periodic operation while the movement is displayed (during the execution of the icon movement display effect). That is, at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the first hold icon HA may temporarily stop the periodic operation. In this case, the first hold icon HA moves to the right area by the icon movement display effect, and then starts the periodic operation from the beginning (from the first state). Further, while the first hold icon HA is additionally displayed (during the execution of the icon additional display effect), the first hold icon HA to be additionally displayed does not have to perform the periodic operation.

At times t3 to t4, as shown in FIG. 46 (g), the start operation effect of the effect symbol 701 is continuously executed. Specifically, the effect symbol 701 reverses from the upward movement and gradually accelerates downward. Further, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702 and the variation display using the sub-first variation display 81 are continued. Further, the icon TI continues a predetermined periodic operation.

Next, at time t4, the operation effect at the start of the effect symbol 701 ends, and the variable display effect using the three effect symbols 701 is started (FIG. 46 (h)). In the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701, the effect symbol 701 is displayed semi-transparently and scrolled at high speed. Specifically, in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, a symbol sequence in which a plurality of effect symbols 701 including the numbers "1" to "9" are arranged in the vertical direction is directed downward at high speed. It is moved and displayed. The image / sound control unit 140 stores an animation moving image (data showing an operation pattern during variable display) for a variable display effect (scroll display) of the effect symbol 701, and reproduces an animation corresponding to the motion effect at the start. When is finished, the animation for the variable display effect starts to be played. Further, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702 and the variation display using the sub-first variation display 81 are continued. Further, the icon TI continues a predetermined periodic operation.

There are a plurality of modes in the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701, and animation moving images (data showing an operation pattern during variable display) corresponding to each aspect are stored in advance. For example, as a plurality of modes of the variable display effect, there is an mode in which a plurality of types of effect symbols 701 (effect symbols "1" to "9") arranged in the vertical direction are moved and displayed at high speed from the upper side to the lower side. An example of a plurality of modes of the variable display effect of the effect symbol 701 will be described later.

On the other hand, there is only one aspect in the variable display effect using the small symbol 702. In the variable display effect using the small symbols 702, the symbol rows in which the small symbols 702 of "1" to "9" are arranged in the vertical direction are moved downward at high speed in each of the left, middle, and right areas. To. Further, there is only one mode of variation display using the sub-first variation indicator 81. In the fluctuation display using the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the LED blinks at a predetermined time interval (for example, 0.5 second interval).

It should be noted that the variable display effect using the small symbol 702 may have a plurality of modes, and the variable display using the sub-first variable display 81 may also have a plurality of modes. In this case, the number of variations display effects using the effect symbol 701 is larger than the number of variations display effects using the small symbol 702 and the variation display mode using the sub-first variation display 81.

The left, middle, and right three effect symbols 701 each perform a variable display effect in the same manner. note that. There may be cases where the three effect symbols 701 on the left, middle, and right perform variable display effects in different modes.

Further, the mode of the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701 may differ depending on the type of the effect symbol 701 (any of "1" to "9"), or may differ depending on the effect mode, and a big hit expectation. It may be different depending on the degree (variation pattern of the special symbol).

When the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 at time t5, the LED on the left side of the two LEDs of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 lights up (FIG. 46 (i)). As a result, it is notified that the first reserved number U1 has become "1" (that is, one right of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol has been reserved). Even at time t5, the variation display effect using the effect symbol 701, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702, and the variation display using the sub-first variation display 81 are continued. Further, the icon TI continues a predetermined periodic operation.

Next, at time t6, in response to the effect control unit 130 receiving the start winning command from the main control unit 100, the LED on the left side of the sub first hold indicator 83 lights up, and the first number hold SHA is set. It increases from "0" to "1" (FIG. 46 (j)). The increase of the first digit hold SHA from "0" to "1" takes place in one frame time. That is, at the next frame update timing after the effect control unit 130 receives the start winning command, the first digit hold SHA is updated from "0" to "1".

Further, at time t6, the icon addition display effect of the first hold icon HA1 is started. As a result, the additional display animation of the first hold icon HA1 is displayed, and the first hold icon HA1 is additionally displayed over a plurality of frame times (for example, 10 frame time; 0.33 seconds) (for example, half). A state of changing from a transparent mode to a non-translucent normal mode) is displayed. A winning sound may be output along with this icon additional display effect.

From time t6 to t7, the variation display effect using the effect symbol 701, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702, and the variation display using the sub-first variation display 81 are continued. Further, the first hold icon HA1 is continuously displayed after being additionally displayed by the icon addition display effect. Further, the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI perform a predetermined periodic operation in synchronization with each other (FIG. 46 (k)).

Here, the game ball can win a prize in the first starting port 45 at an arbitrary timing while the icon TI is performing a predetermined periodic operation. Even if the first hold icon HA1 is additionally displayed at any timing while the icon TI is performing a predetermined cycle operation, the first hold icon HA1 after the additional display is synchronized with the icon TI and is designated. Performs periodic operation. That is, when the icon TI is in the first state, the first hold icon HA1 is also in the first state, and when the icon TI is in the second state, the first hold icon HA1 is also in the second state. The same applies when the first hold icon HA2-4 is additionally displayed. That is, each of the first hold icon HA and the icon TI performs periodic operation in synchronization with each other regardless of the timing of additional display. In other words, regardless of the timing at which the game ball wins the first starting port 45, each first hold icon HA and the icon TI perform periodic operations in synchronization with each other.

Any method may be used to synchronize the first hold icon HA and the icon TI. For example, when the icon additional display effect of the first hold icon HA1 is started when the icon TI is tilted 25 degrees to the right by a predetermined periodic operation (FIG. 46 (j)), the first hold icon HA1 At the start of the additional display of, the first hold icon HA1 may be displayed in a state of being tilted 25 degrees to the right. Specifically, at the time when the additional display of the first hold icon HA1 is started, it is determined which frame of the animation for the periodic operation of the icon TI is displayed, and the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA1 is started. Start playing the animation for the same frame. After that, by displaying the two animations one frame at a time at the frame update timing, the icon TI and the first hold icon HA1 perform a predetermined periodic operation in synchronization with each other. Even during the additional display of the first hold icon HA1, the first hold icon HA1 performs periodic operation in synchronization with the icon TI. The animation for the icon additional display effect may be a part of the animation for the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA1.

Further, after the additional display of the first hold icon HA1 is completed by the icon additional display effect, the first hold icon HA1 may start the periodic operation in synchronization with the periodic operation of the icon TI. In this case, during the icon additional display effect of the first hold icon HA1, the first hold icon HA1 may not perform the periodic operation, or may perform the periodic operation without synchronizing with the icon TI. .. For example, when the additional display of the first hold icon HA1 is completed by the icon additional display effect, it is determined which frame of the animation for the periodic operation of the icon TI is displayed, and the first hold icon HA1 is displayed. Playback of the animation for periodic motion may start from the same frame. After that, by playing back the two animations according to the passage of time, the icon TI and the first hold icon HA1 perform a predetermined periodic operation in synchronization with each other.

Further, after the additional display of the first hold icon HA1 is completed by the icon additional display effect, the first hold icon HA1 is made to perform the periodic operation until the last frame of the animation for the periodic operation of the icon TI is displayed. Instead, when the animation for the periodic operation of the icon TI is reproduced from the beginning, the animation for the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA1 may be started from the beginning. As a result, thereafter, the icon TI and the first hold icon HA1 perform a predetermined periodic operation in synchronization with each other.

Next, at the time point t7, for example, the left effect symbol 701 (left symbol) out of the three effect symbols 701 starts the pre-stop operation effect (FIG. 46 (l)). At this point, the right symbol and the middle symbol continue the variable display effect. Further, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702 and the variation display using the sub-first variation display 81 are also continued. Specifically, all three small symbols 702 continue the variable display effect. Further, the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI continue a predetermined periodic operation in synchronization with each other (FIG. 46 (l)).

Here, the pre-stop operation effect is after the variable display effect (scroll display) of the effect symbol 701 is performed, and before the effect symbol 701 is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped or main stopped). It is an effect of operating 701 in a predetermined mode. In the pre-stop motion effect, the effect symbol 701 is displayed in a normal mode that is not translucent, and moves slowly from the upper side to the lower side of the screen, for example. Further, the character image in the effect symbol 701 operates in a predetermined mode. Since the effect symbol 701 is displayed in a normal mode that is not translucent and moves at a relatively slow speed, the player can perform the pre-stop motion effect of any of the effect symbols "1" to "9". You can easily recognize whether it is. In addition, since the character image in the effect symbol 701 operates, the interest is improved.

The "temporary stop" of the effect symbol 701 is a state in which the effect symbol 701 slightly fluctuates due to, for example, a small swing (sway) or a small deformation in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. Is not completely stopped. On the other hand, the "main stop" of the effect symbol 701 is a state in which the effect symbol 701 is completely stopped.

The pre-stop motion effect using the effect symbol 701 has a plurality of modes, and animation moving images (data showing the motion pattern before the variable stop) corresponding to each mode are stored in advance. For example, there is an embodiment in which the character waving his / her hand while the effect symbol 701 slowly moves from top to bottom and stops at a predetermined position. Depending on each aspect, the execution time (effect time) may be different or the same.

In some cases, the three effect symbols 701 on the left, middle, and right perform the pre-stop operation effect in the same manner, and in the case, the three effect symbols 701 on the left, middle, and right perform the pre-stop operation effect in different modes. There is also. Further, the three effect symbols 701 may each perform the pre-stop operation effect at the same timing, or may perform the pre-stop operation effect at different timings. Here, an example of an effect in which the three effect symbols 701 perform the pre-stop operation effect at different timings is shown.

The mode of the pre-stop operation effect may differ depending on the type of the effect symbol 701, may differ depending on the effect mode, or may differ depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit (variation pattern of the special symbol).

Here, the combination of the start operation effect, the variable display effect, and the pre-stop operation effect using the effect symbol 701 is determined according to the pattern data stored in advance. For example, in the variation effect based on the first pattern data, after the start operation effect of the first aspect is performed, the variation display effect of the first aspect is performed, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first aspect is performed. The operation effect before stopping is performed. Pattern data that defines the flow of such a series of effects is stored in advance. Therefore, for example, after the start operation effect of the first aspect, the variable display effect of the first aspect or the second aspect is performed, but the variable display effect of the third aspect is not performed. It has become. The same applies to the relationship between the variable display effect and the pre-stop operation effect. That is, after the variable display effect of the first aspect, the pre-stop operation effect of the first aspect or the second aspect is performed, but the pre-stop operation effect of the third aspect is not performed. There is. An example of a series of start operation effect, variable display effect, and pre-stop operation effect using the effect symbol 701 will be described later.

In this way, by storing in advance the pattern data in which the combination of the start operation effect, the variable display effect, and the pre-stop operation effect using the effect symbol 701 is stored, the start operation effect and the variable display using the effect symbol 701 are stored in advance. It is possible to perform the production and the operation production before stopping in order without any discomfort. It should be noted that, instead of selecting the start operation effect, the variation display effect, and the pre-stop operation effect using such pattern data, for example, by lottery using random numbers, any one of a plurality of aspects can be selected. You may select the start operation effect, the variable display effect, and the pre-stop operation effect. In this case, the combination of specific aspects may not be selected by kinsoku shori. For example, the combination of the start operation effect of the first aspect, the variable display effect of the second aspect, and the pre-stop operation effect of the third aspect may not be selected by the prohibition processing.

During the time t7 to t8, the pre-stop operation effect by the left symbol is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) (FIG. 47 (m)), and at the time t8, the left symbol temporarily stops (FIG. 47 (n)). .. When the left symbol temporarily stops, the effect may be added to the left symbol for a moment (for example, 0.5 seconds) as shown in FIG. 47 (n). This effect is an image different from the effect image in the effect effect at the start, and is an image that emphasizes the effect symbol 701. From time t7 to t8, the right symbol and the middle symbol continue the variable display effect, and the variable display effect using the small symbol 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable indicator 81 are also continued. Further, the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI continue a predetermined periodic operation in synchronization with each other.

After that, at time t9, the pre-stop operation effect by the right symbol is started (FIG. 47 (o)). The pre-stop operation effect by the right symbol may be the same mode as the pre-stop operation effect by the left symbol, or may be a different aspect. While the pre-stop operation effect by the right symbol is being executed (time t9 to t10), the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is performing a variable display effect (FIG. 47 (p)). Further, during this period, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702 and the variation display using the sub-first variation display 81 are continued, and the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI continue the predetermined periodic operation.

Then, at time t10, the right symbol temporarily stops (FIG. 47 (q)). When the right symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect may be added to the right symbol for a moment as in the case of the temporary stop of the left symbol. Even at time t10, the medium symbol continues the variable display effect, and the variable display effect using the small symbol 702 and the variable display using the sub-first variable indicator 81 are also continued. Further, the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI continue a predetermined periodic operation.

Next, at time t11, the pre-stop operation effect by the middle symbol is started (FIG. 47 (r)). The pre-stop motion effect by the middle symbol may be the same mode as the pre-stop motion effect by the left symbol and the right symbol, or may be a different aspect. While the pre-stop operation effect by the middle symbol is being executed (time t11 to t12), the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped (FIG. 48 (s)). Further, during this period, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702 and the variation display using the sub-first variation display 81 are continued, and the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI continue the predetermined periodic operation. ..

Then, at time t12, the middle symbol temporarily stops, and the three effect symbols 701 temporarily stop (FIG. 48 (t)). When the middle symbol temporarily stops, an effect may be added to the middle symbol for a moment. Further, no effect is added when each of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol is temporarily stopped, and when the three effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped (that is, the third effect symbol 701 is temporarily stopped). In some cases), an effect may be added to each of the three effect symbols 701. At time t12, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702 and the variation display using the sub-first variation display 81 are also continued. Further, the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI continue a predetermined periodic operation.

At time t13 after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the temporary stop of the three effect symbols 701, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the manner of loss on the first special symbol display 60 (FIG. 48 (FIG. 48). u)). At this time t13, the temporary stop of the three effect symbols 701, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702, and the variation display using the first variation indicator 81 continue. Further, the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI also continue the predetermined periodic operation.

Next, at time t14, in response to the effect control unit 130 receiving the fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 100, the three effect symbols 701 are finally stopped and the small symbols 702 are stopped and displayed (FIG. 48). (V)). That is, the three small symbols 702 stop and display from the state in which the fluctuation display (high-speed fluctuation) is performed, without going through the stop operation effect such as the effect symbol 701. Further, when the LED of the sub first variation display 81 is turned off, the stop display using the sub first variation indicator 81 is performed.

At the timing when the main stop of the three effect symbols 701, the stop display of the small symbol 702, and the stop display of the sub-first variation display 81 are performed (or after these stop displays), the icon TI The extinction production is started. Here, the effect of extinguishing the icon TI is an animation performed over a plurality of frames (for example, 10 frames), and is an effect of gradually extinguishing the icon TI. In this extinction effect, for example, the transparency of the icon TI gradually increases, and the icon TI disappears (erases) (that is, is hidden) after a predetermined time (for example, 0.4 seconds) elapses. As another aspect of the effect of extinguishing the icon TI, the size of the icon TI may be gradually reduced to be extinguished after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Next, at time t15, the icon TI disappears completely when the effect of extinguishing the icon TI ends (FIG. 48 (w)). Even during this time t14 to t15, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, even during the execution of the disappearance effect of the icon TI, the icon TI and the first hold icon HA continue the periodic operation. Further, even when the extinction effect of the icon TI is completed, the first hold icon HA continues the periodic operation. During the execution of the disappearance effect of the icon TI, the icon TI and the first hold icon HA may temporarily stop the periodic operation (end the animation). That is, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the icon TI and the first hold icon HA may temporarily stop the periodic operation. After the icon TI disappears, the first hold icon HA may temporarily stop the periodic operation, or after the icon TI and the first hold icon HA stop the periodic operation once, the icon TI disappears. May be good.

Then, at time t16 after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol was stopped and displayed, the jackpot determination related to the reserved first special symbol is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed. In the vessel 60, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the result of the jackpot determination is started (FIG. 48 (x)). Further, of the two LEDs of the first special symbol hold display 63, the LED on the left side is turned off.

From time 14 to t16, the main stop of the three effect symbols 701, the stop display of the small symbol 702, and the stop display of the sub-first variation display 81 continue. Further, the first hold icon HA1 continues a predetermined periodic operation. In addition, the background production will continue during this period. In addition, the output of the normal BGM is also continuously performed. While the extinction effect of the icon TI is being performed, the icon TI may or may not continuously perform a predetermined periodic operation.

Next, at time t17, the effect control unit 130 receives a variation start command from the main control unit 100, and each effect is started in the same manner as described above (FIG. 49 (y)). Specifically, by the end of the first cycle variation of the first special symbol, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 and the variation display effect using the small symbol 702 are started. In addition, the icon movement display effect of the first hold icon HA1 is started. Further, of the two LEDs of the sub-first hold indicator 83, the LED on the left side is turned off, and the first number hold SHA is reduced from "1" to "0". The reduction of the first digit hold SHA from "1" to "0" takes place in one frame time. That is, at the next frame update timing after the effect control unit 130 receives the fluctuation start command, the first digit hold SHA is updated from "1" to "0". Further, even at time t17, the background effect is continuously performed. In addition, the output of the normal BGM is also continuously performed.

Then, similarly to the above, at time t18, the movement of the first hold icon HA1 to the icon display area 704 is completed, and the first hold icon HA1 is displayed as the icon TI (FIG. 49 (z)). Next, at time t19, the start-time operation effect using the effect symbol 701 ends, and the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701 is started (FIG. 49 (z2)). When the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA and the icon TI is temporarily stopped according to the stop of the special symbol, the first hold icon HA is shifted and moved according to the start of the change of the next special symbol, and then the first hold icon HA is stopped. 1 Hold icon HA and the icon may be periodically operated from the beginning. That is, the animation for periodic operation may be started from the beginning. Alternatively, when the periodic operation of the first hold icon HA and the icon TI is temporarily stopped according to the stop of the special symbol, the first hold icon HA is shifted and moved according to the start of change of the next special symbol, and then the first hold icon HA is changed. 1 The hold icon HA and the periodic operation of the icon may be restarted from the state before the stop.

In addition, in FIGS. 45 to 49, an example of an effect in which three effect symbols 701 perform an operation effect at the start at the same time, and after the variable display effect, the effect symbol 701 performs an operation effect before stopping in the order of left, right, and middle will be described. did. In other effects, the three effect symbols 701 may execute the start operation effect at different timings. Further, the order in which the three effect symbols 701 are stopped is not limited to this. For example, the three effect symbols 701 may simultaneously perform the pre-stop operation effect and temporarily stop at the same time. Further, for example, the effect symbol 701 may perform the pre-stop operation effect in the order of right, left, and middle, and the effect symbol 701 may be temporarily stopped in this order. Further, for example, the left symbol and the right symbol may simultaneously perform the pre-stop operation effect, the left symbol and the right symbol may temporarily stop first, and then the middle symbol may perform the pre-stop operation effect to temporarily stop. Further, the order in which the effect symbol 701 performs the pre-stop operation effect and the order in which the effect symbol 701 performs the temporary stop may be different. For example, when the left symbol starts the pre-stop motion effect and then the right symbol starts the pre-stop motion effect, the right symbol may temporarily stop at the same time as the left symbol, or the right symbol temporarily stops first. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, at least one of the three effect symbols 701 is the pre-stop operation effect rather than the first period in which at least one of the three effect symbols 701 performs the operation effect at the start. The second period of doing is longer. For example, in the first period, after the three effect symbols 701 start the start operation effect at the same time, the start operation effect may be ended at the same time, or the three effect symbols 701 may start the start operation effect at the same time. After that, the operation effect at the start may be ended at different timings. Further, in the second period, after the three effect symbols 701 start the pre-stop operation effect at different timings, the pre-stop operation effect may be ended at different timings, or the three effect symbols 701 may be before the stop at the same time. After starting the motion effect, the motion effect before the stop may be ended at the same time. In any case, the second period is longer than the first period. Further, the period in which the effect symbol 701 of 1 performs the motion effect before the stop is longer than the period in which the effect symbol 701 performs the motion effect at the start. The relationship between these periods may be reversed. That is, the first period in which at least one of the three effect symbols 701 performs the motion effect at the start rather than the second period in which at least one of the three effect symbols 701 performs the pre-stop motion effect. The period may be longer. Further, the period in which the effect symbol 701 of 1 performs the operation effect at the start may be longer than the period in which the effect symbol 701 performs the operation effect before stopping.

Here, a plurality of production examples of a series of start operation effects, variable display effects, and pre-stop operation effects using the effect symbol 701 will be described.

-Default variation In the default variation, the effect symbol 701 floats upward for a moment at the start of the variation of the special symbol, and then the operation effect at the start of moving downward is performed. After the start operation effect, a variable display effect is performed in which the semi-transparent effect symbol 701 moves from top to bottom (vertically scrolls) at high speed. After that, in the pre-stop operation effect, the effect symbol 701 changes from a semi-transparent mode to a non-translucent mode while moving from top to bottom, and stops with an effect.

-Reverse vertical scroll fluctuation In the reverse vertical scroll fluctuation, the effect symbol 701 is momentarily sunk downward at the start of the change of the special symbol, and then the operation effect at the start of moving upward is performed. After the start operation effect, a variable display effect is performed in which the semi-transparent effect symbol 701 moves from the bottom to the top (reverse vertical scrolling) at high speed. After that, in the pre-stop operation effect, the effect symbol 701 changes from a semi-transparent mode to a non-translucent mode while moving from the bottom to the top, and stops with an effect.

-Horizontal rotation variation In the lateral rotation variation, the effect symbol 701 is momentarily turned to the right at the start of the variation of the special symbol, and is inverted to the left to rotate laterally at the start. After the start operation effect, a variable display effect is performed in which the translucent effect symbol 701 is rotated horizontally at high speed on the spot. After that, in the pre-stop operation effect, the effect symbol 701 changes from a semi-transparent mode to a non-translucent mode while rotating laterally at a relatively low speed, and stops with an effect.

-Expansion fluctuation In the expansion fluctuation, the effect symbol 701 is expanded at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the operation effect at the start of moving from the top to the bottom while being enlarged is performed. After the start operation effect, a variable display effect is performed in which the semi-transparent effect symbol 701 moves from top to bottom (vertically scrolls) at high speed. After that, in the pre-stop operation effect, the enlarged effect symbol 701 stops with an effect while moving from top to bottom, and returns to the original size.

-Reel fluctuation In reel fluctuation, a reel-shaped image appears in each area of the left, middle, and right when the effect symbol 701 starts to change the special symbol, and the start operation such that each reel-shaped image starts rotating. The production is done. The reel-shaped image of 1 includes an effect symbol showing a number from "1" to "9". After the start operation effect, a variable display effect is performed in which the reel-shaped image rotates at high speed in each of the left, middle, and right areas. After that, in the pre-stop operation effect, the three reel-shaped images stop with the effect. When the effect symbols included in each reel are stopped side by side in a horizontal row, the three effect symbols are stopped.

A plurality of operation modes (“default variation”, “reverse vertical scroll variation”, “horizontal rotation variation”, “expansion variation”, “reel variation”) of these effect symbols 701 may suggest the result of the jackpot determination. .. Specifically, "default variation" is usually selected, and "default variation" does not suggest the result of the jackpot determination. When an effect other than the "default fluctuation" is performed, it may be more likely that the fluctuation will be a big hit than when the "default fluctuation" is performed. Further, the effects other than the "default variation" may be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination. That is, an effect other than "default fluctuation" may be performed as a look-ahead effect.

Further, the plurality of operation modes (“default variation”, “reverse vertical scroll variation”, “horizontal rotation variation”, “expansion variation”, “reel variation”) of these effect symbols 701 suggest the result of the jackpot determination. It does not have to be. For example, a plurality of operation modes of the effect symbol 701 may be determined according to the effect mode. In addition, regardless of the result of the jackpot determination, if an effect other than the "default variation" (for example, a reverse vertical scroll variation) is selected with a predetermined probability, and an effect other than the "default variation" is selected, a plurality of effects are selected. The selected effect (reverse vertical scrolling variation) may be continuously performed over the variation of the special symbol.

The timing at which the effect is added to each effect symbol 701 in the pre-stop operation effect may be the same or different. For example, when each effect symbol 701 is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the left symbol performs the pre-stop motion effect, then temporarily stops with the effect, and then the right symbol performs the pre-stop motion effect. It may be temporarily stopped with an effect, and then the middle symbol may perform a pre-stop operation effect and then be temporarily stopped with an effect. When each effect symbol 701 is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the left symbol performs the pre-stop motion effect, then temporarily stops without any effect, and then the right symbol performs the pre-stop motion effect. Then, the effect may be added to each of the three effect symbols 701 when the temporary stop is performed without the effect and the middle symbol performs the pre-stop operation effect and then temporarily stops.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the first holding number (U1) is "0", when the game ball wins the first starting port 45, the sub first holding is held. The LED on the left side of the display 83 is turned on for a moment. In another production example, when the special symbol is stopped and the hold is zero, and the game ball wins in the first start opening 45, the LED on the left side of the sub first hold indicator 83 is turned on. You may not turn it on.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol performs the operation effect at the start in a predetermined mode according to the start of the change of the special symbol. After that, the effect symbol starts the variable display effect. During the execution of the start-time operation effect by the effect symbol, the small symbol 702 and the sub-first variation display 81 have already started the variation display. By the motion effect at the start, it is possible to draw attention to the effect pattern and enhance the interest. Since the operation effect at the start is performed before the variation display effect of the effect symbol, it may be difficult for the player to understand whether or not the variation display of the special symbol has started, but the small symbol 702 and the sub first variation indicator 81 come first. Since the variation display is started, the player can easily recognize the variation start of the special symbol.

Further, for the effect symbol 701, after performing the start operation effect of operating in a predetermined mode, the variable display effect of the effect symbol 701 is started, but for the small symbol 702, the start operation effect of operating in the predetermined display mode is started. Start the variable display effect without performing. The small symbol 702 starts the variable display without performing the start motion effect while the start motion effect by the effect symbol 701 is improved, so that the player can easily recognize the start of the change of the special symbol. Can be done.

In addition, after the effect symbol performs the motion effect at the start according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation display is started, and the hold controlled by the effect control unit 130 during the execution of the motion effect at the start of the effect symbol. The information (first number hold SHA, first hold icon HA, sub first hold indicator 83) is reduced. Since the start motion effect is performed before the effect symbol variation display effect, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the hold has been exhausted (the special symbol variation has started) depending on the start operation effect. Since the hold information is reduced during the start operation effect, the player can easily recognize the hold digestion (start of change of the special symbol).

In addition, after the effect symbol performs the motion effect at the start according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation display is started, and the shift movement of each first hold icon HA is started during the execution of the motion effect at the start of the effect symbol. (For example, movement from the first hold icon HA1 to the icon TI, movement from the first hold icon HA2 to the first hold icon HA1, movement from the first hold icon HA3 to the first hold icon HA2, etc.) is started. ing. Since the start motion effect is performed before the effect symbol variation display effect, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the hold has been exhausted (the special symbol variation has started) depending on the start operation effect. Since the first hold icon HA moves first, the player can easily recognize the digestion of the hold (start of change of the special symbol).

In addition, after the effect symbol performs the motion effect at the start according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation display is started, and the shift movement of each first hold icon HA is started during the execution of the motion effect at the start of the effect symbol. (For example, moving from the first hold icon HA1 to the icon TI, moving from the first hold icon HA2 to the first hold icon HA1, moving from the first hold icon HA3 to the first hold icon HA2, etc.) is completed. ing. Since the start motion effect is performed before the effect symbol variation display effect, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the hold has been exhausted (the special symbol variation has started) depending on the start operation effect. Since the movement of the first hold icon HA is completed first, the player can easily recognize the digestion of the hold (start of change of the special symbol).

Further, after the effect symbol performs the motion effect at the start according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation display is started, and during the execution of the motion effect at the start of the effect symbol, the icon TI of the first hold icon HA1 is executed. Has started moving to. Since the start motion effect is performed before the effect symbol variation display effect, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the hold has been exhausted (the special symbol variation has started) depending on the start operation effect. Since the movement of the first reserved icon HA1 to the icon display area 704 starts first, the player can easily recognize the start of the change of the special symbol.

Further, after the effect symbol performs the motion effect at the start according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation display is started, and the icon TI is displayed during the execution of the motion effect at the start of the effect symbol. Since the start motion effect is performed before the effect symbol variation display effect, it may be difficult for the player to understand that the hold has been exhausted (the special symbol variation has started) depending on the start operation effect. Since the icon TI indicating the change of the current special symbol is displayed first, the player can easily recognize the start of the change of the special symbol.

In addition, after the effect symbol performs the motion effect at the start according to the start of the change of the special symbol, the variation display is started, and the first hold is performed during the execution of the motion effect at the start of the effect symbol or the variation display. The icon HA performs a periodic operation in a predetermined display mode. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the effect symbol by the start operation effect, and also pay attention to the first hold icon HA by operating the first hold icon HA in a predetermined display mode before the variable display of the effect symbol. It can be made to improve the interest.

Further, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 when the change of the special symbol is not held, the first holding icon HA1 is additionally displayed and the first holding icon HA1 is additionally displayed during the start operation effect. Later, the first hold icon HA1 moves to the icon display area 704. By the additional display of the first hold icon HA1, the player can easily recognize that the fluctuation has started due to the new winning of the game ball. Further, by moving the additionally displayed first hold icon HA1 to the icon display area 704 and displaying it as the icon IT, it is intuitively recognized that the jackpot determination corresponding to this icon has been performed. be able to. Further, along with the additional display of the first hold icon HA1, the LED on the left side of the sub first hold indicator 83 is turned on and off, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the fluctuation based on the new prize has started. can.

While the additional display of the first hold icon HA1 and the lighting of the LED on the left side of the sub first hold indicator 83 are performed, the value indicated by the first number hold SHA remains "0" (FIG. 45 (c). )). The additional display of the first hold icon HA1 and the lighting of the LED on the left side of the sub first hold indicator 83 increased the first hold number U1 (that is, the right of jackpot determination was held in the main control unit 100). Although it may be misunderstood, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding by displaying the actual first hold number U1 by the first number hold SHA.

In addition, after the effect symbol performs the motion effect at the start according to the start of the change of the special symbol, the variation display is started, and the icon TI is being executed during the execution of the motion effect at the start of the effect symbol or the variation display. Performs periodic operation in a predetermined display mode. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the effect symbol by the operation effect at the start, and it is also possible to draw attention to the icon TI by operating the icon TI in a predetermined display mode before the variable display of the effect symbol. , Can improve the interest.

Further, after the effect symbol performs the motion effect at the start according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation display is started, and the output of the BGM is started during the execution of the motion effect at the start. Since the output of the BGM is started before the start of the variation display of the effect symbol, the player can be made to recognize the variation of the special symbol. Further, since the output of the BGM is started before the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the start of the game can be smoothed, and the player can start the game more smoothly than when the variable display of the effect symbol is suddenly started. Makes it easier to get into the game.

Further, it is possible to output the BGM when the effect symbol performs the motion effect at the start according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, then the variation display is started, and the motion effect at the start is executed. Since the BGM is output when the motion effect at the start is executed, the start of the game can be smoothed, and the player can easily enter the game as compared with the case where the variable display of the effect symbol is suddenly started.

In addition, after the effect symbol performs the motion effect at the start according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation display is started, and the BGM output before the execution of the motion effect at the start is continued even during the motion effect at the start. And output. Since the BGM is output before the execution of the motion effect at the start, the start of the game can be smoothed, and the player can play the game more than when the motion effect at the start of the effect symbol or the variable display is suddenly started. It becomes easy to enter.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the variable effect by the effect symbol and the variable effect by the small symbol during the variable display of the special symbol, and the stop display by the effect symbol and the small symbol during the stop display of the special symbol. It is possible to execute the stop display. After the variable effect (pre-start motion effect and variable display effect) by the effect symbol, the pre-stop motion effect that operates the effect symbol in a predetermined mode is executed, and during the pre-stop motion effect, the variable effect by the small symbol is executed. ing. By performing a pre-stop motion effect using the effect symbol before the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol can be attracted attention and the interest can be enhanced. In addition, it may be confusing for the player whether the special symbol is fluctuating or stopped due to the pre-stop motion effect, but the special symbol fluctuates by executing the variation effect with the small symbol during the pre-stop motion effect. It is possible to make the player aware of what is being done, and it is possible to maintain expectations for the jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, while the effect symbol is performing the pre-stop operation effect in one area (for example, the right area), the pre-stop operation effect is performed in the same or different manner in the other area (middle area). There are times when the variable display effect is performed in another area (middle area). As a result, it is possible to change the timing of each effect symbol (left, middle, right symbol) to perform a pre-stop motion effect, and at the same time perform a pre-stop motion effect, which can improve the interest. For example, if one effect symbol (for example, the right symbol) is performing the pre-stop motion effect and another effect symbol (middle symbol) is performing the variable display effect, the variation does not end as it is. , Expectations for yet another development will increase.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the variable effect by the effect symbol during the variable display of the special symbol, and it is possible to execute the stop display by the effect symbol during the stop display of the special symbol. After the variable effect (pre-start operation effect and variable display effect) by the effect symbol, the pre-stop operation effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode is executed, and then the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. During the pre-stop motion effect, the special symbol is performing a variable effect. By performing a pre-stop motion effect using the effect symbol before the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol can be attracted attention and the interest can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, on the premise that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed after performing the pre-stop operation effect, the disappearance effect of the icon is performed after the pre-stop operation effect is performed. By performing the pre-stop motion effect using the effect symbol, the effect symbol can be noticed and the interest can be enhanced. When the effect symbol is stopped after the effect symbol is operated by the motion effect before stop, it may be difficult to understand the stop timing because the state changes from the moving state to the stopped state, but the effect symbol is stopped. By extinguishing the icon after the pre-operation effect, it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that the change of the special symbol has ended.

Further, in the present embodiment, on the premise that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed after performing the pre-stop operation effect, the icon is displayed during the pre-stop operation effect, and the icon disappears after the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. do. By performing the pre-stop motion effect using the effect symbol, the effect symbol can be noticed and the interest can be enhanced. By extinguishing the icon after the stop display of the effect symbol, it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that the change of the special symbol has ended.

Further, in the present embodiment, on the premise that the effect symbol and the small symbol are stopped and displayed after the effect symbol performs the pre-stop operation effect, the disappearance effect for extinguishing the icon is executed after the small symbol is stopped and displayed. .. By performing the pre-stop motion effect using the effect symbol, the effect symbol can be noticed and the interest can be enhanced. By extinguishing the icon after the stop display of the small symbol, it is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that the change of the special symbol has ended.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol and the small symbol are stopped and displayed after the effect symbol performs the operation effect before the stop. For the small symbol, the small symbol is stopped and displayed without performing the pre-stop operation effect for operating the small symbol in a predetermined mode. By performing the pre-stop motion effect using the effect symbol, the effect symbol can be noticed and the interest can be enhanced. Since the small symbol is stopped and displayed without performing the pre-stop motion effect, it is not confusing to the player, and it is possible to clearly notify that the change of the special symbol has ended.

Further, in the present embodiment, on the premise that the effect symbol is stopped and displayed after performing the pre-stop operation effect, the BGM is continuously output during both the pre-stop operation effect of the effect symbol and the stop display of the effect symbol. .. Therefore, the continuity of the production can be ensured, and the transition to the next fluctuation can be smoothed.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of operation modes in the start operation effect using the effect symbol, and the start operation effect is performed in any one of the plurality of operation modes. Regardless of which operation mode is used for the start operation effect, the variation display using the small symbol 702 or the sub-first variation indicator 81 is started first. In addition, the time until the effect symbol performs the variable display effect differs depending on the operation mode of the start operation effect using the effect symbol. Further, regardless of the operation mode in which the start operation effect is performed, the mode of the variation display of the small symbol 702 and the sub-first variation display 81 is the same.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of operation modes in the start operation effect using the effect symbols, and regardless of the operation mode, the three effect symbols of left, middle, and right perform the start operation effect. There are patterns in the same order. For example, there is a pattern in which three effect symbols simultaneously start the start operation effect regardless of the operation mode of the start operation effect. Further, in any of the operation modes, there is a pattern in which the operation effect at the start is started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of motion modes in the pre-stop motion effect using the effect symbols, and regardless of the motion mode, the three effect symbols on the left, middle, and right perform the pre-stop motion effect. There are patterns in the same order. For example, there is a pattern in which three effect symbols simultaneously start the pre-stop operation effect regardless of the operation mode of the pre-stop operation effect. Further, in any of the operation modes, there is a pattern for starting the pre-stop operation effect in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon movement display effect for moving the hold icon (first hold icon HA or second hold icon HB) has a plurality of operation modes. For example, there may be a pattern in which the hold icon shifts to the side and a pattern in which the hold icon rises a little and moves in the horizontal direction. Further, for example, the operation mode of the icon movement display effect may differ depending on the effect mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the operation mode of the start operation effect using the effect symbol. For example, the second operation mode has a higher expectation of a big hit than the first operation mode of the start operation effect. On the other hand, the jackpot expectation does not differ depending on the operation mode of the icon movement display effect of the hold icon.

Further, in the present embodiment, the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit in the change of the current special symbol, or the big hit in the change of the next and subsequent special symbols, depending on the operation mode of the pre-stop motion effect using the effect symbol). The degree of expectation that becomes) is different. For example, the second operation mode has a higher degree of expectation than the first operation mode of the pre-stop operation effect. On the other hand, the degree of expectation does not differ depending on the operation mode of the icon movement display effect of the hold icon.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation mode of the start operation effect using the effect symbol is executed by selecting one from a plurality of operation modes regardless of the set effect mode (stage). , The operation mode of the icon movement display effect may be selected according to the effect mode (stage).

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation mode of the pre-stop motion effect using the effect symbol is executed by selecting one from a plurality of operation modes regardless of the set effect mode (stage). , The operation mode of the icon movement display effect may be selected according to the effect mode (stage).

Further, regardless of the start operation effect of any of the operation modes, the start operation effect ends after the icon movement display effect ends.

In the present embodiment, the icon TI disappearance effect is performed in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command, but the timing at which the icon TI disappearance effect is performed is not limited to this. For example, the disappearance effect of the icon TI may be performed at the timing when the fluctuation time included in the fluctuation start command elapses after receiving the fluctuation start command. Further, the disappearance effect of the icon TI may be started at the timing when the next fluctuation start command is received or the timing when the customer waiting command is received.

Further, in the above, in the normal loss fluctuation, the disappearance effect of the icon TI is performed in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command, but as described later, the icon TI is used not only when the special symbol is stopped. It may be hidden at a predetermined timing while the special symbol is changing.

(Volume / light intensity adjustment operation when fluctuation starts and fluctuation stops)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation using a predetermined button (for example, the up button 191A or the down button 193A) of the cross key 19 is used to produce a sound effect during the variable display of the special symbol or the stop display of the special symbol. The volume of related sounds (BGM, sound effects, character voices, etc.) can be adjusted. Further, by an operation using another button of the cross key 19 (for example, the left button 192A or the right button 194A), the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 70 or the second image display device 70 or the second image display device 70 or the second image is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol or the stop display of the special symbol. The amount of light of the image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the panel lighting device 74 can be adjusted. The volume of the sound related to various errors (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.) is not changed by the operation using the cross key 19, and the sound related to the error. The volume of (error notification sound) is always set to the maximum value. Hereinafter, control when the operation for the cross key 19 is performed during the variable display of the special symbol and the stop display will be described.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a timing chart showing an example of an effect when the volume adjustment operation is performed during the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. 51 and 52 are diagrams showing an example of an image displayed on the first image display device 70 at each timing of FIG. 50. In the following, the case where the volume adjustment operation is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol will be described, but the same applies to the case where the operation is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, in the following, only the part related to the volume adjustment operation will be described in detail, and the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol hold display 63, and each object (effect symbol 701, small symbol 702, first). Since the operation of the hold icon HA, the icon TI, and the first digit hold SHA) is the same as above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 50, it is assumed that a customer is waiting at time t0. That is, it is assumed that the first reserved number U1 and the second reserved number U2 are zero, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, it is assumed that the BGM is not output (FIG. 51 (a)). When the volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19 at time t0 in this state, the volume value is set from, for example, "2" to "3", and the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed. It is displayed (FIG. 51 (b)). In the present embodiment, the volume value can be set in five stages of, for example, "1" to "5". The volume value image OG is an image indicating which stage of the currently set volume value is "1" to "5". For example, by displaying the number of images indicating the volume value according to the volume value. The current volume value may be indicated, or the volume value may be indicated by a numerical value as it is. Further, the output of the volume adjusting sound is started from the moment when the volume adjusting operation using the cross key 19 is performed. The volume adjustment sound is a sound indicating that the volume adjustment operation has been performed using the cross key 19, and is output for, for example, 0.8 seconds. The volume adjustment sound is output at the newly set volume value.

The volume value image OG is displayed, for example, in the right area of the screen of the first image display device 70, and is displayed in, for example, an area overlapping the display area of the right symbol. In the figure, a part of the right symbol overlaps with the volume value image OG. In this case, the volume value image OG is drawn on the layer in front of the right symbol. That is, the volume value image OG is displayed with priority over the right symbol, and a part of the right symbol is invisible or difficult to see due to the volume value image OG. If the variation display of the special symbol is not started, the volume value image OG is continuously displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display.

Here, it is assumed that the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 and the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the time when a predetermined time (10 seconds) elapses from the display of the volume value image OG (10 seconds). Time t1, FIG. 51 (c)).

At time t2, in response to the effect control unit 130 receiving the variation start command, the variation effect using the effect symbol 701 or the like is started (FIG. 51 (d)), and the volume after being adjusted by the volume adjustment operation. BGM is started to be output. At this time, the volume value image OG is erased even before a predetermined time (10 seconds) has elapsed after the volume value image OG is displayed.

Specifically, the volume value image OG being displayed is deleted in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command. If the volume adjustment sound is being output when the fluctuation start command is received, the output of the volume adjustment sound is stopped. Further, for a predetermined time (time t2 to t3; for example, 1 second) after receiving the fluctuation start command, the display of the volume value image OG is suppressed (regulated or restricted), and the change of the volume value itself is suppressed. To. That is, during this period, the volume value is not changed even when the volume adjustment operation is performed using the cross key 19, and therefore the volume value image OG is not displayed and the volume adjustment sound is not output.

Next, at time t3, for example, the icon TI is displayed, and the volume adjustment operation using the cross key 19 can be performed again before the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 ends. It should be noted that the volume adjustment operation may be possible after the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 is completed (that is, after the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701 is started).

After that, when the volume adjustment operation using the cross key 19 is performed at the time t4 during the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701, the volume value is changed from "3" to "4" and the volume value image is displayed. OG is displayed (FIG. 51 (f)). At this time as well, the volume adjustment sound is output.

Next, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 at the time t5 during the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701, the icon additional display effect is performed in response to the reception of the start winning command (FIG. 52 (FIG. 52). g)). If a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has not elapsed since the volume value image OG was started to be displayed, the volume value image OG is continuously displayed even when the icon additional display effect is performed. It should be noted that the winning sound corresponding to the current volume value may be output along with the icon additional display effect.

Next, at time t6, a pre-stop operation effect using the effect symbol 701 is performed (FIG. 52 (h)). If a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has not elapsed since the volume value image OG was started to be displayed, the volume value image OG is continuously displayed even during this pre-stop operation effect.

At time t7, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (FIG. 52 (i)). At this point, the effect symbol 701 is not stopped, and the volume value image OG is continuously displayed.

Then, at time t8, in response to the effect control unit 130 receiving the fluctuation stop command, the effect symbol 701 is stopped, the small symbol 702 is stopped, and the volume value image OG is deleted (the volume value image OG is deleted). FIG. 52 (j). Even before a predetermined time (10 seconds) has elapsed after the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value image OG is forcibly deleted. For a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) after receiving the fluctuation stop command, the display of the volume value image OG is suppressed, and the change of the volume value itself is also suppressed.

Further, the variation display of the next special symbol is started, and at time t9, in response to the reception of the next variation start command by the effect control unit 130, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 is performed, and the operation effect is performed at the start. The variable display of the small symbol 702 is started (FIG. 52 (k)). During this time as well, the change in the volume value is suppressed, and the display of the volume value image OG is also suppressed.

After that, at time t10, the volume adjustment operation using the cross key 19 becomes possible during the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 (or after the start operation effect) (FIG. 52 (l)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can adjust the volume by using the cross key 19 during the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol, but the predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol and the predetermined time, and Volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is suppressed for a predetermined time from the stop display of the special symbol.

The same applies to the light amount adjustment using the cross key 19. Specifically, the player can adjust the amount of light by using the cross key 19 during the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. The light intensity values of the first image display device 70, the second image display device 70, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the like can be adjusted in five stages of, for example, "1" to "5". When the light amount adjustment operation using the cross key 19 is performed, the light amount value is adjusted, a light amount value image showing the current light amount value is displayed, and a light amount adjustment sound is output. This light intensity adjustment is suppressed in a predetermined period from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol and a predetermined period from the stop of fluctuation of the special symbol. That is, the light amount adjustment itself is suppressed, and the display of the light amount value image and the output of the light amount adjustment sound are suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the effect symbol 701 from being lowered by displaying the volume value image OG and the light amount value image at the start and stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. In addition, when the volume adjustment sound or the light amount adjustment sound is output at the start and stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol, it is as if the sound was output by the start or stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol (that is, based on the result of the jackpot determination). It can be misleading to the player (as if it were a sound). Therefore, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment are suppressed so that the volume adjustment sound and the light amount adjustment sound are not output for a predetermined time from the start and stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Thereby, it is possible to prevent such a misunderstanding from being given to the player.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player, the volume adjustment using the changeover switch 22 that can be basically operated by the game clerk is performed. The amount of light can be adjusted. Even if it is a predetermined time from the start or stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol, when the changeover switch 22 is operated, the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment may be performed. That is, the volume adjustment and the light amount adjustment using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player are suppressed for a predetermined time from the start and stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol, but the volume adjustment using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk. And the light intensity adjustment may not be suppressed. In this case, if the volume adjustment (or light intensity adjustment) using the changeover switch 22 is performed at a predetermined time from the start or stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the volume adjustment (or light intensity adjustment) itself is possible. , The display of the volume value image (or the light amount value image) may be suppressed, or the output of the volume adjustment sound (or the light amount adjustment sound) may be suppressed. On the contrary, even in this case, the display of the volume value image (or the light amount value image) and the output of the volume adjustment sound (or the light amount adjustment sound) may not be suppressed.

Further, when the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment is performed using the changeover switch 22, the volume value image OG or the light amount value image is displayed in the same manner as the volume adjustment or the light amount adjustment using the cross key 19. For example, the display of the volume value image OG is updated even when the volume is adjusted using the changeover switch 22 or the volume is adjusted using the cross key 19 while the volume value image OG is being displayed. .. Further, when the volume adjustment using the changeover switch 22 is performed when the volume value image OG is not displayed, the volume value image OG is displayed. Also in this case, the volume value image OG is erased at the start or stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is suppressed for a predetermined period from the start or stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. If the volume is adjusted using the changeover switch 22 when the volume value image OG is not displayed, the volume value image OG is not displayed, but the changeover switch 22 is displayed while the volume value image OG is being displayed. When the volume adjustment is performed using, the display of the volume value image OG may be updated. The same applies to the light intensity adjustment.

Further, while the error notification sound is being output, the volume adjustment (or light amount adjustment) using the changeover switch 22 is possible, but the volume adjustment (or light amount adjustment) using the cross key 19 may be suppressed. The error notification sound is a sound output when various errors (illegal winning error, abnormal winning error, magnetic error, radio wave error, door opening error, etc.) occur, and is output at the maximum volume. Even if the volume is adjusted by using the changeover switch 22 during the output of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound being output is not adjusted. Further, during the output of the effect sound other than the error notification sound (sound related to the effect based on the result of the jackpot determination, for example, the voice of the character, the sound effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination, etc.), the volume is adjusted by using the changeover switch 22. (Or light amount adjustment) and volume adjustment (or light amount adjustment) using the cross key 19 are possible, and when the volume adjustment is performed, the volume of the effect sound changes. As described above, the volume adjustment (or light amount adjustment) using the cross key 19 is suppressed for a predetermined time from the start or end of the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Further, during the output of the error notification sound, the effect sound may not be output, or the volume of the effect sound may be lowered, and the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 may be suppressed. That is, during the output of the error notification sound, the output of the effect sound is suppressed, and the volume adjustment using the cross key 19 is also suppressed. As a method of suppressing the output of the effect sound during the output of the error notification sound, the effect sound is reproduced internally, but the volume is set to zero (that is, mute, in other words, the inaudible sound is output). Any of the method, the method of not reproducing the effect sound, and the method of lowering the volume of the effect sound may be used.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the output of the error notification sound is started, even if the current volume value is set to a volume value lower than the maximum volume value, the current volume value is set. When the production sound is output at a volume value lower than the volume value (including zero volume value) and the output of the error notification sound ends, the volume of the production sound is set to the volume before it is lowered (that is, it is set). Return to volume value). When the volume value of the effect sound returns, the volume value image is not displayed.

In the above embodiment, the volume value image is deleted at the start and stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol as a suppression of the display of the volume value image, but in the modified example, at the start and stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol, The display of the volume value image may be suppressed by moving the volume value image displayed on the layer on the front side of the effect symbol 701 to the layer on the back side (background image side) of the effect symbol 701. That is, the effect symbol 701 may be displayed with priority over the volume value image at the start and stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the special symbol starts to fluctuate or stops fluctuating during the output of the volume adjustment sound, the volume adjustment sound being output is stopped, but in the modified example, the volume adjustment sound is being output. When the special symbol starts to fluctuate or stops fluctuating, the output of the volume adjusting sound may be continued until the output period of the volume adjusting sound (for example, 0.8 seconds) elapses. Even in this case, the volume value image may be deleted. That is, if the special symbol starts or stops fluctuating while the volume value image is displayed and the volume adjustment sound is output by adjusting the volume using the cross key 19, the display of the volume value image is suppressed. , The output of the volume adjustment sound may be continued.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the volume adjustment operation (or the light amount adjustment operation) using the cross key 19 is performed during the period other than the time when the change of the special symbol starts or ends, the volume value image (or the light amount value image) is performed. ) Is displayed and the volume adjustment sound (light amount adjustment sound) is output, but in the modified example, the volume value image (or light amount value image) is not displayed and only the volume adjustment sound (light amount adjustment sound) is output. good. Even in this case, the volume adjustment (or light amount adjustment) using the cross key 19 is suppressed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) from the start or end of the change of the special symbol, and the volume adjustment sound (light amount adjustment sound) is heard. The output is suppressed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the effect symbol performs the pre-stop motion effect, the stop display is performed, and the BGM is continuously output during both the pre-stop operation effect of the effect symbol and the stop display of the effect symbol. .. The volume of the BGM can be adjusted by using the cross key 19 even during the pre-stop operation effect of the effect symbol. Since the output of the BGM continues even while the effect symbol is performing the pre-stop operation effect, the continuity of the effect can be ensured and the transition to the next fluctuation can be smoothed. Further, since the volume can be adjusted even during the pre-stop operation effect, the volume can be adjusted at any time according to the player's preference.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the effect symbol performs the pre-stop operation effect, the stop display is performed, and the BGM is continuously output even during the pre-stop operation effect of the effect symbol and the stop display of the effect symbol. It is possible to adjust the volume of the BGM using the cross key 19 even during the pre-stop operation effect of the effect symbol. If an error notification sound is output during the pre-stop operation effect, the BGM being output is suppressed (volume down, mute, or playback stop). As a result, the volume can be adjusted even during the pre-stop operation effect, but when the error notification sound is output, the BGM is suppressed, so that the error notification sound can be heard by the player.

(Example of SPSP reach production)
Next, an example of the effect when the reach effect is performed will be described. Hereinafter, among the reach effects, a case where the SPSP reach effect is performed will be described.

(Example of production when loss is notified from SPSP reach production)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a timing chart showing an example of the effect when the SPSP reach effect is performed. FIG. 54 is a continuation timing chart of FIG. 53, and is a diagram showing a timing chart when a loss is notified as a result of the SPSP reach effect. FIGS. 55 to 58 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at each timing of FIGS. 53 and 54.

Before time t0, it is assumed that three rights to determine the jackpot pertaining to the first special symbol are reserved. As shown in FIG. 53, when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate at time t0, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702, and the sub first variation indicator 81 are used. The variable display, the icon movement display effect in which each first hold icon HA is shifted to the right, and the like are started (FIG. 55 (a)). Actually, after the first special symbol starts to change, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702, the icon movement display effect of each first hold icon HA, etc. However, since the difference between the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol and the start timing of each effect is as described above, it is omitted here.

When the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 is started, the start effect effect in which the effect image 705a is added to each effect symbol 701 is performed at time t1 (FIG. 55 (b)). In this start effect effect, the fluctuation start sound may be output together with the display of the effect image 705a. The fluctuation start sound may differ depending on the display mode (blue or red) of the effect image 705a.

The start effect effect is an effect in which a blue or red effect image 705a is superimposed and displayed on each of the three effect symbols 701, and a relatively small effect image 705a is gradually enlarged. The gaming machine 1 stores data showing an animation moving image over a plurality of frames (for example, 45 to 60 frames; 1.5 seconds to 2 seconds) in which the effect image 705a is gradually enlarged. It should be noted that the effect effect at the start is performed at the start of each variation over the variation of a plurality of special symbols based on the result of the preliminary determination, and the variation of one special symbol based on the result of the preliminary determination or the jackpot determination. It may be done at the beginning of. Here, it is assumed that the effect effect at the start is performed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol of 1.

The start effect effect is started at the timing after the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 is started, and ends during the start operation effect. For example, the start timing (time t0) of the start operation effect and the start timing (t1) of the start effect effect may be different by about 0.5 seconds. By executing the start effect effect after starting the start operation effect in this way, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 from being obstructed, and at the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol 701. It is possible to improve the interest of.

The start timing (time t0) of the start operation effect and the start timing (t1) of the start effect effect may be the same. Further, here, the start effect effect describes an effect example that is started during the first cycle change of the special symbol, but in another effect example, the special symbol changes the cycle once or a plurality of times. After that, the effect effect at the start may be started.

Next, at time t2, the movement from the first hold icon HA1 to the icon TI is completed. At this point, the start operation effect and the start effect effect are continuing (FIG. 55 (c)). Further, when the icon TI is displayed, the icon change effect of the icon TI may be started. For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), the icon TI changes from “white” to “blue” at the timing when the first hold icon HA1 moves to the icon display area 704 and is displayed as the icon TI. The changing icon change effect is started. The icon change effect is an effect in which the first hold icon HA or the icon TI changes. For example, the icon changes over a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the effect is displayed around the changing icon. It is a production to do. The game machine 1 shows data showing an animation composed of a plurality of frames (for example, 15 frames) for the icon change effect of the icon TI, and an animation for the icon change effect of the first hold icon HA. The data is stored.

The data showing the animation for the icon change effect of the icon TI and the data showing the animation for the icon change effect of the first hold icon HA may be the same. Further, the icon change effect of the icon TI can be executed not only at the start of the change of the special symbol but also at any timing during the change of the special symbol.

Next, at time t3, the effect effect at the start ends (FIG. 55 (d)). The effect effect at the start ends after the special symbol undergoes multiple cycle fluctuations. Even when the start effect effect ends, the start operation effect continues. Further, at time t3, the icon change effect of the icon TI has already ended, and the icon TI is displayed in, for example, a blue mode.

After that, at the time t4, the start operation effect ends, and the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701 is started (FIG. 55 (e)). When the SPSP reach effect is performed, the execution time of the start operation effect may be longer than in the case of the normal loss variation described with reference to FIG. 43 or the like. For example, the start operation effect in the case of a normal loss fluctuation is performed for 1 to 1.5 seconds, whereas the start operation effect in the case of the SPSP reach effect is performed for 2 seconds to 3 seconds. good. Further, when the SPSP reach effect is performed, a start operation effect different from the case of the normal loss fluctuation may be performed.

When the predetermined time elapses, the operation effect before stopping of the left symbol and the right symbol is performed at time t5 (FIG. 55 (f)). Next, at time t6, the same type of effect symbol 701 (for example, the “1” symbol) is temporarily stopped as the left symbol and the right symbol, and the reach is established (FIG. 56 (g)). When the reach is established, the reach notification effect is performed from time t6 to t7 (FIG. 56 (h)).

The reach notification effect is an effect of temporarily stopping the same type of effect symbol 701 on the left and right to notify that the reach has been established, and is performed over a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). Specifically, in the reach notification effect, the left symbol and the right symbol emit light by adding the effect image 705b to the temporarily stopped left symbol and right symbol. Further, in the reach notification effect, a horizontally long image (an image written as "reach") covering the display area of the left symbol and the right symbol is displayed superimposed on the left symbol and the right symbol. Further, in the reach notification effect, for example, the voice of the character "reach" is output from the speaker.

Next, at time t7, the N reach (normal reach) effect is started (FIG. 56 (i)). Specifically, in the N reach effect, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped, and a plurality of effect symbols 701 as middle symbols are moved and displayed at a relatively slow speed from the upper part to the lower part of the screen. This is performed, and a production is performed in which the player is expected to stop the production symbols of the same type as the left symbol and the right symbol as the middle symbol. During the N reach effect, the normal background image that was displayed before the execution of the N reach effect is continuously displayed. Further, in response to the start of the N reach effect, the output of the N reach BGM different from the normal BGM is started. Further, during the N reach effect, a lamp lighting effect may be performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and / or the panel lighting device 74 lights up in a predetermined mode (for example, blue) suggesting the possibility of a big hit. The N reach effect is executed over a predetermined time (time t7 to t8; for example, 10 seconds).

Next, at the end of the N reach effect, the middle symbol that was moving and displayed at a relatively slow speed accelerates, suggesting the development to the SP reach effect (FIG. 56 (j)).

Next, at time t8, an SP development effect suggesting that the SP reach effect is developed is executed (FIG. 56 (k)). In the SP development effect, for example, the character image in the left symbol and the right symbol is peeled off, and the left symbol and the right symbol composed of the numerical image are reduced and moved in the left-right direction of the screen. Further, during the SP development effect, a background image for the SP development effect is displayed. The normal background image may be displayed even during the SP development effect.

Then, at time t9, the SP reach effect is started (FIG. 56 (l)). In the SP reach effect, the left symbol 701 and the right symbol 701, which consist of reduced numerical images, are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas of the upper region of the screen, respectively, and the SP reach video effect corresponding to the SP reach effect is performed in the central portion of the screen (SP reach video effect). For example, a production in which a 2D animation character operates) is performed. Further, at the start of the SP reach effect, an effect image 705c is added to each of the left symbol 701 and the right symbol 701 so that the left symbol 701 and the right symbol 701 emit light. Further, according to the start of the SP reach effect, the background image changes from the normal background image to the SP reach background image, and the output of the SP reach BGM different from the normal BGM and the N reach BGM is started.

From time t9 to t10, the SP reach effect is executed, and the effect that the player expects that the effect symbol 701 of the same type as the left symbol and the right symbol stops as the middle symbol is performed (FIG. 57 (m)). Further, during the SP reach effect, even if the lamp lighting effect is performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and / or the panel lighting device 74 lights up in a predetermined mode (for example, blue or green) suggesting the possibility of a big hit. good.

Next, a blackout effect may be performed at time t10 at the end of the SP reach effect (FIG. 57 (n)). The blackout effect is an effect that suggests the possibility that the SPSP reach effect is performed, and is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of development into the SPSP reach effect. In the blackout effect, the entire screen is blacked out (a black or gray image is displayed on the entire screen), and a button operation promotion image PBG that urges the player to operate the effect button 17 is displayed. In addition, a valid period image YKG showing the valid period of the operation for the effect button 17 is displayed. During the blackout effect, the effect symbol 701 is hidden. On the other hand, the small symbol 702 is continuously displayed, and a variable display effect is performed. Further, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are displayed, and the first number hold SHA and the second number hold SHB are also continuously displayed. During the blackout effect, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI may be hidden, or the first hold icon HA may be hidden while the icon TI may be displayed. The first hold icon HA may be displayed while the icon TI may be hidden. Further, during the blackout effect, the lamp lighting effect in which the frame lighting device 10 and / or the panel lighting device 74 is lit in a predetermined manner may be stopped (that is, the lamp is turned off), or the blackout effect is being performed. The lamp lighting effect may be continued.

During the blackout effect, the BGM output before the start of the blackout effect (here, the BGM for SP reach) is interrupted, and the BGM is not output and becomes a silent state. In this silent state, a production sound other than BGM (for example, a character's voice, a sound prompting a button operation, other sound effects, etc.) may be output. Further, when various errors occur, the error notification sound is output at the maximum volume even during the blackout effect. If the output of the SP reach BGM is interrupted during the blackout effect and then develops into the SPSP reach effect, the SP reach BGM is not restarted and the sound corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is output. On the other hand, if the output of the SP reach BGM is interrupted during the blackout effect and then does not develop into the SPSP reach effect, the SP reach effect and the output of the SP reach BGM are restarted, and then the loss is notified. Specifically, if the SPSP reach effect does not develop after the blackout effect, the playback of the SP reach BGM is continued during the blackout effect, but the output of the SP reach BGM is suppressed by reducing or reducing the volume. After that, the SP reach effect is restarted, the volume of the SP reach BGM is returned to the original volume, and the output of the SP reach BGM is restarted. If the SPSP reach effect develops after the blackout effect, stop the SP reach BGM (end the playback of the SP reach BGM) during the blackout effect, and then SPSP according to the development of the SPSP reach effect. The sound (BGM and sound effect) related to the reach effect is output. Even if the SPSP reach effect is developed after the blackout effect or the SPSP reach effect is not developed, the SP reach BGM is continuously played during the blackout effect, but the volume is reduced to zero or the SP. The output of the reach BGM may be suppressed.

Here, if the effect button 17 is pressed during the valid period after the blackout effect is started, or if the valid period elapses without performing an operation on the effect button 17, the SPSP reach effect develops. The SPSP development production that suggests that is performed.

Then, after the SPSP development effect, the SPSP reach effect is started at time t11 (FIG. 57 (o)). In response to the start of the SPSP reach effect, the background image for the SPSP reach is displayed, and the output of the BGM for the SPSP reach is started. Further, the first hold icon HA is hidden according to the start of the SPSP reach effect. Further, during the SPSP reach effect, the small symbol 702 continues the variable display effect, the icon TI is continuously displayed, and the first number hold SHA and the second number hold SHB are also continuously displayed. Further, during the SPSP reach effect, a lamp lighting effect that lights in a predetermined mode (for example, a red mode) suggesting that the frame lighting device 10 and / or the panel lighting device 74 has a relatively high possibility of a big hit is performed. It may be done. In addition to the first hold icon HA, the icon TI may be hidden during the SPSP reach effect. Further, during the SPSP reach effect, the first hold icon HA may be displayed while the icon TI may be hidden.

During the SPSP reach effect, the relatively small left symbol 701 and right symbol 701 consisting of numerical images are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas of the upper part of the screen, and in the center of the screen, a moving image effect for the SPSP reach effect (for example, A production in which a 3D character operates) is performed.

Next, at the final time t12 of the SPSP reach effect, the determined effect is executed (FIG. 57 (p)). Here, the deciding effect is an effect performed immediately before the notification of whether or not a big hit is made, and is an effect that makes the player expect a big hit. Immediately after the decision production, you will be notified whether it is a big hit or not. For example, as a deciding effect, an operation promotion effect for urging an operation on the effect button 17 is executed, or instead of the operation promotion effect, an effect symbol 701 similar to the left symbol and the right symbol moves at a low speed in the center of the screen. An effect is performed that makes you expect to stop in the center of the screen. Here, for example, as an example of the determination effect, it is assumed that an operation promotion effect for encouraging an operation on the effect button 17 is executed.

Specifically, at time t12, the valid period image YKG showing the valid period of the operation is displayed together with the button operation promotion image PBG that urges the player to operate the effect button 17 (FIG. 57 (p)). As the button operation promotion image PBG, an image imitating the effect button 17 in the normal state or an image imitating the effect button 17 in the protruding state is displayed. When an image imitating the effect button 17 in the projecting state is displayed as the button operation promotion image PBG, the effect button 17 changes to the projecting state. When the effect button 17 changes to the protruding state, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the effect button 17 is in the normal state.

The effect button 17 may change to a protruding state even during a period other than the determined effect (the first half of the reach effect, for example, during the blackout effect shown in FIG. 57 (n) before the start of the SPSP reach effect). The effect button 17 is more likely to change to a protruding state in the latter half of the reach effect (for example, during the decision effect) than in the first half of the effect.

Further, during the operation promotion effect, the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped, and the BGM is not output and becomes a silent state. In this silent state, a predetermined sound effect other than the BGM or an operation promotion sound for urging the player to operate the effect button 17 may be output. Further, when various errors occur, the error notification sound is output at the maximum volume even during the operation promotion effect as the determination effect. In response to the execution of the operation promotion effect as the determination effect, the SPSP reach BGM output before the execution of the operation promotion effect is stopped and is not reproduced internally. Although the reproduction of the SPSP reach BGM is continued during the operation promotion effect as the determination effect, the output of the SPSP reach BGM may be suppressed by reducing or reducing the volume to zero.

Then, at time t13, when the effect button 17 is pressed during the valid period, or when the valid period elapses without performing an operation on the effect button 17, the result of the jackpot determination is notified. Here, since the result of the jackpot determination was a loss, a failure effect for notifying the loss is performed (FIG. 57 (q)). Specifically, as the middle symbol, the effect symbol 701 different from the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, so that the loss is notified. At this point, the small symbol 702 continues the variable display effect. Further, during the execution of the failure effect, the BGM and the sound effect corresponding to the failure effect (loss notification effect) are output. During the execution of the failure effect, the output of the SPSP reach BGM stopped (suppressed) during the operation promotion effect may be restarted. Further, during the failure effect, a lamp lighting effect may be performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and / or the panel lighting device 74 is lit in a predetermined mode (white mode) suggesting a loss.

Next, at time t14, the switching image is displayed on the entire screen (FIG. 57 (r)). In this switching image, the effect symbol 701 is hidden, and the icon TI is also hidden. On the other hand, the small symbol 702 is continuously displayed, and a variable display effect is performed. In addition, the first digit hold SHA and the second digit hold SHB are also continuously displayed.

At the following time t15, the background image for SPSP reach is switched to the normal background image, and the three effect symbols 701 return to the normal size mode including the numerical image and the character image, and the three effect symbols 701 are lost. Temporarily stop in the embodiment (FIG. 58 (s)). Further, the first hold icon HA is also displayed again, and the icon TI is also displayed. Further, the small symbol 702 continues the variable display effect, and the first number holding SHA and the second number holding SHB are also continuously displayed.

Next, at time t16, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (FIG. 58 (t)), and at the following time t17, three effect symbols 701 are displayed in response to the effect control unit 130 receiving the variable stop command. At the same time as the main stop, the small symbol 702 is also stopped and displayed (FIG. 58 (u)). Further, in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command, the effect of extinguishing the icon TI is also started.

Then, at time t18, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the stop display of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the next special symbol is started, and in the same manner as described above, the effect control unit 130 receives the fluctuation start command. Then, a start operation effect or the like using the effect symbol 701 is executed.

(Example of production when a big hit is notified from SPSP reach production)
Next, the effect when the jackpot is notified as a result of the SPSP reach effect will be described. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when a jackpot is notified as a result of the SPSP reach effect. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a big hit is notified as a result of the SPSP reach effect.

The production is performed in the same manner as in FIGS. 55 (a) to 57 (p) until the time t12 is determined. As shown in FIG. 59, when the effect button 17 is pressed during the valid period of the operation for the effect button 17 at time t13 after the determined effect of FIG. 57 (p), or the operation for the effect button 17 is performed. If the valid period elapses without being performed, a success effect for notifying the jackpot is executed (FIG. 60 (q-2)). Specifically, by temporarily stopping the middle symbol of the same type as the left symbol and the right symbol (here, the "1" symbol), three similar effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped, and the jackpot is notified. At the time of this success effect, the effect image 705d is added to the middle symbol. At this point, the small symbol 702 continues the variable display effect. In addition, during the execution of the success effect, a BGM and a sound effect for notifying the jackpot are output. Instead of displaying the image shown in FIG. 60 (q-2), the success effect of notifying the jackpot may be executed by operating the movable effect device 73. In this case, the movable effect device 73 operates and appears on the front surface of the screen of the first image display device 70, and on the screen of the first image display device 70, an image (an image other than the effect symbol 701) for notifying the jackpot is displayed. For example, a rainbow-colored background image) is displayed. Further, during the successful effect, a lamp lighting effect may be performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and / or the panel lighting device 74 lights in a predetermined mode (rainbow-colored mode) suggesting a big hit.

Next, at time t14, the image is switched to the jackpot background image showing the jackpot, and the symbol enlargement effect is performed in which the three effect symbols 701 are enlarged and displayed over the entire screen (FIG. 60 (r-2)). In this symbol enlargement effect, three effect symbols 701 composed of enlarged numerical images are displayed in the center of the screen, and an effect image 705e is added around each effect symbol 701. In addition, the icon TI is deleted according to the execution of the symbol enlargement effect. Further, even during the symbol enlargement effect, the small symbol 702 continues the variable display effect, and the first number hold SHA and the second number hold SHB are also continuously displayed. In addition, during the symbol enlargement effect, a BGM and a sound effect for notifying the jackpot are output. Further, during the symbol enlargement effect, a lamp lighting effect may be performed in which the frame lighting device 10 and / or the panel lighting device 74 lights in a predetermined mode (rainbow-colored mode) suggesting a big hit.

Next, after the symbol enlargement effect, the three effect symbols 701 composed of numerical images are reduced, and at time t15, the three effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped (FIG. 60 (s-2)). During the temporary stop of the three effect symbols 701, the effect image 705f is added to each of the three effect symbols 701, so that a jackpot light emission effect such that the effect symbol 701 emits light is performed. Even during this jackpot light emission effect, the small symbol 702 continues the variable display effect. Further, the frame lighting device 10 and / or the panel lighting device 74 may continuously perform a lamp lighting effect of lighting in a predetermined mode (rainbow-colored mode).

After that (for example, 1 second after the end of the jackpot light emission effect), at time t16, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of jackpot (FIG. 60 (t-2)), and at the following time t17, the effect control unit 130. In response to receiving the variable stop command, the three effect symbols 701 are finally stopped, and the small symbol 702 is also stopped and displayed (FIG. 60 (u-2)).

In addition, unlike the case of loss, in the case of a big hit, the icon TI is not displayed during the stop display of the special symbol. Further, in the case of loss, the background image for SPSP reach is switched to the normal background image, and the mode of the effect symbol 701 returns to the normal mode including the numerical image and the character image. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the background image for SPSP reach is switched to the big hit background image, and the aspect of the effect symbol 701 is displayed in the form of a numerical image not including the character image. Even in the case of a jackpot, even if the mode of the effect symbol 701 is displayed in a normal mode including a numerical image and a character image while the effect symbol 701 is temporarily stopped in the mode of the jackpot (time t15 to t16). good. Further, the icon TI may be displayed while the effect symbol 701 is temporarily stopped in the mode of a big hit. In this case, even if the effect symbol 701 is finally stopped in response to the reception of the variable stop command, the effect of extinguishing the icon TI may not be performed. Further, in the case of a big hit, for example, after FIG. 60 (q-2), the screen returns to the normal background image, and the mode of the effect symbol 701 is displayed in the normal mode including the numerical image and the character image, and the icon TI and the icon TI and the icon TI and the character image are displayed. The first hold icon HA may be displayed.

Then, 0.5 seconds after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the main control unit 100 sends an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game to the effect control unit 130, and the opening effect starts in response to the reception of the opening command. (Time t18, FIG. 60 (v)).

Although not shown, if a big hit or a loss is notified as a result of the SP reach effect without developing into the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP reach effect is not performed after FIG. 57 (n). , The middle symbol stops and a big hit or a loss is notified. Alternatively, after FIG. 57 (m), the middle symbol is stopped and a big hit or a loss is notified without performing the blackout effect. Specifically, in the case of a big hit, as a result of the SP reach effect, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and three similar effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped to notify the big hit. While the three similar effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped, the small symbol 702 continues to be displayed in a variable manner, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed, and the periodic operation is maintained. After that, three similar effect symbols 701 are finally stopped and the small symbol 702 is stopped and displayed in response to the reception of the variable stop command, and during that time, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed. At this time, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI periodic operation may be continued, or the periodic operation may be stopped. Then, the opening effect is started and the jackpot game is started as in FIG. 60 (v). On the other hand, in the case of loss, as a result of the SP reach effect, the middle symbols of different types from the left and right are temporarily stopped and the loss is notified. While the three effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped in a lost manner, the small symbol 702 continues to display the variation, and the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed to maintain the periodic operation. After that, the background image for SP reach is switched to the normal background image, and the three effect symbols 701 are stopped in a lost manner and the small symbol 702 is stopped and displayed in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command. Meanwhile, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed. At this time, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI periodic operation may be continued, or the periodic operation may be stopped.

Further, although not shown, if a big hit or a loss is notified as a result of the N reach effect without developing into the SP reach effect, the SP reach effect is not performed after FIG. 56 (j). , The middle symbol stops and a big hit or a loss is notified. In this case, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are not hidden and are continuously displayed even while the jackpot or loss is notified. Specifically, in the case of a big hit, as a result of the N reach effect, the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and three similar effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped to notify the big hit. While the three similar effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped, the small symbol 702 continues to be displayed in a variable manner, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed, and the periodic operation is maintained. After that, three similar effect symbols 701 are finally stopped and the small symbol 702 is stopped and displayed in response to the reception of the variable stop command, and during that time, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed. At this time, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI periodic operation may be continued, or the periodic operation may be stopped. Then, the opening effect is started and the jackpot game is started as in FIG. 60 (v). On the other hand, in the case of loss, as a result of the N reach effect, the middle symbols of different types from the left and right are temporarily stopped and the loss is notified. While the three effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped in a lost manner, the small symbol 702 continues to display the variation, and the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed to maintain the periodic operation. After that, in response to the reception of the variable stop command, the three effect symbols 701 are finally stopped in a lost manner, and the small symbol 702 is stopped and displayed, during which the first hold icon HA and the icon TI are continuously displayed. .. At this time, the first hold icon HA and the icon TI periodic operation may be continued, or the periodic operation may be stopped.

When a variable pattern for executing the SPSP reach effect is selected, the SPSP reach effect may be performed after the N reach effect without going through the SP reach effect. Further, when the variable pattern OP4 for executing the special reach effect is selected, the special reach effect is performed after the N reach effect or the SP reach effect (or without performing the N reach effect or the SP reach effect). The special reach effect is an effect that suggests that a big hit game is performed (determination of the big hit game), and a symbol sequence (for example, "111" or "222") in which three similar effect symbols 701 are aligned is This is an effect in which three similar effect symbols 701 are stopped after the effect of moving in a predetermined direction (from top to bottom) is executed for a predetermined time.

The above effect is merely an example, and various effects suggesting the result of the jackpot determination may be performed while the special symbol is changing.

For example, if it is determined to be a big hit, the big hit game is performed after the N reach effect, the SP reach effect, or the effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of loss as a result of the SPSP reach effect (reach loss effect). A revival effect that suggests that it will be done may be performed. It suggests that a resurrection effect may occur before the reach loss effect (for example, during the reach effect or before the start of the reach effect), regardless of whether or not the resurrection effect is performed after the reach loss effect. A revival suggestion effect may be performed.

Further, for example, apart from the effects shown in FIGS. 57 (n) and 57 (p), an operation promotion effect for prompting an operation on the effect button 17 is performed, and when the operation is performed, a predetermined effect is executed. It may be possible. This predetermined effect may or may not be accompanied by an operation promotion effect, and the execution of the operation promotion effect is performed at a predetermined timing before the SP development effect or the SPSP development effect is performed. It may be restricted. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot that accompanies the transition to the probabilistic gaming state, the execution of the operation promotion effect at a predetermined timing before such SP development effect or SPSP development effect is performed is restricted. If the operation is performed with a predetermined probability without being performed and the operation for the effect button 17 is performed in response to the operation promotion effect, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect suggesting a probable change jackpot) is performed. Will be. That is, if the result of the jackpot determination is not a jackpot that accompanies the transition to the probabilistic gaming state, the execution of the operation promotion effect at the above predetermined timing is restricted (regulated), and the result of the jackpot determination shifts to the probabilistic gaming state. In the case of a big hit accompanied by, the execution of the operation promotion effect at the above-mentioned predetermined timing is not restricted (regulated). As a method of limiting the execution of the operation promotion effect at a predetermined timing, there are a method of setting the execution probability to zero in advance, a method of setting a relatively low execution probability in advance, and a method of limiting the execution by lottery. ..

Further, in the above description, the effect when the first special symbol changes in the normal gaming state has been described, but the same effect is performed when the second special symbol changes. It should be noted that when the second special symbol fluctuates, an effect different from that when the first special symbol fluctuates may be performed. Further, in the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state, an effect different from the above-mentioned effect is performed. It should be noted that the same effect as described above may be performed even in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state.

For example, in the probabilistic gaming state, the first period (the period until the change of the special symbol is performed the first time) after the special game is performed and the second period different from the first period (for example, for example). The variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol is different between the period (shorter than the first period)), and the content of the effect and / or the effect is different between the first period and the second period. The selection rate of the production may be different. For example, in the first period, when it is determined that the jackpot is lost in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol, the loss notification effect is executed after the operation promotion effect for prompting the operation of the effect button 17 is performed with the first probability. However, in the second period, if it is determined that the jackpot is lost in the jackpot determination related to the second special symbol, the loss notification effect is executed after the operation promotion effect is performed with a second probability higher than the first probability. You may.

Further, in the normal game state, the first stage effect (for example, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 and the variable display effect) is performed and the subsequent subsequent stage effect (for example, the reach effect) is performed, and information advantageous to the player is notified in the latter stage effect. In the probabilistic gaming state, the same pre-stage effect as in the normal game state is executed, and then the second-stage effect is performed. A second notification effect may be performed to notify.

In addition, the first pattern and the first pattern, in which the first stage effect (for example, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 and the variable display effect) is followed by the subsequent stage effect, and the information regarding the execution of the jackpot game is notified in the second stage effect. It is possible to execute the same post-stage effect as in the first pattern after executing the pre-stage effect different from that in the pattern of, and to execute the second pattern that informs the player of information advantageous to the player in the post-stage effect. You may. Further, when the symbol showing the result of the jackpot determination is stopped and displayed, the subsequent effect may be executed.

Further, for example, when the 10R probability variation jackpot is won, it is possible to execute an effect of a specific mode among a plurality of specific effects suggesting that the jackpot game is performed, and when the 4R probability variation jackpot is won, the effect can be executed. The effect of the specific aspect may be configured to be infeasible. Further, for example, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a specific mode of production regardless of whether the 10R probability variation jackpot is won or the 4R probability variation jackpot is won. Although it is possible to execute the effect of a specific aspect, it may not be possible to execute the effect of a specific aspect when the 4R probability variation jackpot is won.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, in the normal loss fluctuation, three effect symbols 701 of the first size are displayed on the first background image (background image of any of the effect modes A to C) at the start. An motion effect and a variable display effect were performed, and then a pre-stop motion effect was performed using three effect symbols 701 of the first size, and the three effect symbols 701 were stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of a loss in the jackpot determination, in the SP reach fluctuation and the SPSP reach fluctuation, three effect symbols 701 of the first size are displayed on the first background image and the operation at the start is performed. After performing the effect and performing the pre-stop operation effect using the two effect symbols 701 of the first size, the two effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped, and the second background image (background image corresponding to the SP reach effect) is performed. , Background image corresponding to SPSP reach effect) SP reach effect and SPSP reach effect are performed with two effect symbols 701 of the second size smaller than the first size temporarily stopped, and then the first Returning to the background image of 1, the three effect symbols 701 of the first size were stopped and displayed. That is, in the case of the normal loss variation, the SP reach variation, and the SPSP reach variation, the effect symbol 701 of the second size is used so that the start operation effect and the pre-stop operation effect are not performed. In another example of the effect, the effect symbol 701 of the second size may be used to perform the start operation effect and / or the pre-stop operation effect. Further, in the case where it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination, in the SP reach variation and the SPSP reach variation, the first size is on the first background image (for example, the background image corresponding to the effect mode A). Three effect symbols 701 are displayed to perform an operation effect at the start, two effect symbols 701 of the first size are used to perform a pre-stop operation effect, and then the two effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped to perform a second effect. The SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect are performed with the two effect symbols 701 of the second size smaller than the first size temporarily stopped on the background image of the above, and then different from the first background image. The three effect symbols 701 of the first size may be stopped and displayed on the third background image (background image corresponding to the effect mode B).

If it is determined to be a big hit, one or a definite effect suggesting that the big hit game will be performed before the N reach effect is performed, during the N reach effect, during the SP reach effect, or during the SPSP reach effect. It may be done multiple times. For example, as a definite effect, an effect in which a premier character appears, an effect of displaying a rainbow-colored image on the first image display device 70 and / or a second image display device 71, and an effect of causing the movable effect device 73 to emit light in rainbow colors. An effect of causing the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device, or the effect button 17 to emit light in rainbow colors may be performed. For example, when an operation promotion effect for prompting an operation on the effect button 17 is performed during the SPSP reach effect and the effect button 17 is pressed during the valid period of the operation, the cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70. .. The cut-in images include a blue cut-in image with a relatively low jackpot expectation, a red cut-in image with a relatively high jackpot expectation, and a rainbow-colored cut-in image suggesting that a jackpot game is performed. Yes, any one of these may be displayed in response to the pressing of the effect button 17. When the iridescent cut-in image is displayed, the effect button 17 is vibrated during the display of the iridescent cut-in image or before the iridescent cut-in image is displayed, and the blue cut-in image is displayed. Is displayed, the effect button 17 may not be vibrated during the display of the blue cut-in image or before the display of the blue cut-in image. Further, before the N reach effect is performed, during the N reach effect, during the SP reach effect, or during the SPSP reach effect, the jackpot game is performed without the operation promotion effect (without the operation on the effect button 17). A definite effect suggesting that it will be performed may be performed.

(Specific example of look-ahead production)
Next, a specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a start effect effect, a chance eye effect, and a look-ahead effect as a look-ahead effect (look-ahead continuous effect) performed over changes in a plurality of special symbols based on the result of the preliminary determination. , Zone effect may be executed. In some cases, only one of these three look-ahead continuous effects is executed, and in other cases, a plurality of them are executed. In the following, when it is determined in advance that the SPSP reach effect is to be performed in the preliminary determination, the look-ahead continuous effect is executed in the change before the change of the special symbol (look-ahead target change) in which the SPSP reach effect is performed. An example of production will be described.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart in which the look-ahead continuous effect is performed before the two changes of the look-ahead target change. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a continuation of the effect of FIG. 61, and is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart from one change before the look-ahead target change to the middle of the look-ahead target change. 63 to 66 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at each timing of FIGS. 61 and 62.

As shown in FIG. 61, it is assumed that three rights to determine the jackpot related to the first special symbol are reserved, and the first reserved icon HA3, which is the read-ahead target, is displayed in blue. At this time, when the first special symbol related to the two fluctuations of the look-ahead target starts to change at time t0, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702, and the sub first variation display The variable display using the device 81, the icon movement display effect of each first hold icon HA, and the like are started (FIG. 63 (a)). Actually, after the first special symbol starts to change, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702, the variation display using the sub first variation display 81, and the like are performed. Although it is started, the deviation of these start timings is as described above, so the description thereof is omitted here.

When the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 is started, the start effect effect in which the effect image 705a is added to each effect symbol 701 is performed at time t1 (FIG. 63 (b)).

Next, at time t2, the movement of each first hold icon HA is completed. At this point, the start operation effect and the start effect effect are continuing (FIG. 63 (c)).

Next, at time t3, the effect effect at the start ends (FIG. 63 (d)). At this point, the operation effect at the start is continuing. Further, at time t4, the start operation effect ends, and the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701 is executed (FIG. 63 (e)).

When the predetermined time elapses, the zone effect is started at time t5 (FIG. 63 (f)). At the start of the zone effect, a zone entry image suggesting the start of the zone effect is displayed. Further, in response to the start of the zone effect, the zone display image 707 indicating that the zone effect is being executed is displayed, and the background image changes from the normal background image to the zone background image. The zone display image 707 is, for example, an image in which the characters “zone” are written superimposed on a strip-shaped image that is long in the left-right direction, and the characters “zone” move from the left direction to the right direction. The zone display image 707 is arranged on the layer on the front side of the background image and on the layer on the back side of the effect symbol 701 (that is, the effect symbol 701 is preferentially displayed). The zone display image 707 may be arranged on the layer on the front side of the effect symbol 701. As the zone display image 707, there are images corresponding to each of the "weak zone" and the "strong zone", and here, the zone display image 707 corresponding to the weak zone is displayed. Further, the zone background image is, for example, an image in which a predetermined character operates, and as the zone background image, there is an image corresponding to each of the "weak zone" and the "strong zone". The zone display image 707 and the zone background image are displayed over the variation of one or more special symbols. Further, during the execution of the zone effect, the zone BGM is output instead of the normal BGM. It should be noted that the normal BGM may be output during the execution of the zone effect. In addition to the band-shaped zone display image 707, another image indicating that the zone effect is being executed may be displayed during the zone effect. Further, during the zone effect, the image of the hold icon or the pedestal of the icon (the image for forming the hold icon or the display area of the icon) may be switched to the image peculiar to the zone effect.

When the zone BGM is output during the execution of the zone effect, the normal BGM output is suppressed by continuing the normal BGM playback and reducing the volume of the normal BGM to zero or lower during the output of the zone BGM. May be good. Further, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect for displaying a character suggesting the result of the jackpot determination, and it may be possible to output a character's voice (suggestion effect sound) during the suggestion effect. On the premise that such a suggestion effect can be executed both during the zone effect and during the zone effect, when the suggestion effect is executed during the zone effect, the character's voice is higher than when the zone effect is not in progress. It may be output at a low volume, may be output at a volume lower than that of the zone BGM, or may not be output.

Next, at time t6, the icon change effect for the first hold icon HA2 related to the change in the look-ahead target is started (FIG. 64 (g)). For example, the first hold icon HA2 changes from "blue" to "red" depending on the icon change effect. The icon change sound may be output along with the icon change effect. The icon change sound is a sound corresponding to the display mode of the hold icon after the change, and may be the same sound as the winning sound output when the game ball is won to the starting port.

Next, the left symbol and the right symbol perform the pre-stop operation effect at different timings, and then temporarily stop. Then, at time t7 when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from time t6, the third middle symbol performs a pre-stop operation effect (FIG. 64 (h)), and at time t8, the middle symbol temporarily stops. (Fig. 64 (i)).

Immediately after the middle symbol temporarily stops (for example, 0.5 seconds later), at time t9, the look-ahead chance eye effect using the three effect symbols 701 is started (FIG. 64 (j)). The look-ahead chance-eye effect is an effect in which the effect image 705h is displayed around each effect symbol 701, and is a combination that does not show a big hit, and is a specific combination (for example, a combination of even-numbered symbols or an odd-numbered symbol). This is an effect in which the effect symbol 701 of (combination) is temporarily stopped to notify the loss. The look-ahead chance effect is an effect that suggests that there is a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the subsequent fluctuations of the special symbol. It should be noted that the look-ahead chance eye effect includes a first aspect (a combination of even-numbered symbols to which a blue effect image 705h is added) and a second aspect in which a jackpot expectation is higher than that of the first aspect. (A mode in which a combination of odd-numbered symbols and a red effect image 705h is added). Further, a stop sound may be output in the pre-reading chance eye production. This stop sound may be different between the first aspect and the second aspect.

At the time t10 when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the time t9, the look-ahead chance eye effect ends (the effect image 705h is erased), and the three effect symbols 701 showing the loss are temporarily stopped (FIG. 64 (FIG. 64). k)). Then, at time t11, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the three effect symbols 701 are finally stopped in response to the reception of the variable stop command (FIG. 64 (l)). When the three effect symbols 701 are finally stopped, the stop sound whose output is started ends with the start of the look-ahead chance eye effect. Specifically, the output of the stop sound is finished before the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the stop sound may be being output even at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed and the timing when the three effect symbols 701 are finally stopped.

Actually, after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the main stop of the effect symbol 701, the stop display of the small symbol 702, the stop display of the sub first variation indicator 81, etc. are performed, but these timings are performed. Since the deviation is as described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

As described above, based on the result of the preliminary determination, the pre-stop operation effect and the temporary stop may be performed in order for the three effect symbols 701, and then the pre-reading chance eye effect may be executed. For example, the left symbol performed a pre-stop motion effect and then temporarily stopped, then the right symbol performed a pre-stop motion effect and then temporarily stopped, and finally the middle symbol performed a pre-stop motion effect. After that, it temporarily stops. Immediately after the third middle symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect image 705h is simultaneously added to the three effect symbols 701. It should be noted that not only the case where the three effect symbols 701 perform the pre-stop operation effect and the temporary stop in order, but also the case where at least two of the three effect symbols 701 perform the pre-stop operation effect and the temporary stop at the same time may be performed. .. Even in this case, when the pre-reading chance eye effect is executed, the effect image 705h is added to the three effect symbols 701 at the same time. For example, the left symbol and the right symbol simultaneously perform the pre-stop motion effect and the temporary stop, the middle symbol performs the pre-stop motion effect and the temporary stop, and then the effect image 705h is simultaneously applied to the three effect symbols 701. May be added. Further, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may simultaneously perform the pre-stop operation effect and the temporary stop, and then the effect image 705h may be added to the three effect symbols 701 at the same time.

At time 12 0.5 seconds after time t11, the variation display of the next special symbol (before one variation of the look-ahead target) is started (FIG. 65 (m)). Specifically, similarly to the above, the start operation effect and the like using the effect symbol 701 are started, and the start effect effect is executed.

Next, at time t13, the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701 is started (FIG. 65 (n)), and when a predetermined time elapses, each of the three effect symbols 701 is stopped (at different timings or at the same time). Preliminary operation effect and temporary stop are performed (immediately before time t14, FIG. 65 (o)).

Then, at time t14, the second look-ahead chance eye production is started (FIG. 65 (p)). In the second look-ahead chance eye effect, an effect different from the first look-ahead chance eye effect may be performed. For example, the first look-ahead chance-eye effect may be performed in the first aspect, and the second look-ahead chance eye effect may be performed in the second aspect with a higher expectation of a big hit.

At time t15, the pre-reading chance eye effect ends (effect image 705h is erased), and the three effect symbols 701 showing the loss are temporarily stopped (FIG. 65 (q)). Then, at time t16, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the three effect symbols 701 are finally stopped in response to the reception of the variable stop command (FIG. 65 (r)).

Further, at time 17 after 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the variation display (variation of the look-ahead target) of the next special symbol is started (FIG. 66 (s)). Similar to the above, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 is started, and the start effect effect is executed. Here, the mode of the start-time effect effect in the look-ahead target variation may be a mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher than that of the start-time effect effect before the two fluctuations and before the one fluctuation, or the mode of the same expectation. May be good.

Next, at time t18, the N reach effect is started (FIG. 66 (t)). The zone background image is displayed as the background image until the N reach effect. Further, according to the start of the N reach effect or before the start of the N reach effect, the mode of the zone effect changes from the "weak zone effect" to the "strong zone effect" with a higher expectation of a big hit. Along with this change, the characters in the zone display image 707 also change to the "strong zone". The timing may change from "weak zone effect" to "strong zone effect".

Then, after the SP development effect is performed, the SP reach effect is started at time t19 (FIG. 66 (u)). The background image changes from the zone background image to the SP reach background image according to the start of the SP reach effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 66 (u), the horizontally long zone display image 707 was displayed until the N reach effect, but it changes to the vertically long zone display image 707 according to the start of the SP reach effect. ..

When the SP reach effect is completed, the SPSP reach effect is started at time t20 via the SPSP development effect (FIG. 66 (v)). The background image for SP reach changes to the background image for SPSP reach according to the start of the SPSP reach effect. Further, the zone display image 707 is hidden according to the start of the SPSP reach effect. Subsequent SPSP reach effects are the same as above, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The zone display image 707 may be displayed even during the SPSP reach effect. Further, in the above effect example, even when the zone effect is executed, the background image for SP reach is displayed during the SP reach effect, and the background image for SPSP reach is displayed during the SPSP reach effect. In the effect example, when the zone effect is executed, the zone background image may be displayed during the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the effect symbol performs the start motion effect according to the start of the change of the special symbol, the variation display is started, and the start motion effect is being executed even before the start of the start motion effect. Also, a background effect using a background image (operation of a zone background image, operation of a normal background image) is performed. For this reason, the background is focused on before the start of the variation display of the special symbol, but by performing the operation effect at the start using the effect symbol according to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the effect symbol is focused on the background. It is possible to draw attention to and appeal that the special symbol starts to change. Further, when the background effect is performed based on the result of the preliminary determination, the player can expect the subsequent fluctuation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the background image is used even when the effect symbol performs the motion effect at the start according to the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation display is started, and the motion effect at the start of the effect symbol is started. The background production that was there is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the production pattern from the state where the background is focused and the background is focused.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the pre-stop operation effect using the effect symbol is performed, the effect symbol and the small symbol are stopped, and the background using the background image is used both while the effect symbol is stopped and the small symbol is stopped. The production is being performed. Therefore, when the effect symbol is stopped, the effect symbol can be focused on, and after the effect symbol is stopped, the background can be focused on.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the pre-stop motion effect using the effect symbol is performed, the effect symbol and the small symbol are stopped, and the background effect using the background image is performed even during the pre-stop operation effect of the effect symbol. It has been. Therefore, when the effect symbol is stopped, the effect symbol can be focused on, and after the effect symbol is stopped, the background can be focused on.

(Example of production when command is not received)
Next, an effect example when the effect control unit 130 cannot receive a command from the main control unit 100 will be described. For example, the effect control unit 130 cannot normally receive a command from the main control unit 100 when a connection failure between the main control unit 100 and the effect control unit 130 occurs or due to some external influence (for example, jamming radio waves). In some cases.

Hereinafter, a case will be described in which the effect control unit 130 cannot receive the command from the main control unit 100 when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the first hold number U1 is “3”. do. In addition, based on the third hold (hereinafter referred to as "look-ahead target"), the look-ahead continuous effect (zone effect) is being executed, and in the change before the change of the look-ahead target, the change pattern of the special symbol is set. It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern HP1 or HP2 of the normal loss without the reach effect is selected.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the effect control unit 130 cannot receive a command from the main control unit 100 during the variation display of the special symbol. 68 and 69 are diagrams showing an example of the effect at each timing of FIG. 67.

As shown in FIG. 67, at time t0, the effect symbol 701 is executing the variable display effect, and the small symbol 702 and the sub-first variable display 81 are also performing the variable display. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is "3" (the LED on the left side is blinking and the LED on the right side is lit). The number of holds indicated by the sub-first hold indicator 83 is "3" (the LED on the left side is blinking and the LED on the right side is lit). Further, the number of holds indicated by the first hold icon HA and the first number hold SHA is also "3". Further, the zone background image is displayed as the background image, and the zone display image 707 indicating that the zone effect is being executed is displayed.

It is assumed that during the execution of such an effect, at time t1, the effect control unit 130 cannot receive a command from the main control unit 100. Even in this case, the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701 is continued. In addition, the variation display effect of the small symbol 702 and the variation display of the sub-first variation display 81 are continuously performed. In addition, zone production is also continuously executed. In addition, various effects determined at the start of this fluctuation or before the start are also executed at predetermined timings.

Specifically, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect symbol 701 performs the pre-stop operation effect and the temporary stop in the order determined at the start of the change. For example, if it is decided to stop in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol at the start of the change of the special symbol, the left symbol performs the pre-stop motion effect according to the passage of time, and then temporarily stops. Then, after the right symbol performs the pre-stop operation effect, it temporarily stops.

Then, at time t2, the middle symbol performs a pre-stop operation effect (FIG. 68 (b)). At time t3, when the pre-stop operation effect by the middle symbol ends, the middle symbol temporarily stops (FIG. 68 (c)). If it is decided to execute the look-ahead chance eye effect in this fluctuation, the look-ahead chance eye effect is executed.

Next, at time t4, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (FIG. 68 (d)). Specifically, the main control unit 100 stops and displays the first special symbol, and transmits a variable stop command to the effect control unit 130. However, the effect control unit 130 cannot receive the fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 100. Therefore, even after the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (even after the timing when the effect control unit 130 receives the variable stop command in a normal state), the temporary stop (swing) of the three effect symbols 701 is continued. .. In addition, the variable display of the small symbol 702 is continuously executed. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 also continues the fluctuation display. In addition, the icon TI is also continuously displayed. In addition, the three first hold icons HA are also continuously displayed. In addition, zone production is also continuously executed. BGM is also continuously output.

Next, at time t5, the first hold number U1 is reduced from "3" to "2" in the main control unit 100, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started (FIG. 68 (e)). That is, the change two times before the look-ahead target is started. Specifically, the main control unit 100 starts the variation display of the first special symbol and transmits the variation start command to the effect control unit 130. However, the effect control unit 130 cannot receive the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 100. Therefore, even if the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the variation display effect at the start using the effect symbol 701, the variation display effect using the small symbol 702, and the variation display of the sub first variation display 81 are displayed. Not started. On the other hand, the temporary stop (swing) of the three effect symbols 701 is continued, the variation display effect of the small symbol 702 is continuously executed, and the sub-first variation display 81 also continues the variation display. Further, the icon movement display effect of the first hold icon HA is not started, and the number of holds indicated by the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first number hold SHA remains "3". In addition, the icon TI is also continuously displayed. In addition, the zone effect is continuously executed, and the BGM is continuously output.

In addition, in this fluctuation (before two fluctuations of the look-ahead target), even if the execution of the effect effect at the start is determined in advance based on the result of the preliminary determination for the look-ahead target, at the start time according to the start of this fluctuation. No effect effect is performed. Further, even if the execution of the look-ahead chance eye effect is determined in advance in this variation, the look-ahead chance eye effect is not executed in this variation.

Next, at time t6, it is assumed that the effect control unit 130 has returned to a state in which the command from the main control unit 100 can be received. Even in this case, the temporary stop (swing) of the three effect symbols 701 is continued, and the variable display of the small symbols 702 is also continuously executed. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 also continues the fluctuation display. Further, the number of holds indicated by the sub first hold indicator 83, the first hold icon HA, and the first number hold SHA is also "3". In addition, the zone effect is continuously executed, and the BGM is also continuously output.

After that, at time t7, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the effect control unit 130 receives the fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 100 (FIG. 68 (f)). In response to the reception of the variable stop command, the three effect symbols 701 are finally stopped, the small symbol 702 is stopped and displayed, and the sub first variable display 81 is also stopped and displayed. At this point, the number of holds indicated by the sub-first hold indicator 83, the first hold icon HA, and the first number hold SHA remains "3". Further, in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command, the disappearance effect of the icon TI is executed. As described above, the effect of extinguishing the icon TI is an effect of gradually extinguishing the icon TI over a plurality of frames. In addition, the zone effect is continuously executed, and the BGM is also continuously output.

Then, at the next time t8, the first hold number U1 is reduced from "2" to "1" in the main control unit 100, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started (FIG. 69 (g)). .. That is, the fluctuation immediately before the look-ahead target is started. Further, the effect control unit 130 receives the variation start command from the main control unit 100, and in response to the reception of the variation start command, starts the operation effect at the start using the effect symbol 701 and uses the small symbol 702. The variable display effect that was used is started. Further, the fluctuation display is started on the sub first fluctuation display 81. Further, the number of holds indicated by the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "1" (the left LED changes to a state in which the left LED is turned on and the right LED changes to a state in which the right LED is turned off). Further, the number of holdings indicated by the first number holding SHA changes from "3" to "1". The change in the number of holds indicated by the first digit hold SHA is performed in one frame. That is, the first digit hold SHA is updated from "3" to "1" at the next frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation start command. In addition, the zone effect is continuously executed, and the BGM is also continuously output.

Further, at time t8, one first hold icon HA disappears, and two first hold icon HAs start shift movements (FIG. 69 (g)). That is, the extra first hold icon HA out of the three first hold icon HAs displayed at this time disappears, and the remaining two first hold icon HAs shift and move, respectively.

Next, at time t9, the start effect effect for each effect symbol 701 is executed (FIG. 69 (h)). Here, since it was determined in advance to execute the start-time effect effect as the look-ahead continuous effect in the variation immediately before the look-ahead target based on the result of the pre-determination for the look-ahead target, the start-time effect effect is executed. To.

Then, at time t10, the start operation effect ends, and the variable display effect using the effect symbol 701 is executed (FIG. 69 (i)). After that, the production proceeds as described above.

In FIG. 69 (g), when the extra first hold icon HA is extinguished and the remaining two first hold icon HAs are shifted and moved, the first hold farthest from the icon display area 704 is held. The icon HA may be extinguished, or the first reserved icon HA closest to the icon display area 704 may be extinguished.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the leftmost first hold icon HA3 is erased when one extra first hold icon HA is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 70, in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command, the leftmost first hold icon HA3 is extinguished, and the remaining first hold icons HA2 and HA1 are replaced with the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI. The movement is started in each display area (FIG. 70 (g)). The leftmost first hold icon HA3 is erased in one frame and is not displayed in the next frame (FIG. 70 (g-2)). That is, in this case, the extinction effect that gradually extinguishes the first hold icon HA3 over a plurality of frames is not performed. On the other hand, the movement of the remaining first hold icons HA2 and HA1 is the icon movement executed in response to the above-mentioned normal icon movement display effect (the change start command is received without missing the command from the main control unit 100). It is moved by the display effect). That is, the first hold icons HA2 and HA1 are moved by animation over a plurality of frames (for example, 15 frames; 0.5 seconds). Then, the first hold icon HA2 and HA1 are displayed as the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI, respectively, after a plurality of frames (FIG. 70 (g-3)).

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the rightmost first hold icon HA1 is erased when one extra first hold icon HA is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 71, in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command, the rightmost first hold icon HA1 is extinguished (FIG. 71 (g)), and the remaining first hold icons HA3 and HA2 are first held, respectively. It is instantaneously moved (in one frame) to the display area of the icons HA2 and HA1 (FIG. 71 (g-2)). That is, in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command, the rightmost first hold icon HA1 disappears in one frame, and the remaining first hold icons HA3 and HA2 are 1 in the display area of the first hold icons HA2 and HA1, respectively. Move by frame. In other words, the extinction effect of gradually extinguishing the rightmost first hold icon HA1 over a plurality of frames is not performed, and the icon movement display effect of moving the first hold icons HA3 and HA2 over a plurality of frames is not performed. After that, the momentarily moved first hold icons HA2 and HA1 are moved to the display areas of the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI by the icon movement display effect (animation over a plurality of frames) (FIG. 71 (g). -3)).

In both the case shown in FIG. 70 and the case shown in FIG. 71, when the extra first hold icon HA is extinguished, the extinction effect of extinguishing the extra first hold icon HA is performed over a plurality of frames. You may. In this case, the extra first hold icon HA may be extinguished in a shorter time (that is, with a smaller number of frames) than the extinction effect of the icon executed in response to the normal reception of the fluctuation stop command. Then, the extra first hold icon HA may be extinguished at the same time (that is, with the same number of frames).

Further, in the case shown in FIG. 71, the remaining first hold icons HA3 and HA2 may be moved in a plurality of frames instead of being moved to the display areas of the first hold icons HA2 and HA1 in one frame, respectively. good. That is, the remaining first hold icons HA3 and HA2 may be moved by the icon movement display effect over a plurality of frames. In this case, the moving speed from the first holding icons HA3 and HA2 to the first holding icons HA2 and HA1 may be faster than the moving speed in the normal icon movement display effect. That is, if the hold icon is not displayed in the normal position because the command from the main control unit 100 is not normally received, when returning each hold icon to the normal position, the normal icon movement display effect is used. You may also move the hold icon in a short amount of time. The movement speed from the first hold icons HA3 and HA2 to the first hold icons HA2 and HA1 when the command from the main control unit 100 is not normally received is the same as the movement speed in the normal icon movement display effect. But it may be.

Further, in the case shown in FIG. 71, after moving the remaining first hold icons HA3 and HA2 to the display areas of the first hold icons HA2 and HA1 (in one frame or a plurality of frames), the first after movement. The hold icons HA2 and HA1 may be moved to the display areas of the first hold icon HA1 and the icon TI, respectively, at a speed faster than that of the normal icon movement display effect (that is, in a short time).

In this way, if there is an inconsistency between the first hold number U1 managed by the main control unit 100 and the hold number of the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol managed by the effect control unit 130, the fluctuation starts. The inconsistency is resolved as the command is received. The number of holds indicated by the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the first number hold SHA changes instantaneously to a normal value.

On the other hand, regarding the first hold icon HA, when the first hold icon HA is excessively displayed, the extra displayed first hold icon HA disappears. Specifically, "1" is added to the number obtained by subtracting the number of first hold icons (U1) stored in the main control unit 100 at this time from the number of first hold icon HA currently displayed (HA_N). The first hold icon HA of the number obtained by subtracting (“HA_N-U1-1”) disappears, and the remaining (U1 + 1) first hold icon HA is moved and displayed by the icon movement display effect.

When the first hold icon HA is extinguished, the first hold icon HA may be extinguished instantaneously in one frame, or may be extinguished by animation over a plurality of frames. When the first reserved icon HA is extinguished by animation, the first reserved icon HA may be extinguished in a shorter time than the extinction of the icon TI due to the extinction effect of the icon TI described above.

Here, when the first hold icon HA is displayed in a special mode, the effect control unit 130 cannot receive the command from the main control unit 100, so that the number of holds and the effect control in the main control unit 100 If an inconsistency occurs with the number of holds in the unit 130, and if the change of the special symbol corresponding to the first hold icon HA of the special aspect is not completed, it is special even after the inconsistency is resolved. The aspect is maintained. For example, when the first hold icon HA3 is displayed in blue immediately before time t8 (FIG. 68 (f)), it is a relatively short time (one frame or a plurality of frames) at the timing when time t8 is reached. The rightmost first hold icon HA1 disappears, and at the same time, the remaining blue first hold icon HA3 and white first hold icon HA2 are displayed in the display areas of the first hold icon HA2 and the first hold icon HA1, respectively. It moves in a relatively short time (one frame or multiple frames). Then, the blue first hold icon HA2 and the white blue first hold icon HA1 move to the right by the icon movement display effect (animation over a plurality of frames), and the first hold icon HA1 (blue). ) And the icon TI (white), respectively.

Further, for example, it is assumed that when the first hold icon HA3 is displayed in a special mode, the effect control unit 130 cannot receive the command from the main control unit 100, and the state continues. In this case, according to the passage of time, the change of the current special symbol ends in the main control unit 100, and the change of the next special symbol starts. When the time further elapses, in the main control unit 100, all the fluctuations of the special symbol held at the time when the effect control unit 130 becomes unable to receive the command from the main control unit 100 are terminated. During this period, in the first image display device 70, the swing of the effect symbol 701 and the variable display of the small symbol 702 are continuously performed, and the first hold icon HA3 is continuously displayed in a special mode. Further, the first hold icons HA2, HA1 and the icon TI are also continuously displayed, and the first number hold SHA is maintained at "3". Further, the fluctuation display is continued in the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the number of holds indicated by the sub first hold display 83 is maintained as “3”. After that, when four game balls are won in the first starting port 45, the variation display of the first special symbol is started, and three variations of the first special symbol are suspended. At this time, the first reserved number U1 in the main control unit 100 and the reserved number of the first special symbol in the effect control unit 130 match. In this state, when the effect control unit 130 returns to a state in which the command from the main control unit 100 can be received, the effect control unit 130 then receives the fluctuation stop command from the main control unit 100. In response to the reception of this variable stop command, the main stop of the effect symbol 701 and the stop display of the small symbol 702 are performed, and the disappearance effect of the icon TI is performed. Then, in response to the start of the change of the next first special symbol, the first hold icon HA3 of the special aspect is moved by the icon movement display effect and is displayed as the first hold icon HA2. That is, the first hold icon HA of the special aspect displayed before the effect control unit 130 becomes unable to receive the command from the main control unit 100 is a special symbol corresponding to the first hold icon HA of the special mode. Even if the fluctuation of is completed, if the number of holds at the time of returning to the state where the command from the main control unit 100 can be received is matched (matched) between the main control unit 100 and the effect control unit 130, the return is made. It is maintained even after it is done. In this case, the display mode of the first hold icon HA does not reflect the accurate look-ahead result. That is, even if the first hold icon HA is displayed in a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit, even if the display mode changes with respect to the first hold icon HA, the effect with a high expectation is achieved. It is not done, and it may be a normal loss fluctuation.

In another embodiment, when the first hold icon HA is displayed in a special mode, the effect control unit 130 cannot receive the command from the main control unit 100, so that the main control unit 100 cannot receive the command. When an inconsistency occurs between the number of holds and the number of holds in the effect control unit 130, and the inconsistency is resolved, the first hold icon HA may be in the normal mode. For example, when the first hold icon HA3 is displayed in blue immediately before time t8 (FIG. 68 (f)), it is a relatively short time (one frame or a plurality of frames) at the timing when time t8 is reached. The extra leftmost blue first hold icon HA3 disappears, and at the same time, the remaining white first hold icons HA2 and HA1 move to the right by the icon movement display effect (animation over multiple frames). , The first hold icon H1 and the icon TI are displayed. Even if the remaining first hold icons HA2 and HA1 are displayed in a special mode, they may be changed to the normal mode when the extra first hold icon HA3 disappears.

Further, when the number of the first hold icon U1 of the actual first special symbol is larger than the number of the first hold icon HA currently displayed, these are matched according to the reception of the fluctuation start command. Be controlled. Specifically, the number obtained by subtracting the number of first hold icons (U1) stored in the main control unit 100 at this time from the number of first hold icon HA currently displayed (HA_N) is less than "1". If, the number of the first hold icon HA is insufficient, so that the first hold icon HA is increased. For example, when only the first hold icon HA1 is displayed and the first hold number U1 included in the fluctuation start command is "2", the first hold icons HA3 and HA2 are additionally displayed, which is insufficient. A minute icon is added. Then, the additionally displayed first hold icons HA3 and HA2 are moved to the display areas of the first hold icons HA2 and HA1, respectively, and the first hold icon HA1 is moved to the display area of the icon TI. When the first hold icons HA3 and HA2 of this shortage are additionally displayed, they are added with a smaller number of frames (that is, in a shorter time) than the icon additional display effect performed when the game ball is won at the normal starting port. It may be displayed, or it may be additionally displayed with the same number of frames (that is, at the same time).

In the above, after the effect control unit 130 cannot receive the command from the main control unit 100 during the change display of the special symbol, it returns to the state where the command can be received with the special symbol change stop and change start. I explained the case. When the effect control unit 130 receives the fluctuation start command according to the fluctuation start of the special symbol, and then receives the next fluctuation start command without receiving the fluctuation stop command, the control is as follows.

That is, immediately before receiving the fluctuation start command, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the effect symbol 701 is temporarily stopped (swinged), the small symbol 702 executes the variation display effect, and the sub first variation indicator is displayed. 81 is executing the variable display. In addition, the zone effect is continuously executed, and the BGM is also continuously output.

In response to receiving the fluctuation start command in this state, the icon TI disappears. The disappearance of the icon TI is performed (instantaneously) in one frame. The disappearance of the icon TI may be performed by an animation having a plurality of frames. For example, the disappearance of the icon TI in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command may be performed by an animation having a smaller number of frames than the disappearance effect of the icon TI executed by normally receiving the fluctuation stop command. .. Further, the disappearance of the icon TI in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command may be performed by the disappearance effect of the icon TI executed by normally receiving the fluctuation stop command.

Further, in response to the reception of the variation start command, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701 is started. At this time, the effect symbol 701 starts the operation effect at the start from the temporarily stopped state without going through the main stop.

Further, in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command, the small symbol 702 executes the fluctuation display effect without stopping the display. That is, the small symbol 702 executes (continues) the variable display effect from the state in which the variable display effect is being performed, without going through the stop display.

Further, in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 executes the fluctuation display without stopping the display. That is, the sub-first variation display 81 executes (continues) the variation display from the state in which the variation display is performed without going through the stop display.

Further, in response to the reception of the fluctuation start command, the first hold icon HA is between the first hold number U1 in the main control unit 100 and the hold number (N1) of the first special symbol in the effect control unit 130 as described above. If there is an inconsistency in the above, after disappearing and momentarily moving in one frame (or moving in a short time in a plurality of frames), shift movement is performed by the icon movement display effect.

In the above, an example of the effect when the effect control unit 130 cannot receive the command from the main control unit 100 during the execution of the pre-reading continuous effect (zone effect) has been described, but the case where the pre-reading effect is not executed is described. But the same is true.

Further, in the above, the case where the command cannot be received during the execution of the normal loss variation (variation pattern HP1 or HP2) has been described, but the reach variation (for example, the variation pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect, the SPSP reach effect) has been described. Even if the command cannot be received during the execution of the variation pattern corresponding to), the variation effect is continued in the same manner. For example, when a variable effect with a variable pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect is executed, the effect progresses to N reach effect, SP reach effect, and SPSP reach effect according to the passage of time, and as a result of the SPSP reach effect. The three effect symbols 701 are temporarily stopped to notify whether or not they are big hits. When the effect control unit 130 does not receive the variation stop command, the temporary stop period of the three effect symbols 701 indicating loss or jackpot is extended, and the variation display of the small symbol 702 and the sub-first variation indicator are extended. The period of the variation display of 81 is also extended. In this case, the BGM for SPSP reach is stopped in response to the end of the SPSP reach effect (temporary stop of the three effect symbols 701), and is not output during this extension period. Then, in response to the reception of the next fluctuation stop command, the effect symbol 701 is finally stopped, and the small symbol 702 and the sub first fluctuation display 81 are also stopped and displayed.

In the above embodiment, when the command from the main control unit 100 becomes unreceivable and then receivable, the number of holds managed by the main control unit 100 and the effect control unit If there was an inconsistency with the number of holds managed by 130, it was controlled to resolve these inconsistencies in response to the reception of the variable stop command. In another embodiment, it may be controlled to eliminate these inconsistencies in response to the reception of the variable start command. Specifically, the effect control unit 130 determines whether or not an inconsistency has occurred based on the first hold number and the second hold number included in the fluctuation start command, and if the inconsistency has occurred, it is insufficient. Add a minute hold icon, remove an extra hold icon, update the first number hold SHA and the second number hold SHB, sub-first hold indicator 83 and sub-second hold indicator 84. Update the display.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130 cannot normally receive the command from the main control unit 100, even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect symbol 701 swings while being temporarily stopped. do. As a result, the result of the jackpot determination can be continuously notified to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130 cannot normally receive the command from the main control unit 100, the small symbol 702 continues the variable display effect even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the sub-number 1 The fluctuation display 81 continues the fluctuation display. As a result, the player's expectations can be continued. Further, since the small symbol 702 and the sub-first variation display 81 continue the variation display for a long time, the player can be made aware of the abnormal state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130 cannot normally receive the command from the main control unit 100, even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the icon TI is continuously displayed without disappearing. To. As a result, the player's expectations can be continued. Further, since the icon TI remains displayed for a long time, the player can be made aware of an abnormal state.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the effect control unit 130 cannot normally receive the command from the main control unit 100, the variable effect during execution (variable display effect of the effect symbol 701, pre-stop operation effect, The advance notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are continuously performed, and the look-ahead effect (for example, zone effect) is also executed. As a result, the player's expectations can be continued.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130 returns to the receivable state after the command from the main control unit 100 cannot be normally received, the effect symbol is responded to by the next fluctuation start command. A variation effect using 701 is executed, and a look-ahead effect (start effect effect) whose execution is determined in advance in the variation is also executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation stop command is received while the predetermined effect is being executed (for example, the icon TI is being displayed), the predetermined effect is terminated (the icon TI is extinguished). If the fluctuation stop command is not received, the predetermined effect is continued, and if the next command (next fluctuation start command) is received, the predetermined effect being executed is terminated, and another effect (new) is received. Move to the relevant icon). That is, on the premise that the predetermined effect is terminated in response to the reception of the first command during the execution of the predetermined effect, and another effect is executed in response to the reception of the second command, the first command is executed. Even if the second command is received without receiving, the predetermined effect is terminated and another effect is executed. As a result, even if the first command is not received, the effect can be executed while maintaining consistency by receiving the second command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation start command corresponding to the variation start of the special symbol to be read ahead is not received, the variation effect (for example, the effect symbol 701 is used) during the variation of the special symbol to be read ahead. Even if the operation effect at the start, the variation display effect, the variation display of the small symbol 702, the variation display of the sub first variation indicator 81, the movement of the first hold icon, etc.) are not executed, during the variation of the special symbol, A look-ahead effect can be executed. As a result, the player's expectations can be maintained even if the variable effect cannot be executed.

When the look-ahead effect is executed without executing the variable effect, the look-ahead effect is continuously executed. Further, as a mode of the look-ahead effect, there are a look-ahead display (zone display image 707) and a look-ahead sound (zone BGM), and when the look-ahead effect is executed without executing the variable look-ahead effect, the look-ahead display is displayed. (For example, a change from a horizontally long zone display image 707 to a vertically long zone display image 707, a change in the color of the zone display image 707, a change from an image showing a weak zone to an image showing a strong zone, etc. ) Although it is possible, for the look-ahead sound, there may be a case where the output mode changes when the mode of the look-ahead display changes and a case where the output mode does not change.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a look-ahead continuous effect over the variation of a plurality of special symbols, and when a variation start command corresponding to the variation start of the special symbol is received, the variation effect (operation at the start of the effect symbol 701). While executing the effect, variable display effect, etc.), the look-ahead continuous effect (for example, start effect effect) is executed, but if the variable start command is not received, the variable effect and the variable display during the variable display of the special symbol are executed. Execution of look-ahead continuous production is restricted (suppressed). Even if the execution of the variable effect and the look-ahead continuous effect is restricted (suppressed), if the variable start command corresponding to the start of the change of the next special symbol is received, the restricted (suppressed) look-ahead continuous effect (at the start) Execute effect production). As a result, even if the fluctuation start command cannot be received, the look-ahead continuous effect can be executed, and the player can be expected.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation effect is not executed without receiving the variation start command corresponding to the variation start of the special symbol, the first look-ahead effect (for example, zone effect, first) is performed during the variation display of the special symbol. 1 Executes the effect using the hold icon HA, etc.), but does not execute the second look-ahead effect (for example, the start effect effect, the look-ahead chance eye effect). As a result, even if the fluctuation start command cannot be received, the pre-reading effect that can be executed can be executed, and the player can be expected.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variable stop command is not received during the temporary stop of the three effect symbols 701, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 701 is extended, and the BGM is extended even during the extension of the temporary stop period. Is continuously output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production from being interrupted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation stop command is normally received, the BGM is continued until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the stop display of the special symbol, and the BGM is stopped after the elapse of the predetermined time. do. On the other hand, if the variable stop command is not normally received, the BGM is not stopped and continues even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop display of the special symbol (start of extension of the temporary stop period of the three effect symbols 701). And output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production from being interrupted.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation stop command is not received during the fluctuation display effect of the small symbol 702 (or the sub-first variation display 81), the variation display effect of the small symbol 702 is extended. BGM is continuously output even during the extension of the variable display effect. As a result, the production can be continued.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation stop command is not received during the display of the icon TI, the display of the icon TI is extended, and the BGM is continued even during the extension of the display of the icon TI. And output. As a result, the production can be continued.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation stop command is not received in the normal loss fluctuation, the temporary stop period of the three effect symbols 701 is extended, and the BGM is continuously output during this extension period. For example, if the normal BGM is being output, the normal BGM output is continued, and if the zone BGM is being output, the zone BGM output is continued. On the other hand, for example, in the SPSP reach fluctuation or the SP reach fluctuation, when the fluctuation stop command is not received, the temporary stop period of the three effect symbols 701 is extended, and the BGM or SP for SPSP reach is extended during this extension period. Do not continuously output the reach BGM. As a result, even if the fluctuation stop command cannot be received, the effect can be continued in the case of normal loss fluctuation, while the SP reach effect is substantially completed when the SP reach effect is performed, for example. It is possible to make the player aware of what he is doing and to prevent the expectation from being excessively sustained.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the look-ahead effect (for example, zone effect) is being executed and the variable stop command is not received during the temporary stop of the three effect symbols 701, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 701 is not received. Is extended, and the pre-reading effect being executed is continued even during the extension of this temporary suspension period. As a result, the look-ahead effect can be continued, and the player's expectations can be sustained.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the look-ahead effect (for example, zone effect) is being executed and the variation stop command is not received during the variation display effect of the small symbol 702 (or the sub-first variation indicator 81). Extends the execution period of the variation display of the small symbol 702 (or the sub-first variation display 81), and continues the pre-reading effect being executed even during this extension period. As a result, the look-ahead effect can be continued, and the player's expectations can be sustained.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the look-ahead effect (for example, zone effect) is being executed and the fluctuation stop command is not received during the display of the icon TI, the display period of the icon TI is extended. Even during this extended period, the pre-reading effect that is being executed will continue. As a result, the look-ahead effect can be continued, and the player's expectations can be sustained.

It should be noted that the stage of the effect mode of the look-ahead effect is not changed in the extension period of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 701, the extension period of the variable display effect of the small symbol 702, and the extension period of the display of the icon TI. For example, if the zone effect is being executed, the mode of the zone effect is not changed from the weak zone to the strong zone. Further, when the first hold icon HA is displayed in the first special mode (for example, blue), it is not changed to the second special mode (for example, red). This makes it possible to control the look-ahead effect.

Further, in the extension period of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 701, the extension period of the variable display effect of the small symbol 702, and the extension period of the display of the icon TI, it is an opportunity to change the stage of the effect mode of the look-ahead effect. Do not execute the trigger effect (the effect that makes the player expect the effect mode of the look-ahead effect to change (or the possibility)). This makes it possible to prevent the player from expecting too much.

Further, the BGM (zone BGM) for the look-ahead effect can be output even during the extension period of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 701, the extension period of the variable display effect of the small symbol 702, and the extension period of the display of the icon TI. Is. As a result, it is possible to appeal to the player that the look-ahead effect is continued, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation stop command is normally received, the disappearance effect of the icon TI is performed by animation over a plurality of frames in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command. On the other hand, if the icon TI is continuously displayed without receiving the fluctuation stop command and the next command (next fluctuation stop command, next fluctuation start command, or customer waiting command) is received, the icon is displayed. The TI is erased in a relatively short time (eg, 1 frame). That is, the disappearance period of the icon TI when the next command is received without receiving the fluctuation stop command is shorter than the disappearance period of the icon TI when the fluctuation stop command is normally received. As a result, if the fluctuation stop command is not normally received, the icon TI can be deleted immediately.

The disappearance period of the icon TI when the next fluctuation start command (or fluctuation stop command) is received without normally receiving the fluctuation stop command, and the next customer waiting without normally receiving the fluctuation stop command. It may be the same as the disappearance period of the icon TI when the command is received.

Further, during the extension period of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 701, the extension period of the variable display effect of the small symbol 702, and the extension period of the display of the icon TI, a notice effect suggesting that a big hit game is performed (a notice effect ( The final production) will not be started, but the advance notice production that was started before the extension period will continue to be executed during the extension period. Further, before the extension period, the advance notice effect (final effect) can be executed at a plurality of timings, and may be continuously executed during the extension period regardless of which timing is started. In addition, there are a first effect (for example, sound) and a second effect (light emission in a predetermined color) in the advance notice effect (final effect), and the first effect ends before the extension, but the second effect is It may be viable continuously during the extension period.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the volume can be adjusted by using the cross key 19 during the variation display of the special symbol. Normally, the cross key 19 is pressed when the variation of the special symbol is stopped and the variation is started. The volume adjustment used is suppressed (regulated). If the variable stop command is not normally received during the temporary stop of the effect symbol 701, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 701 is extended. During the extension of this temporary stop period, the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 19. Further, the BGM or the zone BGM is normally output even during the extension of this period, but the SP reach BGM and the SPSP reach BGM are not output during the extension of this period.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the fluctuation stop command is not normally received during the fluctuation display of the small symbol 702 (or the sub-first fluctuation display 81), the fluctuation display period of the small symbol 702 is extended. During the extension of this variable display period, the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 19. Further, the BGM or the zone BGM is normally output even during the extension of this period, but the SP reach BGM and the SPSP reach BGM are not output during the extension of this period.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the fluctuation stop command is not normally received during the display of the icon TI, the display period of the icon TI is extended. During the extension of this display period, the volume can be adjusted using the cross key 19. Further, the BGM or the zone BGM is normally output even during the extension of this period, but the SP reach BGM and the SPSP reach BGM are not output during the extension of this period.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the variable stop command is not normally received during the temporary stop of the effect symbol 701, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 701 is extended, and then the next variable start command is received. The effect symbol 701 does not actually stop, but starts a variable effect (starting operation effect) from the temporary stop position. As a result, even if there is an abnormality in which the fluctuation stop command is not received, it is possible to return to the normal effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the next fluctuation start command is received during the extension period of the fluctuation display of the small symbol 702 (or the sub-first fluctuation display 81) due to the failure to normally receive the fluctuation stop command. In this case, the small symbol 702 (or the sub-first fluctuation display 81) does not stop and continues the fluctuation display. As a result, even if there is an abnormality in which the fluctuation stop command is not received, it is possible to return to the normal effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the next fluctuation start command is received during the extension of the display period of the icon TI due to the failure to normally receive the fluctuation stop command, the icon TI is deleted (for example, 1). (Erase momentarily with a frame), and then move the first hold icon HA1 to display the icon TI by the icon movement display effect. As a result, even if there is an abnormality in which the fluctuation stop command is not received, it is possible to return to the normal effect.

Further, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 701 due to the fact that the variable stop command was not normally received during the temporary stop of the effect symbol 701, the effect control unit 130 receives the power-on command from the main control unit 100. If this is the case, the effect symbol 701 is made invisible and the power-on image is displayed.

Further, during the extension period of the fluctuation display of the small symbol 702 (or the sub first fluctuation display 81) due to the failure to normally receive the fluctuation stop command, the power-on command from the main control unit 100 is issued to the effect control unit. When the 130 receives the command, the small symbol 702 is made invisible and a power-on image is displayed.

Further, if the effect control unit 130 receives the power-on command from the main control unit 100 during the extension of the display period of the icon TI due to the failure to normally receive the fluctuation stop command, the icon TI is not visible. While making it possible, let the power-on image be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of holdings in the effect control unit 130 (the number of holdings in the effect control unit 130) is larger than the number of holdings (U1) stored in the main control unit 100 due to the failure to normally receive the command from the main control unit 100. When the number of the first hold icon HA, the number of the first number hold SHA, etc. becomes large (here, "HA_N"), the surplus (HA_N-U1-1) is received according to the reception of the next fluctuation start command. ), The shift movement of the first hold icon is not performed, but the shift movement of the required amount (U1 + 1) of the first hold icon is performed. As a result, even if there is an abnormality in which the fluctuation stop command is not received, it is possible to return to the normal effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first hold number U1 stored in the main control unit 100 and the effect control unit 130 due to the fact that the command from the main control unit 100 is not normally received during the execution of the look-ahead effect. If there is a discrepancy with the number of hold of the first special symbol (the number of the first hold icon HA, the number of the first number hold SHA, etc.) in, during the execution of the change effect according to the reception of the next change start command. , Look-ahead effect can be executed. When the next fluctuation start command is received, the pre-reading effect being executed may be terminated.

(Display example when the power is cut off during the variable display of the special symbol)
Next, an example of the effect when the power is cut off during the variable display of the special symbol will be described. Hereinafter, a case where the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and the first holding number U1 is “1” will be described.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the power is cut off during the variation display of the first special symbol. 73 to 75 are diagrams showing an example of display at each timing of FIG. 72.

As shown in FIG. 72, at time t0, the first special symbol is variable display, the effect symbol 701 is executing the variable display effect, and the small symbol 702 and the sub first variable display 81 are also variable display. Inside (Fig. 73 (a)). Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is "1", and the hold number indicated by the sub first hold indicator 83 is also "1". Further, the first hold icon HA1 in a special mode (blue) is displayed, and the icon TI is also displayed. The first digit hold SHA is "1". Further, a normal background image is displayed as a background image, and a normal BGM is output.

Next, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off at time t1. When the power is cut off, all the LEDs of the main information display 59 including the first special symbol display 60 and the first special symbol hold display 63 are turned off, and the sub first variable display 81 and the sub first hold are turned off. All LEDs of the sub information display 80 including the display 83 are also turned off. Further, the first image display device 70 also stops operating (FIG. 73 (c)). Even if the power is cut off, the information stored in the main RAM 100c of the main control unit 100 is maintained for a certain period (for example, 24 hours).

After a predetermined time has elapsed from time t1, the power supply is restored without performing the setting change operation or the RWM clear operation, and the above-mentioned initial setting process is performed, so that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the first special are performed at time t2. It is assumed that the display of the symbol hold display 63 is resumed. Here, the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted from the state immediately before the power is cut off.

That is, immediately before the time t1 when the power is cut off (for example, 1 msec before the power failure), for example, the third and fourth LEDs from the left of the first special symbol display 60 are lit (FIG. 73). (B)) When the LED of the first special symbol display 60 is turned on for the first time after the power is restored at time t2, the third and fourth LEDs from the left are turned on (FIG. 73 (d)). As described above, each LED of the first special symbol display 60 changes its lighting state every 32 ms. If the power is cut off at a timing 32 ms after the 3rd and 4th LEDs are turned on, the 4th and 5th LEDs will be turned on first after the power is restored.

At the time t2 when the variation display of the first special symbol is resumed, the first image display device 70 includes the effect symbol 701, the small symbol 702, the hold icon, the icon, the first number hold SHA, and the second number hold SHB. The effect image related to the game is not displayed (FIG. 73 (d)). In this case, an image indicating that the gaming machine 1 is being started may be displayed.

After that, at time t3, a power restoration image corresponding to the power restoration command from the main control unit 100 is displayed (the figure on the left side of FIG. 74 (e)). Here, the power recovery command includes information for identifying whether the user is in the waiting state, the variable display of the special symbol, or the jackpot game. Further, along with the power recovery command, a command indicating the current game state, the first hold number U1 and the second hold number U2 is transmitted from the main control unit 100. Images are generated based on these commands.

Specifically, as shown in the figure on the right side of FIG. 74 (e), a background image according to the gaming state, three predetermined effect symbols 701 and small symbols 702, and a number corresponding to the first hold number U1. The effect image including the first hold icon HA, the image of the first number hold SHA corresponding to the first hold number U1, and the image of the second number hold SHB corresponding to the second hold number U2 is the image / sound control unit. Generated internally at 140.

Even during the variable display of the first special symbol, the three predetermined effect symbols 701 and the small symbol 702 are stopped. Further, regardless of the symbol displayed before the power is cut off, a combination of three predetermined fixed effect symbols (for example, "123") is drawn. In any of the effect modes, a predetermined combination of three fixed effect symbols (for example, "123") is drawn. For example, in the normal gaming state, a predetermined effect mode (for example, effect mode A) is set among a plurality of effect modes A to C (stages A to C), and an effect symbol having a display mode corresponding to the predetermined effect mode is set. Is drawn. Further, in the probabilistic gaming state, the effect symbol of the display mode corresponding to the effect mode D is drawn. Regardless of the effect mode, the combination of the three effect symbols at the time of power restoration is a combination of common numbers (“123”).

Further, the first hold icon HA is the same one as before the power is cut off, but the display mode is the normal mode. That is, the first hold icon HA1 displayed in a special mode before the power is cut off becomes a normal mode after the power is restored. Further, the first hold icon HA1 performs the above-mentioned periodic operation. In addition, the icon is not displayed (generated) in the internally generated effect image. Further, the background image is a background image according to the gaming state. The layers (priority) of the images such as the background image, the effect symbol 701, and the hold icon are the same as the layers in the normal game, the background image is arranged on the innermost side, and the effect symbol is on the front side of the background image. 701 etc. are arranged.

A power recovery image corresponding to the power recovery command is arranged on the layer on the front side of the generated effect image, and the power recovery image is displayed on the first image display device 70 (left side of FIG. 74 (e)). figure). That is, the effect image including the generated effect symbol 701 and the like is not displayed on the first image display device 70 and is not visually recognized by the player. The power supply restoration image is an image showing that the power supply has been restored, and is an image for causing the player to wait until a normal effect image including the effect symbol 701 or the like is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74 (e), the fluctuation display (blinking of the LED) using the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is not performed while the power restoration image is displayed. On the other hand, while the power restoration image is displayed, the sub-first hold indicator 83 displays according to the first hold number U1. That is, since the first hold number U1 is "1" here, the LED on the left side of the two LEDs of the sub first hold indicator 83 is lit, and the first hold number related to the first special symbol is lit. It shows that U1 is "1". Since the second hold number U2 is "0", the two LEDs of the sub second hold indicator 84 are turned off, and the second number hold SHB in the internally generated production image is also "0". It becomes.

While the power restoration image is displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol continues, and the game itself is in progress. For example, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45 at time t4, the first reserved number U1 in the main control unit 100 changes to "2", and the jackpot determination related to the first special symbol is suspended.

According to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, the display of the sub first holding indicator 83 changes to "2", and the first number holding SHA also changes to "2" (FIG. 74 (FIG. 74). f)). In addition, the first hold icon HA is also added. Specifically, an icon additional display effect (additional display animation) of the first hold icon HA2 is performed. Since the power recovery image is superimposed and displayed on the foremost layer, the added first hold icon HA2 is not visible to the player at this point. Further, the first reserved icon HA2 to be added is added in a special mode when it is determined in the icon change effect determination process to be added in a special mode. Here, it is assumed that the first hold icon HA2 is added in a normal manner. A winning sound may be output according to the winning of the starting port. By outputting the winning sound, the player can be made to recognize that the starting opening has been won even if the icon addition display effect of the first hold icon HA2 is not visible. In addition, the player can be made to recognize the display mode of the first hold icon HA to be added by the winning sound.

Next, when the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has elapsed at time t5, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 (FIG. 74 (g)). The period during which the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off is not counted as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Therefore, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing when the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol at time t1 has elapsed after the variation display is restarted at time t3.

At time t6, the effect control unit 130 receives a variable stop command in response to the stop display of the first special symbol. The power recovery image is erased in response to the reception of this fluctuation stop command, and the effect image including the effect symbol 701, the small symbol 702, the first hold icon HA, etc. is displayed on the first image display device 70 (FIG. 75 (FIG. 75). h)).

Next, at time t7, the variable display of the first special symbol is started (FIG. 75 (i)). At this point, the effect control unit 130 has not received the fluctuation start command from the main control unit 100, and the effect symbols 701, small symbols 702, and the like are still displayed as stopped.

Next, at time t8, in response to the effect control unit 130 receiving the variation start command of the first special symbol, the start operation effect using the effect symbol 701, the variation display of the small symbol 702, and the sub-first variation The variable display using the display 81 is started (FIG. 75 (j)). Further, the icon movement display effect of the first hold icon HA is started, and the display of the sub first hold display 83 and the first number hold SHA is reduced from "2" to "1".

In this way, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off during the variable display of the special symbol and then restored, the game proceeds while the power restoration image is displayed until the variable special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, in response to the stop display of the special symbol, the power restoration image is erased, and the normal effect image including the effect symbol 701 and the like is displayed. At the time of power restoration, a power restoration command, a command indicating the number of holdings, and a command indicating the game state are transmitted from the main control unit 100 to the effect control unit 130. Based on these commands, the effect control unit 130 recognizes that the power is restored, the number of holdings, and the game state during the variable display of the special symbol, and generates and displays an image corresponding to the power restoration.

Specifically, the power restoration image is displayed at the time of power restoration, and the hold icon is drawn in the lower layer even while the power restoration image is being displayed. However, the hold icon becomes invisible due to the power recovery image. In addition, if the hold of the jackpot judgment related to the special symbol (hold of the change of the special symbol) increases while the power recovery image is displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the increase is also drawn, but it is not visible due to the power recovery image. It becomes. Further, while the power restoration image is being displayed, the effect symbol 701 and the small symbol 702 are drawn while being stopped even if the special symbol is variablely displayed, but the power restoration image makes it invisible.

Further, when the power is turned off when the hold icon is displayed in the special mode and then restored, the image of the hold icon in the normal mode is drawn. The power recovery image is drawn on the upper layer, and the hold icon in the normal mode becomes invisible. Then, at a predetermined timing (timing of stop display of the special symbol), the power restoration image is erased and the hold icon in the normal mode is displayed.

Further, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port while the power restoration image is being displayed, a hold icon of a special aspect may be additionally drawn based on the result of the preliminary determination. The power recovery image is drawn on the upper layer, and the hold icon of the special mode becomes invisible. Then, at a predetermined timing (timing of stop display of the special symbol), the power restoration image is erased and the hold icon of the special mode is displayed.

If a game ball wins a prize at the start port while the power recovery image is being displayed, a hold icon is additionally drawn and a winning sound is output. As a result, the added hold icon is drawn on the lower layer of the power recovery image, and even if it is not visible, the player can easily recognize that the starting port has won a prize. Further, when the added hold icon is a hold icon of a special aspect, a winning sound corresponding to the special mode may be output. In this case, even if the hold icon is not visible, the player can be made aware that the hold icon of the special aspect has been added.

Further, even while the power restoration image is being displayed, the hold icon is drawn and the hold icon is made to perform the above periodic operation. As a result, even when the power restoration image is changed to the normal effect image, the effect can be started smoothly.

By such control, when the power recovery image is erased (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed), the effect image according to the current state (game state, number of holds, change state of special symbol, etc.) is immediately displayed. And the production can be resumed smoothly at the start of the next special symbol change. Further, by displaying the power supply restoration image until the change of the current special symbol is completed, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as compared with the case where the effect symbol 701 is variablely displayed at the time of power restoration. That is, when the variable display of the effect symbol 701 is to be executed when the power is restored, it is necessary to accurately determine what kind of effect is to be executed at what timing, and the timing of the stop display of the special symbol and the effect symbol 701. If the timing of the production using is not matched, the player will be confused. This can be prevented by displaying the power restoration image until the change of the current special symbol is completed.

In the above embodiment, when the effect control unit 130 receives the fluctuation stop command, the power restoration image is deleted and a normal effect image including the effect symbol 701 and the like is displayed. Such control may be performed according to another command instead of the fluctuation stop command. For example, the power restoration image may be erased and the normal effect image may be displayed in response to the reception of the next fluctuation start command by the effect control unit 130. Further, in response to receiving the customer waiting command, the power restoration image may be deleted and the normal effect image may be displayed.

Further, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off while waiting for customers and then the power is restored, the power restoration image shown in FIG. 74 (e) is not displayed, or the power restoration image is displayed only for a moment. After being displayed, a normal effect image is displayed. In this case, the three effect symbols 701 and the small symbols 702 are displayed in a predetermined combination of fixed numbers.

Further, when the power of the gaming machine 1 is cut off during the jackpot game and then the power is restored, the power restoration image shown in FIG. 74 (e) is not displayed, or the power restoration image is displayed only for a moment. After being displayed, an image related to the effect during the jackpot game is displayed.

(Other features when power is restored and when power is turned on)
The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has the following features when the power is restored from the power cutoff or when the power is turned on.

For example, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power switch is pressed while the effect button 17 is pressed, the store setting, the RTC setting, the eco mode setting, or the debugging is performed before the gaming machine 1 becomes playable. A menu screen for starting in mode is displayed. The store setting is a setting for a game clerk to input store information. The RTC setting is a date or time setting. In addition, the eco-mode setting is a setting of whether or not to set the eco-mode to suppress power consumption. When the effect control unit 130 receives the power-on command while the menu screen is displayed, the menu screen is made invisible and the power-on image is displayed. Further, when the effect control unit 130 receives the power restoration command while the menu screen is being displayed, the menu screen is made invisible and the power restoration image is displayed.

Further, the first movable member 73a is movable in the first region, and the second movable member 73b is movable in the second region overlapping with the first region. The movable member 73a executes the first movable accessory effect that moves from the initial position to the first effect position that overlaps with the display area of the effect symbol 701, and the second movable member 73b displays the effect symbol 701 from the initial position. It is configured to perform a second movable accessory effect that moves to a second effect position that overlaps the area. The first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b usually stand by at the initial position. When the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are on standby at the initial position, the power is cut off, and then when the power is restored, the power restoration image is displayed and the first movable member 73a is displayed from the initial position. And the initial operation for operating the second movable member 73b is performed. If the power is cut off during the operation of the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b may not be in the initial positions when the power is restored. If the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are not in the initial positions at the time of power restoration, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are returned to the initial positions at different timings, and the power restoration image is obtained. Is displayed. After returning the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b to the initial positions, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are moved at different timings to the same effect position and effect as when the above-mentioned movable accessory effect is executed. The initial operation of moving to the initial position is performed after moving in the mode. During the initial operation, the power recovery image is displayed. By performing such control, it is possible to confirm the operation of a plurality of movable members having overlapping movable ranges without interfering with the plurality of movable members even if they are not in the initial positions when the power is restored.

Further, the hold of the change of the first special symbol is displayed by using the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the sub first hold indicator 83, and the first hold icon HA. While the display mode of the first hold icon HA can be changed, the display mode of the first special symbol hold display 63 and the sub first hold display 83 cannot be changed. At the time of power restoration, the display of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 and the sub first hold indicator 83 is restarted before the display of the first hold icon HA is restarted. Similarly, regarding the hold of the change of the second special symbol, the second special symbol hold indicator 64 and the sub second hold indicator 84 are made before the display of the second hold icon HB is resumed at the time of power restoration. Is displayed again. Therefore, the number of holds can be notified as soon as possible when the power is restored.

Further, while the power restoration image is being displayed, the volume value image (light amount value image) corresponding to the volume adjustment operation (or light amount adjustment operation) is also hidden. Further, when the game ball wins a prize at the starting port while the power restoration image is being displayed, the volume value image (light intensity value image) is not displayed in the same manner. In this case, the volume adjustment (or light amount adjustment) itself according to the volume adjustment operation (or light amount adjustment operation) may be possible. The volume value image (light amount value image) corresponding to the volume adjustment operation (or light amount adjustment operation) is drawn internally, but may be made invisible by the power restoration image. Similarly, when the effect control unit 130 is in a state where it can receive a command from the main control unit 100 while the power restoration image is being displayed, the volume value image (light intensity value image) is not displayed.

In addition, after the power is restored, the power restoration image is deleted in response to the reception of the fluctuation stop command, but the display of the volume value image (light intensity value image) is suppressed (hidden) for a predetermined period from the reception of the fluctuation stop command. Will be). If there is a hold on the fluctuation of the special symbol, the volume value image (light intensity value image) is hidden from the reception of the next fluctuation start command until a predetermined period elapses, and the operation effect at the start of the effect symbol 701 is performed. After that, the volume value image (light amount value image) can be displayed.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment may have the following features.

Of the multiple reach effects with different jackpot expectations, if the look-ahead effect (zone effect, start effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, icon change effect) is executed for the N reach effect with low expectation, look-ahead effect. The jackpot expectation of the N reach effect may be higher than when the effect is not executed. For example, when the look-ahead effect is not executed, the expectation of the N reach effect is "1%", while when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expectation of the N reach effect is increased to "5%". You may let me. Further, when a specific look-ahead effect is executed among a plurality of look-ahead effects, the jackpot expectation of the N reach effect may be higher than when the specific look-ahead effect is not executed. With such a configuration, even if the reach effect has a low expectation, the player can expect a big hit when the look-ahead effect is executed. The look-ahead effect may be executed before the start of the N reach effect, or the look-ahead effect may be executed after the start of the N reach effect. In this case, the former may have a higher (or lower) jackpot expectation than the latter. Regarding the jackpot expectation of the SPSP reach production, such a change in the expectation may or may not be present.

In addition, the execution ratio of each effect differs between the case where it is determined to be a big hit and the case where it is determined to be a loss. Specifically, when it is determined to be a big hit, the ratio of executing N reach after executing the look-ahead effect is higher than the ratio of executing N reach without executing the look-ahead effect (for example, icon change effect). Is configured to be high. Further, when it is determined to be a big hit, the ratio of executing the SP reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect is higher than the ratio of executing the N reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect. There is. Further, when it is determined to be a big hit, the ratio of executing the SP SP reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect is higher than the ratio of executing the SP reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect. There is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a loss, the ratio of executing the SP reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect is lower than the ratio of executing the N reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect. There is. Further, when it is determined that there is a loss, the ratio of executing the SP SP reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect is lower than the ratio of executing the SP reach effect after executing the look-ahead effect. There is.

Further, the hold icon can be changed to any of blue, red, and gold, and the icon can also be changed to any of the same blue, red, and gold, and the icon can be changed from a predetermined color to a specific color ( For example, when it changes to gold), it may be possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the change related to the icon develops into an SPSP reach effect having a higher expectation than the SP reach effect. In this case, the SPSP reach effect is executed after the suggestion effect, but when the icon has a specific color, the SPSP reach effect may be executed regardless of whether or not the suggestion effect is executed. When the hold icon of the specific color changes to the specific color while being displayed as the hold icon and the hold icon of the specific color is displayed as the icon, the suggestion effect may not be executed. Further, even if the suggestion effect is more easily executed when the hold icon changes to a specific color while the icon is being displayed than when the hold icon changes to a specific color and is displayed as the icon. good.

Further, for example, in the variation of the special symbol due to the SP reach effect or the variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP reach effect, the icon is more likely to change before the execution of the N reach effect than during the execution of the N reach effect. As a result, it is possible to expect a big hit before the start of the N reach production, and it is possible to expect the development to the SP reach production and the SPSP reach production having a high expectation of the big hit.

Further, the hold icon and the icon can be changed at a plurality of timings, and the second period in which the icon can be changed is longer than the first period in which the hold icon can be changed. In addition, in the fluctuation in which the reach effect (N reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is executed, the hold icon is changed before the N reach effect is started than during the execution of the N reach effect. There is a high probability of letting it. As a result, the hold icon can be easily changed before the reach effect is executed, and the player's interest can be directed to the hold. Further, after the reach effect is started, the hold icon is less likely to change, and conversely, the icon is more likely to change, so that the player's interest can be directed to the change (current change).

Further, the number of stages of the hold icon or the display mode of the icon may be different depending on the effect mode. For example, the first effect mode in which the hold icon can be displayed in the display mode of the first stage number (for example, blue, red, gold) and the first background image is displayed, and the second stage number display mode. There may be a second effect mode in which the hold icon can be displayed in a display mode (for example, blue, red, gold, rainbow) and a second background image is displayed. Further, the icon change suggestion effect that triggers the execution of the icon change effect (suggesting that the icon may change) may be executed before the icon change effect that changes the hold icon. The content of the icon change suggestion effect may differ depending on which stage the hold icon changes from which stage among the display modes of the plurality of stages. For example, the mode of the icon change suggestion effect when changing from blue to red and the mode of the icon change suggestion effect when changing from blue to gold may be different.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment may perform a definite effect (a definite effect indicating that the jackpot is confirmed) that suggests that the jackpot game is executed during the execution of the variable effect.

For example, as a definite effect, a definite sound suggesting that the jackpot game is executed may be output. The confirmation sound is output regardless of the operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17. After the confirmation sound is output, the operation promotion effect is executed, and the first notification effect pattern for notifying the jackpot by operating the movable effect device 73 in response to the operation for the effect button 17 and the operation promotion without outputting the confirmation sound. There may be a second notification effect pattern in which the effect is executed and the movable effect device 73 is operated in response to the operation of the effect button 17, so that the jackpot is notified. When the second notification effect pattern is executed, no definite sound is output even after the movable effect device 73 is operated.

In addition, the first reach effect pattern that executes the SP reach effect from the N reach effect and further executes the SPSP reach effect, and the second reach that executes the SPSP reach effect without executing the SP reach effect from the N reach effect. There is an effect pattern, and the final effect can be executed depending on whether the first reach effect pattern is executed or the second reach effect pattern is executed. You may let me. Further, if an operation promotion effect for urging the operation of the effect button 17 is executed and the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period of the operation of the effect button 17 in the operation promotion effect, there is a possibility that a big hit game is performed. It may be possible to execute a notice effect suggesting that there is. Although the finalized effect can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable effect, the finalized effect may not be executed during the valid period of the operation.

Further, if an operation promotion effect for urging the operation of the effect button 17 is executed and the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period of the operation of the effect button 17 in the operation promotion effect, there is a possibility that a big hit game is performed. It may be possible to execute a notice effect suggesting that there is, and it may be possible to execute a definite effect accompanied by an output of a definite sound suggesting that the jackpot game is executed. The execution rate of the final effect and / or the execution rate of the advance notice effect differs depending on whether the movable effect device 73 is activated or not, and the final effect can be executed at a plurality of timings during the variable effect. , The final effect may not be executed during the above valid period (during the operation promotion effect).

In addition, it is possible to execute a definite effect that suggests that the jackpot game is executed and a suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed before the decision effect immediately before the notification of whether or not the jackpot is performed. May be. The suggestion effect includes a first suggestion effect and a second suggestion effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the first suggestion effect, and the case where the second suggestion effect is executed rather than the case where the first suggestion effect is executed. Is configured so that the movable effect device 73 can be easily operated. Further, if an operation promotion effect for urging the operation of the effect button 17 is executed and the operation for the effect button 17 is performed during the valid period of the operation of the effect button 17 in the operation promotion effect, there is a possibility that a big hit game is performed. It is possible to carry out the suggestive effects. When it is determined to be a big hit and the reach effect is executed, it is better when the operation promotion effect is executed during the reach effect than when the operation promotion effect is executed before the reach effect is executed. The effect button 17 tends to change to a protruding state in the operation promotion effect.

Further, when it is determined to be a big hit, the first fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation time or the second fluctuation pattern of the second fluctuation time longer than the first fluctuation time can be selected, and the first fluctuation pattern can be selected. If is selected, the first definite effect may be executed with the first probability, and if the second variation pattern is selected, the second definite effect may be executed with the second probability. When executing the second final effect, the operation effect at the start is performed using the effect symbol of the first aspect (the aspect having the first size and the character is added), and during the execution of the predetermined effect, the operation effect is performed. A variable display effect is performed using the effect symbol of the second aspect (second size smaller than the first size), and then the first aspect or the third aspect (first size and character is added). The pre-stop motion effect may be performed using the effect symbol (a mode in which it is not performed). On the other hand, when the first final effect is executed, the pre-stop operation effect may be performed using the effect symbol of the first aspect or the third aspect without displaying the effect symbol of the second aspect. Here, when the first final effect is executed, it may be easier for the player to perform a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player than when the second final effect is executed. On the contrary, when the second final effect is executed, it may be easier for the player to perform a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player than when the first final effect is executed.

Further, when the effect control unit 130 can receive a command from the main control unit 100, the fluctuation period of the effect symbol 701 in the variation in which the loss as a result of the reach effect is notified (reach loss variation) is the variation in which the jackpot is notified. It is longer than the swing period of the effect symbol 701 in (big hit fluctuation). When the effect control unit 130 cannot receive the command from the main control unit 100, the swing period of the effect symbol 701 in the reach loss variation may be shorter than the swing period of the effect symbol 701 in the jackpot variation. ..

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has the following features. Specifically, in a gaming machine in which a special symbol stops after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, the effect symbol performs an motion effect (movement in a predetermined direction or a character's motion) at the start at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. Start. Specifically, after the first cycle fluctuation is completed, the effect symbol starts the start motion effect (movement in a predetermined direction or movement of the character).

Further, in the gaming machine in which the special symbol stops after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, the variation display using the small symbol and the sub-first variation display is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle variation. Specifically, after the first unit change (lighting of the first LED) in the first cycle fluctuation is completed, the fluctuation display using the small symbol and the sub-first fluctuation display is started.

Further, in the gaming machine in which the special symbol stops after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, the hold display is updated (decreased display) at a timing different from the cycle fluctuation start timing. Specifically, the shift movement (movement animation) of the hold icon is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. Further, after the first unit change (lighting of the first LED) in the first cycle fluctuation is completed, the shift movement (movement animation) of the hold icon is finished, so that the update of the hold display is finished.

Further, in the gaming machine in which the special symbol stops after a plurality of cycle changes, the change from the hold icon to the icon is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle change. Further, after the first unit change (lighting of the first LED) in the first cycle fluctuation is completed, the change from the hold icon to the icon is completed.

Further, in a gaming machine in which the special symbol stops after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, a gaming sound (for example, a BGM, a fluctuation start sound, and other warning sounds that announce the result of a jackpot determination) are performed at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. Starts the audible output of.

Further, in the gaming machine in which the special symbol stops after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, the background effect using the background image is started at a timing different from the start timing of the cycle fluctuation. In addition, the background effect using the background image is executed before the start of the first cycle fluctuation and during the execution of the cycle fluctuation.

Further, in a gaming machine in which the special symbol stops after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation. Before the end of the last cycle fluctuation of the special symbol, the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.

Further, in a gaming machine in which the special symbol stops after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, the small symbol and the sub-first fluctuation display display the stop display at a timing different from the end timing of the cycle fluctuation.

In addition, in a gaming machine in which the special symbol stops after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, the hold icon performs a periodic operation (effect operation, for example, swinging to the left or right, rotation, etc.) during the execution of the cycle fluctuation and after the end of the cycle fluctuation. is doing.

Further, in the gaming machine in which the special symbol stops after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, the disappearance effect (disappearance animation) of the icon is terminated at a timing different from the end timing of the last cycle fluctuation. Specifically, after the last cycle fluctuation is completed, the disappearance effect of the icon is ended.

In addition, in a gaming machine in which the special symbol stops after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, the game sound (production BGM, stop sound in the look-ahead chance eye production, and other temporary stops of the production symbol) whose output was started before the start of the last cycle fluctuation. The temporary stop sound output at the time and the main stop sound output at the time of the main stop) end at a timing different from the end timing of the last cycle fluctuation. Further, the audible output of the game sound (temporary stop sound, etc.) whose output was started before the start of the last cycle fluctuation ends before the end of the last cycle fluctuation.

Further, in the gaming machine in which the special symbol is stopped after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, a predetermined gaming sound (directed BGM or the like) is audibly output during the execution of the cycle fluctuation and after the end of the last cycle fluctuation.

Further, in the gaming machine in which the special symbol stops after a plurality of cycle fluctuations, the background effect using the background image is executed during the execution of the cycle fluctuation and after the end of the last cycle fluctuation.

In addition, the game machine 1 can display a numerical image (first number holding SHA, second number holding SHB) indicating the number of holdings of the right to determine the jackpot (variation of the special symbol) and a holding icon, and can display the holding icon of the special symbol. At the start of the fluctuation, it is possible to change the display mode of the numerical image (for example, change from "4" to "3") and then change the display mode of the hold icon (for example, change from 4 to 3). .. The display mode of the numerical image does not change if there is no new prize at the starting port during the change of the special symbol. On the other hand, the hold icon repeatedly executes a periodic operation in which the display mode is changed from the first state to the second state at a predetermined cycle even if there is no new prize at the starting port during the change of the special symbol. It is possible to do. Further, a plurality of hold icons can be displayed, and the plurality of hold icons are synchronized (or substantially synchronized) to perform periodic operation.

When the hold icon is additionally displayed, a part of the display mode is different between when the additional display of the hold icon is started and when the additional display is completed. Further, a part of the operation mode of the periodic operation may be different between the time when the additional display of the hold icon is started and the time when the additional display is completed. For example, it may operate small at the start of the additional display and may operate large after the additional display is completed. For example, at the start of the additional display, the left / right tilt may operate in the range of 0 to 10 degrees, and after the completion of the additional display, the left / right tilt may operate in the range of 25 degrees.

In addition, the size of the area where the numerical image is displayed is the same when the number of holdings of the change of the special symbol is singular and when there are multiple holdings, but the size of the area where the holding icon is displayed is different. ..

In addition, the hold icon and the icon can be displayed, and the hold icon and the icon can be made to repeat a predetermined periodic operation while the special symbol is changing. When the change display of the special symbol is completed, the hold icon and the icon can be displayed. The icon may disappear (hide), and then the periodic operation of the hold icon may be terminated. The icon may be extinguished after the periodic operation of the hold icon is terminated.

In addition, the hold icon and the icon can be displayed, and the hold icon and the icon can be made to repeatedly perform a predetermined periodic operation while the special symbol is changing. After the effect symbol is temporarily stopped, the icon may be extinguished, and the hold icon may be periodically operated between the time when the effect symbol is finally stopped and the time when the next special symbol change starts.

In addition, it is possible to display the effect symbol and the icon, and it is possible to make the icon repeat a predetermined periodic operation while the special symbol is changing, and after the effect symbol is temporarily stopped, the periodic operation of the icon is possible. May be terminated, the transparency of the icon may be changed from the first transparency to the second transparency, and the icon may be extinguished. It should be noted that the effect symbol is temporarily stopped and then finally stopped, and the transparency does not change before and after the main stop.

Further, it is possible to display the effect symbol, the small symbol, and the hold icon, and it is possible to repeatedly execute a predetermined periodic operation of changing the hold icon from the first state to the second state while the special symbol is changed. The hold icon may be moved after starting the change display of the small symbol with the start of the change of the special symbol, and the hold icon may start the periodic operation (from the beginning) from the first state after the movement.

Further, it is possible to display the effect symbol, the small symbol, and the hold icon, and it is possible to repeatedly execute a predetermined periodic operation of changing the hold icon from the first state to the second state while the special symbol is changed. With the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, after starting the fluctuation display of the small symbol, the hold icon is moved, and the hold icon is held between the time when the effect symbol stops and the next special symbol change starts. May perform periodic operation.

In addition, the effect symbol, the small symbol, and the hold icon can be displayed, and in the first effect mode (first stage), the hold icon changes from the first state to the second state in the first cycle operation. It is possible to repeat, and in the second effect mode (second stage) different from the first effect mode, it is possible to repeat the second cycle operation in which the hold icon changes from the third state to the fourth state. Yes, after starting the fluctuation display of the small symbol with the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the hold icon starts moving. The time from the first state to the next first state (cycle of the first cycle operation) in the first cycle operation is the time from the third state to the next hold icon in the second cycle operation. It may be the same as the time until the state of 3 is reached (the cycle of the second cycle operation).

In addition, a numerical image indicating the number of holds and a hold icon can be displayed, and in the first effect mode (first stage), the hold icon changes from the first state to the second state in the first cycle operation. It is possible to repeat, and in the second effect mode (second stage) different from the first effect mode, it is possible to repeat the second cycle operation in which the hold icon changes from the third state to the fourth state. be. After the display mode of the numerical image changes with the start of the change of the special symbol, the display mode of the hold icon changes. The time from the first state to the next first state (cycle of the first cycle operation) in the first cycle operation is the time from the third state to the next hold icon in the second cycle operation. It may be the same as the time until the state of 3 is reached (the cycle of the second cycle operation).

In addition, it is possible to display the effect symbol, the small symbol, and the hold icon, and it is highly expected that the special game will be executed from at least the first display mode to the display mode of the hold icon. It is possible to change to the second display mode, and it is possible to start the movement of the hold icon after starting the variable display of the small symbol with the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. It is possible to repeat the first cycle operation in which the hold icon displayed by the first display mode changes from the first state to the second state in the first cycle, and the hold displayed by the second display mode. It may be possible to repeat the second cycle operation in which the icon changes from the third state to the fourth state in a second cycle different from the first cycle.

In addition, it is possible to display an effect symbol, a hold icon, and a hold number display (numerical image) indicating another hold number, and the hold icon defines a periodic operation of changing from the first state to the second state. It can be repeated in a cycle. In addition, when the effect symbol is stopped, it is possible to execute an effect using the effect symbol (pre-stop operation effect or effect to add an effect), and when the effect symbol is stopped, the periodic operation of the hold icon is terminated. After changing the hold number display according to the change of the next special symbol, move the hold icon. The cycle of the cycle operation of the hold icon is shorter than the effect time of the effect using the effect symbol. It should be noted that the cycle of the periodic operation of the hold icon may be longer than the effect time of the effect using the effect symbol.

In addition, it is possible to display an effect symbol, a hold icon, and a hold number display (numerical image) indicating another hold number, and the hold icon defines a periodic operation of changing from the first state to the second state. It can be repeated in a cycle. Further, when the effect symbol is stopped, it is possible to execute an effect using the effect symbol (a pre-stop operation effect or an effect to add an effect). Further, it is possible to make the hold icon perform a periodic operation between the time when the effect symbol is finally stopped and the time when the next fluctuation is started, and the effect symbol is used as the cycle of the periodic operation of the hold icon. It is shorter than the production time of the production. It should be noted that the cycle of the periodic operation of the hold icon may be longer than the effect time of the effect using the effect symbol.

In addition, it is possible to display an effect symbol, a small symbol, and a hold icon, and it is possible to execute a periodic operation in which the hold icon changes from the first state to the second state. It is possible to move the hold icon after starting the variable display of the symbol. After the reach effect (N reach effect) is executed, the hold icon is hidden while the special effect (SP reach effect) with high expectation that the special game is executed is executed, and after the reach effect is executed, the special effect is executed. The hold icon remains visible when you do not run. The display of the small symbol is maintained regardless of whether or not the special effect is executed after the reach effect is executed.

In addition, it is possible to display an effect symbol, a small symbol, and a hold icon, and it is possible to execute a periodic operation in which the hold icon changes from the first state to the second state. It is possible to move the hold icon after starting the variable display of the symbol. It is possible to change the display mode of the hold icon from at least the first display mode to the second display mode in which the expectation that the special game is executed is higher than that of the first display mode, and the expectation that the special game is executed. When a special effect with a high degree is being executed, the hold icon displayed by the second display mode is hidden, and when a special game is performed after the special effect is completed, the hold icon is displayed by the second display mode. If no special game is played, the hold icon is displayed. The display of the small symbol is maintained even when the special effect is being executed.

In addition, it is possible to display an effect symbol, a small symbol, and a hold icon, and it is possible to execute a periodic operation in which the hold icon changes from the first state to the second state. It is possible to move the hold icon after starting the variable display of the symbol. In the case of performing a special game, the hold icon is hidden (Fig. 57 (o)) when the special effect with high expectation that the special game is executed after the reach effect is executed is being executed, and the special game is performed. When the special effect is not executed after the reach effect is executed, the display of the hold icon is maintained (as a result of FIG. 56 (j), the jackpot is notified). In the case of performing a special game, the display of the small symbol is maintained both when the special effect is executed after the reach effect is executed and when the special effect is not executed.

In addition, it is possible to display an effect symbol, a small symbol, and a hold icon, and it is possible to execute a periodic operation in which the hold icon changes from the first state to the second state. It is possible to move the hold icon after starting the variable display of the symbol. When the special effect with high expectation that the special game is executed is being executed, the hold icon is hidden (Fig. 57 (o)), and after the end of the special effect, after the effect symbol indicating the loss is displayed. When the effect symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed, the hold icon is hidden (Fig. 60 (r-2)), and after the end of the special effect, the effect symbol indicating the loss is displayed and then the effect symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed. If is not displayed, the hold icon is displayed (FIG. 58 (u)). The display of the small symbol is maintained even when the special effect is being executed.

In addition, it is possible to display an effect symbol, a small symbol, and a hold icon, and it is possible to execute a periodic operation in which the hold icon changes from the first state to the second state. It is possible to move the hold icon after starting the variable display of the symbol. After the reach effect is executed, the hold icon is hidden when the special effect with high expectation that the special game is executed is being executed (Fig. 57 (o)), and after the special effect is completed, the effect symbol showing the loss is shown. Is displayed, the hold icon is displayed (FIG. 58 (u)), and after the reach effect is executed, the hold icon is maintained when the special effect is not executed. The display of the small symbol is maintained even when the special effect is being executed.

In addition, the effect symbol, the small symbol, and the hold icon can be displayed. After the change display of the small symbol starts with the start of the change of the special symbol, the hold icon starts to move, and the small symbol becomes a predetermined one. Variable display is performed in a cycle. The hold icon can repeat the periodic operation of changing from the first state to the second state at a cycle different from the predetermined cycle (cycle of variable display of small symbols).

In addition, it is possible to display the effect symbol, the sub-first variable indicator indicating that the special symbol is changing, and the hold icon, and the special symbol is blinked at a predetermined cycle by blinking the sub-first variable indicator. Can be notified that is changing. After the sub-first fluctuation indicator starts blinking with the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the hold icon starts moving, and the hold icon changes from the first state to the second state. It can be repeated in a cycle different from the cycle (the blinking cycle of the sub-first variation indicator).

Further, the hold icon can be displayed, and the determination result of the jackpot determination can be notified after the first special symbol display 60 is variable-displayed (turned on and off) at a predetermined cycle, and the determination result of the jackpot determination can be notified according to the result of the jackpot determination. After the first special symbol display 60 starts the variable display, the hold icon starts moving, and the hold icon changes from the first state to the second state in the predetermined cycle (first special). It is possible to repeat the cycle of the fluctuation display of the symbol display 60, for example, a cycle different from the cycle of the cycle fluctuation).

In addition, the hold number display (1st number hold SHA, sub 1st hold display) that displays the hold number and the hold icon can be displayed, and the hold number display moves as the special symbol starts to change. The hold icon moves after the hold number display changes.

In addition, the effect symbol, the small symbol, and the hold icon can be displayed, and the hold icon starts moving after the small symbol starts the variable display with the start of the change of the special symbol. The hold icon repeats a periodic operation of reciprocating between the first position and the second position. The moving direction of the small symbol is different from the moving direction in the periodic operation of the hold icon.

Further, the hold icon can be displayed, and the determination result of the jackpot determination can be notified after the first special symbol display 60 is variable-displayed (lights up and blinks) at a predetermined cycle, and the hold icon is in the first state. It is possible to repeat the periodic operation of changing from to the second state to a cycle different from the predetermined cycle (cycle of fluctuation display of the first special symbol display 60, for example, cycle of cycle fluctuation). After the first special symbol display 60 starts lighting when the power is restored, the hold icon is displayed.

In addition, the effect symbol and the hold icon can be displayed. After the effect symbol stops changing due to the stop of the change of the special symbol, the hold icon starts moving, and the hold icon changes from the first state to the second state. It is possible to execute a periodic motion that changes to, and when a special effect with a high expectation that a special game is executed is executed, the display mode of the effect symbol is changed, but the mode of the periodic motion is not changed.

In addition, the effect symbol and the hold icon can be displayed. After the effect symbol stops changing due to the stop of the change of the special symbol, the hold icon starts moving, and the hold icon changes from the first state to the second state. It is possible to execute a periodic motion that changes to, and when a special effect with a high expectation that a special game is executed is executed, the display mode of the effect symbol is changed and the hold icon is hidden.

As described above, during the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol, the start motion effect using the effect symbol, the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the stop operation effect using the effect symbol, the icon additional display effect, the icon movement display effect, We explained the hold icon or the periodic operation using the icon, the disappearance effect of the icon, the disappearance effect of the hold icon, the variable display effect using the small symbol, and various other effects during the change of the special symbol. The time of may be as follows. For example, the time of the start motion effect using the effect symbol may be longer or shorter than the time of the stop operation effect using the effect symbol, and these times are expected to be a special game. It may be different depending on the degree. For example, when the jackpot expectation degree in the fluctuation of the special symbol is relatively low, the start motion effect in the variation may be longer (or shorter) than the stop motion effect, or may be the same. Further, when the degree of expectation is relatively high, the stop operation effect may be longer (or shorter) than the start operation effect, or may be the same. Further, regardless of the degree of expectation, the time of the variable display effect using the effect symbol may be longer than the respective times (and the sum of these times) of the start operation effect and the stop operation effect. Further, the time of the start operation effect may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the hold icon or the movement display effect of the icon (icon). Further, the time of the stop operation effect may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the icon movement display effect. Further, the time of the operation effect at the start may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the periodic operation of the icon. Further, the time of the operation effect at the time of stop may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the periodic operation of the icon. Further, the time of the stop operation effect may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the disappearance effect of the icon. Further, the time of the operation effect at the start may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the disappearance effect of the icon. Further, the time of the operation effect at the start may be longer or shorter than the time of the extinction effect of the hold icon when the extra hold icon is extinguished when the command is not normally received. It may be the same.

Further, the time of the variable display effect using the small symbol (or the sub-first variable indicator) may be longer than the time of each of the start operation effect and the stop operation effect using the effect symbol. Further, the time of the variable display effect using the small symbol (or the sub-first variable indicator) may be longer than the sum of the time of the start operation effect and the time of the stop operation effect. Further, the time of the variable display effect using the small symbol (or the sub-first variable display device) may be longer than the sum of the time of the start operation effect and the time of the variable display effect using the effect symbol. Further, the time of the variable display effect using the small symbol (or the sub-first variable indicator) may be longer than the sum of the time of the variable display effect using the effect symbol and the time of the stop operation effect.

In addition, when the effect using the effect is performed during the change of the special symbol, the time from the start of the effect to the return to the initial position is larger than the time of the start operation effect in the change. It may be long. The time from the start of the operation of the effect to the return to the initial position may be shorter or the same as the time of the operation effect at the start. In addition, when the effect using the effect symbol is performed during the change of the special symbol, the time from the start of the operation of the effect object to the return to the initial position is the stop operation using the effect symbol in the change. It may be longer, shorter, or the same as the production time. When the effect using the effect symbol is performed during the change of the special symbol, the time from the start of the operation of the effect object to the return to the initial position is the time of the variation display effect using the effect symbol in the change. May be shorter than, may be longer, or may be the same. In addition, when the effect using the effect is performed during the change of the special symbol, the time from the start of the operation of the effect to the return to the initial position is the hold icon or the icon (icon) in the change. It may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the moving display effect of. Further, the time from the start of the operation of the effect to the return to the initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the period of the periodic operation of the icon. Further, the time from the start of the operation of the effect to the return to the initial position may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the disappearance effect of the icon. In addition, the time from the start of the operation of the effect to the return to the initial position is longer than the time of the effect of extinguishing the hold icon when extinguishing the extra hold icon when the command is not normally received. It may be short, it may be short, or it may be the same.

Further, when the button promotion effect for prompting the button operation as shown in FIGS. 57 (n) and 57 (p) is executed during the change of the special symbol, the maximum time during which the valid period image YKG is displayed is the change. It may be longer than each time (and the sum of these times) of the start operation effect and the stop operation effect using the effect symbol. Further, the maximum time for displaying the valid period image YKG may be shorter than the time for the variable display effect using the effect symbol in the variation.

Further, when the button promotion effect is executed during the change of the special symbol, the maximum time for displaying the valid period image YKG may be longer than the time for the icon movement display effect. In addition, when the button promotion effect is executed while the special symbol is changing, the icon disappearance effect (normal time, the icon disappearance effect and the command cannot be received) during the maximum time during which the valid period image YKG is displayed. It may be longer than the extinction effect of the extra icon when the extra icon is displayed).

In addition, when the button promotion effect and the effect using the effect are executed during the change of the special symbol, the maximum time during which the valid period image YKG is displayed is the initial position after the effect starts to operate. It may be shorter, longer, or the same as the time it takes to return to. In addition, when the start effect effect is executed at the start of the change of the special symbol, the execution time of the start effect effect (time when the effect is added) is shorter than the start operation effect using the effect symbol in the change. It may be long, long, or the same. Further, the execution time of the effect effect at the start may be shorter, longer, or the same as each of the time of the stop operation effect and the variation display effect using the effect symbol in the fluctuation. Further, when the look-ahead chance eye effect is executed, the time during which the effect image indicating the chance eye is displayed may be shorter or longer than the stop operation effect using the effect symbol in the fluctuation. However, it may be the same. Further, when the look-ahead chance eye effect is executed, the time for displaying the effect image may be shorter, longer, or the same as the start operation effect using the effect symbol in the fluctuation. good. Further, when the look-ahead chance eye effect is executed, the time for displaying the effect image may be shorter, longer, or the same as the variable display effect using the effect symbol in the variation. ..

Further, the time of the start operation effect using the effect symbol is longer than the time of one cycle fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, the time of the variable display effect using the effect symbol is longer than the time of one cycle variation of the special symbol. Further, the time of the stop motion effect using the effect symbol is longer than the time of one cycle fluctuation of the special symbol.

Further, the time of the icon movement display effect may be longer than the time of one cycle fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, the time of the icon additional display effect may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of the one-cycle fluctuation of the special symbol. Further, the time of the disappearance effect of the icon in the normal time may be longer, shorter, or the same as the time of one cycle fluctuation of the special symbol. In addition, when an extra icon is displayed because the command cannot be received, the time of the icon disappearance effect when the extra icon disappears is the time of one cycle fluctuation of the special symbol. May be shorter, longer, or the same. Further, the time of the icon disappearance effect when the extra icon disappears may be longer than the time of one unit change in the cycle fluctuation of the special symbol.

Further, the fluctuation cycle of the sub-first fluctuation display 81 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle fluctuation of the first special symbol. Further, the fluctuation cycle of the sub-first fluctuation display 81 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the unit change in the cycle fluctuation of the first special symbol. good. Further, the fluctuation cycle of the sub-second fluctuation display 82 during the fluctuation of the second special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle fluctuation of the second special symbol. Further, the fluctuation cycle of the sub-second fluctuation display 82 during the fluctuation of the second special symbol may be longer, shorter, or the same as the cycle of the unit change in the cycle fluctuation of the second special symbol. good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, a jackpot game is performed, and a gaming machine in which the gaming state is changed via the jackpot game has been described. In another embodiment, even if it is not determined to be a big hit, the normal gaming state may be shifted to the reduced working hours gaming state. For example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (the number of consecutive times determined to be lost in the jackpot determination) reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 300 times), even if the fluctuation is not determined to be a jackpot. , The game may be shifted to a time-saving gaming state for a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, or 100 times or more). In this case, if the special symbol does not become a big hit by the time the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times, the time-saving gaming state ends and the game returns to the normal gaming state. Alternatively, even if the result of the jackpot determination is a loss (that is, even if the random number value for the jackpot determination acquired at the time of winning the starting port is a value indicating the loss), the random number for determining the jackpot symbol acquired at the time of winning is lost. If the numerical value (random number for determining the jackpot symbol (type of jackpot) when it is determined to be a jackpot) is a predetermined value, the player may shift to the time-saving gaming state for a predetermined number of times. Further, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the predetermined upper limit number of times may be variable or fixed. For example, when the predetermined upper limit number of times is variable, the time-saving gaming state is given when the number of times the special symbol changes becomes the first number, and the number of times the special symbol changes becomes the second number. In some cases, a time-saving gaming state may be granted. In this case, the number of time reductions given may be different according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, and the larger the number of fluctuations, the larger the number of time reductions may be set. Further, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the jackpot symbol determination random value, the number of time reductions given by the acquired jackpot symbol determination random value may differ. For example, when the acquired jackpot symbol determination random value is the first value, the first time reduction number is given, and when the acquired jackpot symbol determination random value is the second value, the second The number of time reductions may be given. Further, there may be a case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, or a case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the random value for determining the jackpot symbol. In this case, the number of times of time saving to be given may be different depending on the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the random value for determining the jackpot symbol. For example, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, the transition to the time-saving gaming state is performed 50 times, and in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state based on the random value for determining the jackpot symbol. It may shift to a time-saving game state of 30 times less than. On the contrary, the number of time saving may be increased in the case of shifting to the time saving gaming state based on the random value for determining the jackpot symbol than in the case of shifting to the time saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. In addition, in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state without going through the jackpot in this way, if the time-saving gaming state is further granted without going through the jackpot during the shifted time-saving gaming state, it is new. The time-saving game state may be continued as many times as the time-saving number of times given to. For example, if 50 times of time-saving game state is given without going through the jackpot, and when the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, 50 times of time-saving game state is given without going through the big hit. You may shift to the time-saving game state of 50 times. Alternatively, in this case, the number of time reductions may be added. For example, if 50 times of time-saving game state is given without going through the jackpot, and when the special symbol fluctuates 30 times in the time-saving game state, 50 times of time-saving game state is given without going through the big hit. In addition to the remaining 20 times, 50 times newly granted may be added, and 70 times of time saving game state may be given. Further, during such a time-saving game state that does not go through the big hit, the time-saving game state that does not go through the big hit may not be given. Further, in a configuration in which the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol or the random value for determining the jackpot symbol without going through the jackpot, even if the time-saving suggestion effect suggesting the transition to the time-saving gaming state is performed. good. For example, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is close to the above-mentioned upper limit number of times, the time saving suggestion effect may be easily executed. On the contrary, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is close to the above-mentioned upper limit number of times, the time saving suggestion effect may be difficult to be performed. Further, in the start operation effect using the effect symbol, a time saving suggestion effect may be performed. For example, if the effect symbol operates in a specific mode at the start of the fluctuation, it may suggest the possibility of shifting to the time-saving gaming state. Further, in the variable display effect using the effect symbol, a time saving suggestion effect may be performed. Further, in the stop operation effect using the effect symbol, a time saving suggestion effect may be performed.

(Structure of a gaming machine according to the present invention and its action and effect)
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have the following configuration. It should be noted that the parentheses indicate the correspondence with the embodiment and are merely examples.

(Structure 1)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 1 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Is possible, and the effect control means has a first variation effect by the first effect symbol (effect symbol 701) and a second effect different from the first effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information. The second variation effect by the effect symbol (small symbol 702) can be executed, and the first variation effect includes a start operation effect (floating, rotation, etc.) for operating the first effect symbol in a predetermined mode, and the above-mentioned. After the start operation effect, the variable display effect (scroll display) for variablely displaying the first effect symbol is included, and the second variable effect is executed during the start operation effect.

(Structure 2)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 2 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Is possible, and the effect control means has a first variation effect by the first effect symbol (effect symbol 701) and a second effect different from the first effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information. The second variation effect by the effect symbol (small symbol 702) can be executed, and the first variation effect includes a start operation effect (floating, rotation, etc.) for operating the first effect symbol in a predetermined mode, and the above-mentioned. After the start operation effect, the first effect symbol is variablely displayed (scroll display), and in the second variable effect, the second effect symbol is not operated in a predetermined display mode. The second effect symbol variation display is executed.

(Structure 3)
The gaming machine according to the third configuration is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (effect symbol 701) in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect is a start operation effect (in which the effect symbol is operated in a predetermined mode). Hold information (hold icon, number hold, sub hold display) corresponding to the hold memory, including a change display effect (scroll display) in which the effect symbol is variablely displayed after the start operation effect (floating, rotation, etc.). The device) can be displayed, and the hold information can be reduced and displayed in response to the decrease in the hold memory, and the hold information is reduced and displayed after the start operation effect. ..

(Structure 4)
The gaming machine according to the fourth configuration is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol (effect symbol 701) in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect is a start operation effect (which operates the effect symbol in a predetermined mode). It is possible to display a hold display (hold icon) corresponding to the hold memory, including a change display effect (scroll display) in which the effect symbol is variablely displayed after the start operation effect (floating, rotation, etc.). It is possible to move and display the hold display in response to the decrease in the hold memory, and the move display of the hold display is started during the start operation effect.

(Structure 5)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 5 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect includes a start operation effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode and the start operation effect. After that, it is possible to display the hold display corresponding to the hold memory, including the change display effect of changing the effect symbol, and the hold display is moved and displayed according to the decrease of the hold memory. It is possible to end the movement display of the hold display during the start operation effect.

(Structure 6)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 6 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect includes a start operation effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode and the start operation effect. After that, the first information display (holding icon) corresponding to the holding storage can be displayed, including the variable display effect for variablely displaying the effect symbol, and the holding storage is reduced. It is possible to move and display the first information display and display it as the second information display (the icon), and the moving display of the first information display is started during the start operation effect.

(Structure 7)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 7 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect includes a start operation effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode and the start operation effect. After that, the first information display (holding icon) corresponding to the holding storage can be displayed, including the variable display effect for variablely displaying the effect symbol, and the holding storage is reduced. The first information display can be moved and displayed as the second information display (the icon), and the second information display can be displayed during the start operation effect.

(Structure 8)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 8 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect includes a start operation effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode and the start operation effect. After that, a variable display effect for variablely displaying the effect symbol is included, and a hold display (hold icon) corresponding to the hold storage can be displayed, and the hold display is displayed as a predetermined display during the start operation effect. It is possible to operate in a mode (periodic operation).

(Structure 9)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 9 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect includes a start operation effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode and the start operation effect. After that, the first information display (holding icon) corresponding to the holding storage can be displayed, including the variable display effect for variablely displaying the effect symbol, and the holding storage is reduced. The first information display can be moved and displayed as a second information display (the icon), and the second information display is operated (periodic operation) in a predetermined display mode during the start operation effect. It is possible.

(Structure 10)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 10 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect causes the effect symbol to operate in a predetermined mode. It is possible to execute a background effect that operates at least a part of the background image, including a start operation effect and a variable display effect that variablely displays the effect symbol after the start operation effect. The background effect can be performed.

(Structure 11)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 11 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect causes the effect symbol to operate in a predetermined mode. It is possible to execute the background effect of operating at least a part of the background image, including the start operation effect and the variable display effect of varyingly displaying the effect symbol after the start operation effect, and the start operation effect is started. The background effect can be executed from the front.

(Structure 12)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 12 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect causes the effect symbol to operate in a predetermined mode. It is possible to output a predetermined sound (BGM or the like) during the variable display of the identification information, including the start operation effect and the variable display effect of variablely displaying the effect symbol after the start operation effect, and the start operation. During the production, the output of the predetermined sound is started.

(Structure 13)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 13 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect causes the effect symbol to operate in a predetermined mode. It is possible to output a predetermined sound (BGM or the like) during the variable display of the identification information, including the start operation effect and the variable display effect of variablely displaying the effect symbol after the start operation effect, and the start operation. The predetermined sound can be output when the effect is executed.

(Structure 14)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 14 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, the effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect causes the effect symbol to operate in a predetermined mode. It is possible to output a predetermined sound (BGM or the like) during the variable display of the identification information, including the start operation effect and the variable display effect of variablely displaying the effect symbol after the start operation effect, and the start operation. The predetermined sound that has been output before the execution of the effect can be continuously output even during the execution of the start operation effect.

(Structure 15)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 15 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Is possible, and the effect control means has a first variation effect by the first effect symbol (effect symbol 701) and a second effect different from the first effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information. It is possible to execute the second variable effect by the effect symbol (small symbol 702), and in the stop display of the identification information, the first stop display by the first effect symbol and the second stop display by the second effect symbol. Is possible, after the first variation effect, a pre-stop operation effect for operating the first effect symbol in a predetermined mode can be executed, and after the pre-stop operation effect, the first stop display is displayed. It is feasible, and the second variation effect is executed during the pre-stop operation effect.

(Structure 16)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 16 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variation effect by a plurality of effect symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) in the variation display of the identification information, and the identification information can be displayed. In the stop display of, it is possible to execute the stop display by the plurality of effect symbols, and after the variation effect, it is possible to execute the pre-stop operation effect of operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode, and the pre-stop operation effect. After that, it is possible to execute the stop display by the plurality of effect symbols, and while the first effect symbol (left symbol) among the plurality of effect symbols is performing the pre-stop operation effect, the plurality of effects. The second effect symbol (right symbol) of the symbols may perform the pre-stop operation effect, or the second effect symbol may perform a variable display.

(Structure 17)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 17 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Is possible, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol in the variable display of the identification information, and in the stop display of the identification information, the stop display by the effect symbol is displayed. It is feasible, and after the variation effect, it is possible to execute the pre-stop operation effect in which the effect symbol is operated in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop operation effect, the stop display by the effect symbol can be executed. Yes, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner during the pre-stop operation effect.

(Structure 18)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 18 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and can execute the stop display by the effect symbol in the stop display of the identification information. After that, it is possible to execute the pre-stop operation effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop operation effect, the stop display by the effect symbol can be executed, and the second stop corresponding to the hold memory. 1 Information display (hold icon) can be displayed, and the first information display can be moved and displayed as the second information display (the icon) in response to the decrease in the hold memory. Yes, after the pre-stop operation effect, it is possible to execute an extinction effect (disappearance effect of the icon) that extinguishes the second information display.

(Structure 19)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 19 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute the variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and can execute the stop display by the effect symbol in the stop display of the identification information. After that, it is possible to execute the pre-stop operation effect for operating the effect symbol in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop operation effect, the stop display by the effect symbol can be executed, and the second stop corresponding to the hold memory. 1 Information display (hold icon) can be displayed, and the first information display can be moved and displayed as the second information display (the icon) in response to the decrease in the hold memory. Yes, the second information display disappears after the stop display by the effect symbol.

(Structure 20)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 20 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. In the variation display of the identification information, the effect control means has a first variation effect by the first effect symbol (effect symbol 701) and a second effect symbol (small symbol 702) different from the first effect symbol. The two variable effects can be executed, and in the stop display of the identification information, the first stop display by the first effect symbol and the second stop display by the second effect symbol can be executed, and the first stop display can be executed. After the variation effect, the pre-stop operation effect of operating the first effect symbol in a predetermined mode can be executed, and after the pre-stop operation effect, the first stop display can be executed, and the hold memory can be stored. The corresponding first information display (hold icon) can be displayed, and the first information display is moved and displayed as the second information display (the icon) in response to the decrease in the hold memory. It is possible to execute the extinction effect of extinguishing the second information display after the second stop display is executed.

(Structure 21)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 21 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Is possible, and the effect control means has a first variation effect by the first effect symbol (effect symbol 701) and a second effect different from the first effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information. It is possible to execute the second variable effect by the effect symbol (small symbol 702), and in the stop display of the identification information, the first stop display by the first effect symbol and the second stop display by the second effect symbol. Is possible, after the first variation effect, a pre-stop operation effect for operating the first effect symbol in a predetermined mode can be executed, and after the pre-stop operation effect, the first stop display is displayed. It is feasible, and after the second variation effect, the second stop display can be executed without operating the second effect symbol in a predetermined display mode.

(Structure 22)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 22 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Is possible, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol in the variable display of the identification information, and in the stop display of the identification information, the stop display by the effect symbol is displayed. It is feasible, and after the variation effect, it is possible to execute a pre-stop operation effect in which the effect symbol is operated in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop operation effect, the stop display by the effect symbol can be executed. Yes, it is possible to execute a background effect that operates at least a part of the background image, and it is possible to execute the background effect while the stop display by the effect symbol is being executed.

(Structure 23)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 23 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Is possible, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol in the variable display of the identification information, and in the stop display of the identification information, the stop display by the effect symbol is displayed. It is feasible, and after the variation effect, it is possible to execute a pre-stop operation effect in which the effect symbol is operated in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop operation effect, the stop display by the effect symbol can be executed. Yes, it is possible to execute a background effect that operates at least a part of the background image, and it is possible to execute the background effect during the execution of the pre-stop operation effect and the stop display by the effect symbol.

(Structure 24)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 24 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Is possible, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol in the variable display of the identification information, and in the stop display of the identification information, the stop display by the effect symbol is displayed. It is feasible, and after the variation effect, it is possible to execute a pre-stop operation effect in which the effect symbol is operated in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop operation effect, the stop display by the effect symbol can be executed. Yes, it is possible to output a predetermined sound (BGM or the like) during the variable display of the identification information, and continuously output the predetermined sound during the execution of the pre-stop operation effect and the stop display by the effect symbol. It is possible.

(Structure 25)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 25 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol in the variable display of the identification information, and the stop display by the effect symbol is displayed in the stop display of the identification information. It is feasible, and after the variation effect, it is possible to execute a pre-stop operation effect in which the effect symbol is operated in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop operation effect, the stop display by the effect symbol can be executed. Yes, it is possible to output a predetermined sound (BGM or the like) during the variable display of the identification information, and during the pre-stop operation effect, the predetermined sound can be output in response to an operation on the predetermined operation unit (cross key 19). The volume can be adjusted.

(Structure 26)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 26 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means can execute a variable effect by the effect symbol in the variable display of the identification information, and the stop display by the effect symbol is displayed in the stop display of the identification information. It is feasible, and after the variation effect, it is possible to execute a pre-stop operation effect in which the effect symbol is operated in a predetermined mode, and after the pre-stop operation effect, the stop display by the effect symbol can be executed. Yes, a predetermined sound (BGM or the like) can be output during the variable display of the identification information, and the predetermined sound can be output in response to an operation on the predetermined operation unit (cross key 19) during the pre-stop operation effect. The volume can be adjusted, a predetermined notification sound can be output when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the predetermined notification sound (error notification sound) is output during the pre-stop operation effect. It is possible to suppress the volume of the sound of.

(Structure 27)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 27 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the effect control means has a first variable effect by the first effect symbol (effect symbol 701) and a second effect different from the first effect symbol in the variable display of the identification information. It is possible to execute the second variation effect by the symbol (small symbol 702), and the first variation effect causes the first effect symbol to operate in any one of a plurality of modes (floating, rotation, etc.). The start operation effect and the variable display effect of displaying the first effect symbol in a variable manner after the start operation effect are included, and the second variable effect is executed during the start operation effect.

(Structure 28)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 28 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Is possible, and the effect control means has a first variation effect by the first effect symbol (effect symbol 701) and a second effect different from the first effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information. It is possible to execute the second variable effect by the effect symbol (small symbol 702), and the first variable effect operates the first effect symbol in any one of a plurality of modes (floating, rotating, etc.). In the second variable effect, the second effect symbol is operated in a predetermined display mode, including a start operation effect to be caused and a variable display effect in which the first effect symbol is variablely displayed after the start operation effect. Instead, the variable display of the second effect symbol is executed.

(Structure 29)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 29 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect is a start operation for operating the effect symbol in any one of a plurality of modes. It is possible to display the hold information (hold icon, number hold, sub hold display, etc.) corresponding to the hold storage, including the effect and the variable display effect of varyingly displaying the effect symbol after the start operation effect. It is possible to reduce and display the hold information in response to the decrease in the hold memory, and the hold information is reduced and displayed after the start operation effect.

(Structure 30)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 30 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect is a start operation for operating the effect symbol in any one of a plurality of modes. It is possible to display the hold display (hold icon) corresponding to the hold memory, including the effect and the variable display effect of variablely displaying the effect symbol after the start operation effect, and the hold memory is reduced. It is possible to move and display the hold display according to the above, and the move display of the hold display is started during the start operation effect.

(Structure 31)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 31 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect is a start operation for operating the effect symbol in any one of a plurality of modes. It is possible to display the hold display (hold icon) corresponding to the hold memory, including the effect and the variable display effect of variablely displaying the effect symbol after the start operation effect, and the hold memory is reduced. It is possible to move and display the hold display according to the above, and the movement display of the hold display is terminated during the start operation effect.

(Structure 32)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 32 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect is a start operation for operating the effect symbol in any one of a plurality of modes. It is possible to display the first information display (hold icon) corresponding to the hold storage, including the effect and the variable display effect of varyingly displaying the effect symbol after the start operation effect, and the hold memory is reduced. Depending on the situation, the first information display can be moved and displayed as the second information display (the icon), and the moving display of the first information display can be displayed during the start operation effect. It has been started.

(Structure 33)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 33 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect is a start operation for operating the effect symbol in any one of a plurality of modes. It is possible to display the first information display (hold icon) corresponding to the hold storage, including the effect and the variable display effect of varyingly displaying the effect symbol after the start operation effect, and the hold memory is reduced. Depending on the situation, the first information display can be moved and displayed as a second information display (the icon), and the second information display can be displayed during the start operation effect. Is possible.

(Structure 34)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 34 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect is a start operation for operating the effect symbol in any one of a plurality of modes. An effect and a variable display effect of varyingly displaying the effect symbol after the start operation effect are included, and a hold display (hold icon) corresponding to the hold memory can be displayed, and during the start operation effect, the effect can be displayed. It is possible to operate the hold display in a predetermined display mode (periodic operation).

(Structure 35)
The gaming machine according to the configuration 35 is a gaming machine including a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means. , The determination information is acquired, it is determined whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and the identification information is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination. Can be stopped and displayed, and the determination information before the determination is made can be stored in the hold storage means as hold storage, and the hold storage may be decreased or increased. The effect control means can execute a variation effect by the effect symbol in the variation display of the identification information, and the variation effect is a start operation for operating the effect symbol in any one of a plurality of modes. It is possible to display the first information display (hold icon) corresponding to the hold storage, including the effect and the variable display effect of varyingly displaying the effect symbol after the start operation effect, and the hold memory is reduced. Depending on the situation, the first information display can be moved and displayed as a second information display (the icon), and the second information display can be displayed as a predetermined display mode during the start operation effect. It is possible to operate with (periodic operation).

The embodiments described above, other embodiments, and configurations according to these modifications can be arbitrarily combined as long as they do not contradict each other. Further, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, other embodiments, and configurations according to these modifications, and other modifications may be added.

1 Pachinko game machine 45 1st starting port 47 2nd starting port 50 1st big winning opening 56 2nd big winning opening 60 1st special symbol display 61 2nd special symbol display 62 Normal symbol display 63 1st special symbol Hold indicator 64 2nd special symbol hold indicator 81 Sub 1st variable indicator 82 Sub 2nd variable indicator 83 Sub 1st hold indicator 84 Sub 2nd hold indicator 701 Directional symbol 702 Small symbol HA 1st hold icon HB 2nd hold icon TI The icon SHA 1st number hold SHB 2nd number hold

Claims (1)

The main control means that controls the progress of the game,
A gaming machine provided with an effect control means for controlling an effect based on a command from the main control means.
The main control means
Get the judgment information,
Based on the determination information, a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game is executed, and the special game determination is executed.
Based on the result of the special game determination, it is possible to stop and display the identification information after a lapse of a predetermined time after the identification information is variablely displayed.
In the variable display of the identification information, the first command corresponding to the result of the special game determination is transmitted.
Prior to the special game determination, the preliminary determination can be executed based on the determination information.
A second command is sent based on the result of the preliminary determination,
The effect control means is
When the first command is received in the variation display of the identification information, it is possible to execute the first variation effect by the first effect symbol and the second variation effect by the second effect symbol different from the first effect symbol. ,
When the second command is received, the pre-determination effect can be executed based on the result of the pre-determination.
The first variable effect includes a start operation effect in which the first effect symbol is operated in a predetermined mode, and a variable display effect in which the first effect symbol is variablely displayed after the start operation effect.
The pre-determination effect includes a first pre-determination effect and a second pre-determination effect whose effect mode is different from that of the first pre-determination effect.
In the stop display of the identification information, the first stop display by the first effect symbol and the second stop display by the second effect symbol can be executed.
After the variable display effect, it is possible to execute the pre-stop operation effect in which the first effect symbol is operated in a predetermined mode.
After the pre-stop operation effect, the first stop display can be executed.
During the pre-stop operation effect, the second variation effect is being executed.
If not receiving the first command in the variable display of the identification information and the start operation effect and the first pre-determined effect is infeasible, the second pre-determined effect is Ri executable der,
A gaming machine that executes the first variation effect according to the next first command when the next first command is received during the execution of the first variation effect.

Images